Home

Installing ITEM ToolKit

1. UN These settings place the graphic in the upper right corner of the header Note in this example that the graphic has covered up some information You will need to remove or move those fields of data in the Header tab to solve the issue 557 ENA Ground benign TWP 45 Analyst iT Citit Rer Quanity iare erment iea Faie RAD do sd Cir uit 288 Item ToolKit Tutorial Fields Tab The Fields tab is where you can adjust how the columns of your report are fitted to the data You can have the column fit either the heading the data itself or you can specify exactly how wide the column is 1 TWIP 1 1440 of an inch Many times the number or width of the columns will cause them to run off the right side of the paper Use this tab to make the necessary adjustments to the column widths to fit the report on the paper as you desire 4 IT Reports s m i Print Cancel eletta Preview Templates Customize Report Template Selection i pter Group Header Group Footer Paper Size Q Reports P ied C oc Save d IP MILz17 Reports Hele anng Failure Rate Ee Report Failure Rate Name Group Parts List E Part Number Field width E Parameters SE FitHeading v Fitbata twips o Pi Factors Parent Mame 5 Allocation Category Descriptic Choose the column and then NonOp Failure Description select how it will be fitted to Nondp Pi Facti Ej Circ
2. H dj mE iE Tool Name fal Nudge Up Hl Nudge Down E Nudge Left Nudge Right Chapter 7 RBD 173 Description Add a MIL HDBK 217 Electronic System Add a SR 332 Telcordia Electronic System Add an IEC 62380 French Telecom Standard Electronic System Add a 299B Chinese Military Standard Electronic System Add a NSWC Mechanical System Add a Maintain MIL HDBK 472 Procedure V System Add a Spare Cost Spares Scaling and Ranging System Add a Failure Modes Effects and Criticality Analysis FMECA System Add a Reliability Block Diagram RBD System Add a Fault Tree Analysis FTA System Add an Event Tree Analysis ETA System Add a Markov Modeling System Description Move the selected components one logical unit up Move the selected components one logical unit down Move the selected components one logical unit left Move the selected components one logical unit right 174 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide The Zoom Toolbar The Zoom Toolbar contains commands for zooming and panning the canvas Zoom options can also be accessed by right clicking in the white space on the RBD diagram OWS Tool Name is Ruler Control Properties al Zoom Fil Zoom to Fit a Zoom to Selection wy Pan Description Turn the ruler of the canvas on or off Open the properties window and allows the user to change the selected component properties Changes the cursor to a magnifying glass and al
3. 136 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide System Title Compiled by Name of the person who ERE the data for the FMECA Analysis Function Description Purpose Description of this System 61508 and ISO 26262 basic and advanced Select the calculation mode you wish to implement Choose from Basic Mode or Advanced Mode Split and Hit The following view is displayed in Dialog View in the Mode tab mu rc E Block info E3 Mode info E3 Detectahity t Diagnostic Coverage SFF Selected EE Negligible Effect Far small changes FD CP Remarks Is Failure Modes Epo oe Ne Intermittent Operation 1 Marginal Negligible Effect for small 1 Minor No effect 1 oS MW Minor 0 4 Catastrophic 1 m Catastrophic 0 5 No operation 1 E I Critical WEJ Causes Contributors Incorrect Meter Reading Contributor Negligible Effect far small changes Contributor Negligible Effect for small changes Contributor Premature Operation Contributor Incorrect Meter Reading Contributor Negligible Effect for small changes Cantributor Chapter 6 FMECA 137 Mode Ref ID Failure mode reference number Probability of current failure mode causing end effect MIL STD 1629A Severity Category Any other notes or pertinent information At the System level the Detectability Panel appears with the Safe or Dangerous radio buttons for you to choose if the System failure mode creates either situation Safe is the default Thi
4. TOOLKIT Version 7 Tutorial Getting Started Guide ITEM TOOLKIT TUTORIAL GETTING STARTED GUIDE USA Office 34 Executive Park Suite 210 Irvine CA 92614 U S A Telephone 1 714 935 2900 Fax 1 714 935 2911 Email sales 9 itemsoft com ITEM TOOLKIT Tutorial Version 8 0 UK Office 4 Belfry House 4400 Parkway Whiteley Fareham Hampshire POI5 7FJ U K Telephone 44 0 1489 885085 Fax 44 0 1489 885065 Email sales itemsoft com Copyright 2011 ITEM Software USA Inc All Rights Reserved The Software Product any media printed materials online or electronic documentation instructional material or similar materials relating the software are owned by ITEM SOFTWARE and are protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties All other matters including use and distribution of the Software Product shall be in accordance with Item Softwares SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT and or with the prior written permission of Item Software USA Inc The copyright and the foregoing restrictions on the copyright use extend to all media in which this information may be preserved This guide may not in whole or in part be copied photocopied translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine readable form without prior consent in writing from Item Software The information in this guide is subject to change without notice and I
5. x C Documents and SettingssGemina Pake e RBD Systems HA Fault Tree Systems Res EXPLOSION FR 5 783361 A RELEASE ER BDD Binary Decision Diagre E A TRAIN DE RAIL h amp COOLING S amp ame 5 Q 7 7173891e 10 S A ELECTRICS we6 1597 134 7 D d NOSIGFC d SYSTEM 1 seu A a m IPR Matkov Systems BA EN wa 2l xl Gas srta 4 ono Cata Q 0 99999177 Q 1 21e 5 w 0 w 1 642759 e 8 UT C Documents and Settings Gemina Pake My D EXPLOSION FR 5 783361 7e 7 Q 7 7 AND EXPLOSION ABC EXPLOSIO TRANSFER PROTECTION SYE AND PROTECTION SYS L OR ELEMENT A Loss BASIC POWER L eee rr LO BASIC LOSS OF A WV OR ELEMENT B Loss O 0 60668536 Q 0 99997908 BASIC LOSS OF B w 0 0003031579 we2 5731727 e 8 REPEAT POWER f amp OR LEAK 0 999991 77 BASIC LIT Pipe Sc BASIC SION Corros Fault Tree RBD H BASIC SPARK Spark Q 1 21e Ma gt Dialog Grid Fault Tree l Chart Result 2 LE ni Baa 90 For Help press F1 Gates 3 6 ENQts 3 7 NUM The Fault Tree editor can be made visible by selecting the Dialog Tab 1 or the Fault Tree Tab 2 Its main elements are the following Main Menu 3 Quick access to the main functions Fault Tree Toolbars 4 Quick access to editing functions Project Window 5 A hierarchical view of the project and systems System Window 6 A hierarchical view of the system blocks connections
6. Dialog Chapter 3 ToolKit Basics 87 The Grid tab shows the selected element data in tabular format You can edit data in the Grid window If you want to zoom in on a particular section of the grid select the desired cells and select Grid View Zoom In from the Layout Menu Ifyou want to see more of the grid select Grid View Zoom Out from the Layout Menu Select Grid View Zoom 100 from the Layout Menu to restore the grid to normal size Hm Name Category Description Part Number a Block Power Supply 110 240 v AC Supply Sviiey P531 Capacitor CAPACITOR FIXED CK 33PF d 33PF 1 Capacitor CAPACITOR FIXED POLYESTER 1 nF E 10MF 8 Capacitor CAPACITOR FIXED CERAMIC CHIP 220 pF Dans cog Gg Transformer TRANSFORMER TRANS MODELAZ3 1 Capacitor CAPACITOR FIXED AL ELECT 4700 uF 90950G 1 Capacitor CAPACITOR FIXED SOLID TANT 4 7 uF T110 91920A Diode Low Frequenc DIODE GLASS PACKAGE Z5122 4 Resistor RESISTOR FIXED FILM 620 OHM SMAD2075 4097 1AM a Resistor mE RESISTOR FIXED MET OXIDE 1K2 FP2 162644M 0 Capacitor CAPACITOR FIXED AL ELECT 4700 uF 90968G d Capacitor CAPACITOR FIXED POLYESTER i cO10NF 9 amp 5 Connection BE CONNECTION CRIMP Zoom In E i DEM LS Zaaom OE mM 100 Spelling Check l lil 8 ma The Diagram tab is used to buil
7. e The Choose Destination Location dialog box appears To choose a destination folder that the program files should be installed into click Next to accept the default destination folder or click Browse select an alternate folder then click Next NOTE 77e destination folder must be shared on the network to provide access to all network clients ITEM ToolKit Version 8 0 0 Choose Destination Location Select folder where Setup will install files Setup will install ter Toolkit in the following folder Ta install to this folder click Nest To install to a different Folder click Browse and select another folder Destination Folder C Program Files Browse L ancel The Server Installation Connection Type dialog appears Select the type of connection you wish for the client machine The choice is either Network File Share or TCP IP With the former option full read write access to the destination folder is required With the latter option you must also enter a port number If you are unsure which option to select please consult your Network Administrator Once your choice has been made click Next Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit 27 ITEM Toolkit Version 8 0 0 Server Installation Connection Type Please select the type of Server Connection pou wish for the Client machines The Network File Share option requires Full Readsw rite access to the destination folder Network File Share TCP
8. INSTALL DEMO _ To exit the demo at any time simply press the escape key on your keyboard Thank you for choosing Item Software and we look fonward to being of service to you in the near future ltem Sottware 20604 Them Sofberare e Select Install or Upgrade 42 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide INSTALL PRODUCT HOME ABOUT US Fersion 7 07 1 PRODUCTS for new installations CUSTOMERS E ToolKit Upgrade SERVICES K Jf yon have purchased a software prodici Upsrade an existing copy from liemi Software of ITEM Toolkit mp for 7x installations only CONTACT US PDF FILES please click a button on the nghi o install INSTALL DEMO or upagrude ihe DPO Version 2 0 0 Quantitative Risk Assessment System Install Demo e Select ITEM ToolKit The installation wizard begins NOTE f he following window appears click Yes to allow the process to uninstall the existing installation and then restart the installation process ITEM ToolKit Existing Installation An existing installation has been detected on your system This must be removed before a new version can be installed Once removed run Setup again to install the new version Remove the existing installation Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit 43 ITEM ToolKit Version 8 0 0 ITEM ToolKit Verzion 8 0 0 The InstallShield Wizard will install ITEM ToolKit on your computer Please close all other open appl
9. Failure blode Category List Add an item from the list 9 S Start FMECA Analysis Allows the user to perform the analysis Abort FMECA Analysis Allows the user to stop the analysis Shortcut Keys Key Ctrl N Ctrl O Ctrl S Ctrl P Ctrl X Ctrl C Ctrl V Ctrl W Del Fl Function Open a new project Open an existing document Displays the Open dialog box in which you can locate and open the desired file Save the active project with its current name If you have not named the project the Save As dialog box will open Print the Active View Remove selected data from the document and stores it on the clipboard Copy the selection to the clipboard Paste the contents of the clipboard at the insertion point Paste the contents of the clipboard Gate or Event at the insertion point as a Repeat Gate or Repeat Event Delete the selection Open the ITEM ToolKit On line Help Chapter 7 RBD 157 CHAPTER 7 RBD A reliability block diagram RBD provides a simple way to compare various configurations in an attempt to find the best overall system design This chapter 1 Introduces RBD systems 2 Describes ToolKit s RBD features 3 Outlines an example RBD system 4 Describes the RBD Screen Editor Toolbars and Shortcut Keys 1 Introduction A reliability block diagram RBD is a drawing and calculation tool used to model complex systems An RBD is a series of blocks representing por
10. Open an existing document The ToolKit displays the Open dialog box in which you can locate and open the desired file Save the active document or template with its current name If you have not named the document the ToolKit displays the Save As dialog box Remove selected data from the document and stores it on the clipboard Copy the selection to the clipboard Paste the contents of the clipboard at the insertion point Delete the selection Reverse the last editing Note You cannot undo some actions Print the active document Open the About ITEM ToolKit Window Open the ITEM ToolKit On line Help The SpareCost Dialog Window Controls The SpareCost Dialog Window Contains the following Controls O my Tool K E d Name Undo Changes Analyse Description Cancels the latest operation Run the Analysis of the system Check Spelling Check the Spelling of the selected Text 252 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide The Project Toolbar The Project Toolbar displays the available analysis options for the ToolKit application A A A A A PSEA uS Tool Name Y MIL217 A Telcordia Bellcore JI IEC 62380 RDF 209B NSWC Mechanical Maintain SpareCost RBD Fault Tree Event Tree A jN P Y FMECA iei an Ta Markov The SpareCost Toolbar Description Add a MIL HDBK 217 Electronic System Add a SR 332 Telcordia Electronic System Add an IEC 62380 Frenc
11. viee Dnly Client 7 all T le lq Cancel Choose Standalone and click Next 14 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide e The License Agreement dialog box appears Read the license agreement carefully and click Yes to accept or No to decline If you click No the setup program closes e The Customer Information dialog box appears Type the user name and the company name in the appropriate boxes and then click Next ITEM ToolKit Version 8 0 0 Customer Information Please enter your information Please enter your name and the name of the company for whom you work User Name Company Mame ITEM Software LISA Inc i Back Cancel e The Choose Destination Location dialog box appears To choose a destination folder that the program files should be installed into click Next to accept the default destination folder or click Browse select an alternate folder then click Next ITEM ToolKit Version 8 0 0 Choose Destination Location Select folder where Setup will install files y jt Setup wall install Irem Toolkit in the following folder Ta install to this Folder click Mest To install to a different folder click Browse and select another Folder Destination Folder C Program Files Browse Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit 15 The Select Program Folder dialog box appears To accept the Item Software folder click Next To create a new folder type the name of the new folder in
12. 294 Item ToolKit Tutorial In addition to the MIL 217 parameters you can have the following columns in your worksheet for ITK to import ID a unique sequential ID number for each block and component row in the sheet System ID a static number indicating the system that the block component is a part of used only if you have more than one System in the Project Parent ID a static number that points to the block that the component is part of 0 for blocks 1 for components Name should be unique or left blank ITK will assign a unique numerical name to the block component Category Keyword this is a two letter designator for the block component BK for block CR for a cap RS for a resistor See the ToolKit Help text for a listing Make the Worksheet 1 Now that you understand the columns required in your worksheet you can begin constructing an example We suggest the following m a eke Lu Ter cap 440 uf 40 4 Irs Ns 0 Notice how all Components are assigned to the same System ID the Block is Parent 0 and each Component is assigned to the first Parent the Block Using this pattern you can see all of the required optional fields to meet the import and MIL 217 requirements 2 Name this worksheet Blocks amp Components Excel menu Format Sheet Rename 3 Then add two more worksheets to your Excel file Excel menu Insert Worksheet one named Physical the other Application Ma
13. The IEC 62380 module supports methods of reliability prediction as described in the French standard published by the Union Technique de L Electricite UTE July 2000 IEC 62380 is a universal model for reliability prediction of electronics printed circuit boards and equipment which takes directly into account the influence of the environment Environment factors are no longer used as they are replaced by mission profile undergone by the equipment The models in the guide can handle permanent working on off cycling and dormant applications CHINA 299B The 299B module supports methods of reliability prediction as described in Chinese 299B standard 299B is a reliability prediction guide for electronic parts in both commercial and military industries The standard provides the user with the opportunity to take into account the environmental conditions quality levels and stress conditions The guide provides procedures to perform Parts Stress Analysis as well as Parts Count Analysis Chapter 1 Introducing ITEM ToolKit 5 FMECA The FMECA module is based on the United States Military MIL STD 1629A Procedures for Performing a Failure Mode Effects and Criticality Analysis This procedure was developed to determine the effects of system and equipment failures The module also now covers and conforms fully to the standards IEC 61508 and ISO 26262 This enables ITEM ToolKit to provide a full top down modeling from Hazard Analysis to FMECA in comp
14. ToolKit Upgrade i d sofiware prodici Upzrade an axistiug copy from ltem Software of ITEM ToolKit for Ax usiallations only CONTACT US PDF FILES please click a button on the rishi to insiall INSTALL DEMO or upgrade the program Version 2 0 9 Guanhianve Risk Assessment System install Demo e Select ITEM ToolKit The installation wizard begins NOTE f ihe following window appears click Yes to allow the process to uninstall the existing installation and then restart the installation process ITEM ToolKit Existing Installation An existing installation has been detected on your system This must be removed before a new version can be installed Once removed run Setup again to install the new version Remove the existing installation Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit 77 ITEM ToolKit Version 8 0 0 ITEM ToolKit Verzion 6 0 0 The InstallShield Wizard will install ITEM ToolKit an your computer Please close all other open applications before continuing and then click next e Click Next and the following Setup Type dialog box appears ITEM ToolKit Version 8 0 0 Setup Type Choose the setup type that best suits your needs Click the type of installation you require License Server Description Network Client Metwork Server Standalone Wieim U nly Client lt Back Cancel e Choose View Only Client and click Next e The License Agreement dialog box app
15. You have an Excel worksheet BOM that contains component information that you wish to import it into a MIL 217 System within a ToolKit Project The columns of data in the worksheet have names but you are not sure if they match the MIL 217 General Physical or Application parameter names used in ToolKit Preparation The first step is to make sure the columns and values in the worksheet are closely related to the MIL 217 parameters found in ToolKit This will enable you to use the Auto Match button during the field mapping process You may discover that you are not using all of the possible parameters that MIL allows By looking at the parameters via ToolKit for the components you will be using you can quickly identify the ones typically used Add a few of your common components to a MIL 217 System then view the General Physical and Application tab panels on the Dialog window for the system Here you will see all of the parameters for the components Following are those commonly used For Resistors Category Description Rated Power Applied Power Power Stress For Capacitors Category Description Rated Voltage Capacitance Applied Voltage Voltage Stress Note You can also Export any system to an Excel spreadsheet to see the specific column requirements Build a system with blocks and components then File Export Follow the Wizard to produce an Excel file Yes you can then use this generated Excel file as a template for your BOM
16. 33 36 37 Chapter 9 Markov 213 any number of states and can therefore also consist of a single state a given state can belong to any number of state groups Groups are created to compute aggregate results such as the expected time spent in any of the states in a group The simplest method to create a new group is to click the Add Group toolbar button while in the Markov model editor The new group with a default name is shown in the Markov hierarchy in the lower left corner of the ToolKit window Once states are added to a group this will also be made visible there EE SystemMarkov Demo 3 C3 State Standby Failed 0 0 0 0605 e State Friman Falled D 0 0 0013 Bath Failed 0 0 0 0001 Primary Repaired C 0 0 001 Transition T 24 0 001 T Transition T 2 amp 1e 4 T5 Transition T 26 0 001 5 Transition T 27 05 oT Transition T 28 0 00f j T Transition T 23 0 5 Markov AZ Groups Courit 1 EQ Group Under Repair C5 State Primary Repaired 0 0 0 0001 C3 State Both Failed 0 0 0 0007 States are added to a group in the State Parameters dialog To open this dialog right click on the state and select the State Parameters option in the popup menu Then make the Groups tab in that dialog visible 4 Markov State State Groups P n licks NN Under Repair 057 AE a anad C BethFaled Description Primary Repai e ge System is under repair Unavailability Gro
17. 5 J Enter your project information by placing the cursor or clicking in the appropriate fields Title Markov Tutorial Description Two identical components that are operated A i standb de Mame Two component standby Pia eal eer mi Part Number Function m Description LEN T a Circuit Ret Notes Analyst Compiled By Approved By Apples to Failure prediction systems contained in this project Project Totals Target Rate jo Failure Rate jo Lite Time hra 24 Unavailability lo Redundancy MTBF hrs 6 Thetable below displays each field that is available for a project and what each field pertains to 7 9 Chapter 9 Markov 207 Name CN Approved By The person required to sign off on the project The following fields will display results only if a prediction system is part of the project Life Time Project life time given in hours MTBF Mean Time Between Failures for the project From the Add Menu select Markov System The Markov system and project headers are added Add Edit Layout Settings A MIL 217 System AL Bellcore System AL RDF System AL 299B System a Mechanical System JI Maintain System oy Sparet ast System Y FMECA System IE RED System amp Fault Tree System Event Tree Ta Markov System In the System Window click the Markov header The system properties appear in the Dialog tab In the Dialog tab enter your system in
18. B3 Fallure BB Failure B 16 va Lm EI T ZONSOEO dear oe dam H lnitiator B1 Fire Starts in the t cin Column Type Event FIRE DETECTED H a Success B2 Fire is Dete a Success B5 Fire Ala Success B9 Spi SF Failure B10 Spri P Failure B6 Fire Alarm Success Bll S T Failure B12 Spri Failure B3 Fire is NOT D 2 nn n Em me Result Editing Columns Click on the Event Tree Tab to open the Event Tree Canvas H Double Click on the Initiator Column Header I The Column Parameters window appears Enter the Column Name Description and Notes Select Event List J poa tie Add Edt Layout Settings Analysis Chart Window Help Oe sex S62 Ris kR RA SM OTF WT FE WY JE a 0L m tI z Maintain Systems SpareCost Systems S RBD Systems re Fault Tree Systems Sea E Markov Systems Event Tree Systems falus ID T Fire Protection System WPNOTAchmk Pipe Break praes T Loss of Coolant Acciden I Im tue Filabr 6 1 Limitod Damage Wor Poople prir Ter Sys lem Ts war ecivakd Aubmalcaly re atin Bullding Column Parameters Column Gate Event Column Description Fire Starts in Main Building 4E Event Tree System Fire Protectio Chium Name Fire Starts Initiator B1 Fire Starts in the t H Success B2 Fire is Deter Event Name FIRE z 3 Success B5 Fire Ala Events List Column Notes Success B9 Spr SF Failure
19. Switch back to the Markov tab and start the analysis of the model by clicking the Go button C in the toolbar A progress indicator briefly becomes visible Once the analysis is complete a notification message appears stating that the analysis has completed without errors The results of the analysis are now ready for viewing Click the Result Summary button in the toolbar D The result summary dialog opens Markov Result Summary Summary ral DUAL PROCESSOR Parameter Unavailability Q Mean Unayailability Failure Frequency W CFI Expected Failures Unreliability Total Down Time TDT Availability 4 Mean Availability Repair Frequency CRI Expected Repairs Reliability Total Up Time TUT 0 00064471329 0 00037256572 0 0010324736 D 0010331397 0 001017279 0 0010167174 0 00037256572 0 99935529 0 99962743 0 00064471329 1 0 00037256572 0 99898328 0 99962743 Chapter 9 Markov 215 Understanding Analysis Results The following shows how the various reliability measures are computed X refers to the state or group of states that have been marked as Unavailable States In these definitions the following notation is used x a state X a group of states Pr x t The probability that the system is in state x at time f Pr X T The probability that the system is any of the states belonging to group X at time t A a The rate at which transition takes place from state x to s
20. Unavailability Q 2 9201 e 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 Failure Frequency W 2 3303e 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 CFI 2 3303e 7 4 Expected Failures 2 3196e 7 5 Unreliability 2 3195e 7 B Total Down Time TDT 2 9051e 10 7 Total Up Time TUT 1 B MTBF 4 3112e 6 8 MTF 4 3112e46 MTTR 0 0013 41 Availability 4 Reliability 1 No of Cut Sets 4 m Fault Tree Importance View ES Event F Vesely BirnBaum Spark 2 4133e 5 Pipe 0 998 4 8035e 10 Loss of A 0 7481 4 0086e 8 4 Loss of B 0 7481 4 0086e 8 I5 Power 0 2519 7 3558e 5 6 Corrosion 0 002 4 8035e 10 BEES Fault Tree Cut Set View Unavailability Q Frequency W Events 1 21801e 10 1 5915e 7 Pipe Spark LossofB Loss ofA 2 73409e 11 7 3409e 8 Pipe Spark Power 3 44172e 13 3 229e 10 Corrosion Spark LossofB Loss ofA M 1 4874e 13 1 4889e 10 Corrosion Spark Power a Result Summary View 50 95 99 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 B Proschan 0 0 6 2491 e 7 0 3422 0 3422 0 3157 2 5323e 6 90 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide ToolKit Information Bar The ToolKit workspace includes an information bar located along the bottom of the screen The left hand side of the information bar includes the name and brief information on toolbar icons The right hand side indicates information on size of the active system such as the number of Gates and the number of Events included in the system For Help press F1 Gates 5 Events T NUM Zz Window Scroll Menu The Pro
21. 1 2 Lap 440 ut FA 0 4446550 MTBF2408 7387 3 im Resistor 1 3 Res T K FR20 00885275015 MTBF21 1725 54848 im Resistor 1 4 Res TUE FA 0 01045726 MTBF23552 7344 MIL 217 Errors That Can Happen As with any import type function errors can be caused for many reasons Listed below are a few typical errors that could be encountered An error log in generated and placed in the Toolkit Programs T_DB folder when errors do occur e Numeric field overflow caused by a true number being in a column that has been formatted as a Text column Place a single quote in front of the true number e Parent ID equals Component ID this is caused by blank rows between the Column Names and the first row of data Also if there are blank rows below the fields of data they too can be confused as data e No ID field defined You must have a unique ID for each components and block across pages in the Excel file e Import process seems to complete but no blocks or components are imported Be sure you have selected the proper System you want to import to in Toolkit before starting the import process Easy Import If you simply want to import a list of components into ToolKit with no Category definitions or if you have a Library open with matching part numbers that has all of the component details included the following options are available to you e Create an Excel spreadsheet with a single column named Part Number Enter just the part
22. B10 Spri Y Failure B6 Fire Alarr Success BllzS Spelling Lex Cancel SF Failure B12 Spri O Failure B3 Fire is NOT D mer sno cian ES Bc Hd j un um o ue Sh ol MEeO we lon e P pop m m Ew 5 E ES a3 et For Help press F1 Columns 4 Branches 11 INUM 7 Chapter 12 Event Tree 265 5 Click on Event List and the Project Events List window opens 6 Click on Add Global Event K 4 Project Events List C Show All Add Global Evenk Event Parameters Show Global Events Only Tae f Show Man Global Events Only CK De ete Glo al Evert nd toast SM Iw Make selection globally visible Events Dependencies c ate 7 Click on the event L and then on Event Parameters M 8 The Event Parameters window opens IT Event parameters IT Event parameters H3 General E Failure Model E Time Phase Name Model 1 R Type CDF Rate v L4 Failure Rate 1e 6 M CEE Repair Rate 2 Type BASIC Mame EeENTSO v Part Number oo m Logic Mode psc o Circuit Ref T f Failure Model Adjustment Factor afi Wi ES Fault Tree Sequencing Initiator and Enabler Initiator Only Enabler Only Description Group Labels Iv Description From Library New Model Spelling x Cancel Spelling ox Cancel 9 Add a new Failure Mo
23. Chapter 13 Reports 291 4 Problem Solving Listed below are some common issues you may encounter while working with Reports When I preview a report it is blank Be sure that you have matched the type of System you have selected MIL Telcordia Fault Tree etc to the type of report that you have selected If you have a MIL System selected yet select a FMECA report the resulting report will be blank Some of the columns in my report are blank There are many opportunities to enter data into ToolKit If you leave blanks such things as Descriptions Names Part Numbers etc when you run a report these columns will appear blank Column widths and data wrapping within the column makes the report look messy What can I do Using the Fields tab on the Customize tab you can adjust how the width for each column is determined You can choose to either follow the column heading width the width of the data which changes or fix the width in TWIPs Depending on the nature of the columns and your data you may have to adjust each column differently I make a change to a template but it does not seem to stick After you make a change to a template be sure you Save the template Additionally be sure you have the correct template selected for preview When I choose columns for a template some come up blank but others have data in them on the report I know those blank columns have data in them Certain combinations of columns
24. Chapter 4 Project Basics 99 CHAPTER 4 Project Basics ITEM ToolKit can be used at the project level to examine the overall reliability of one or more systems Performing reliability analysis on a project can help lower costs and reduce repairs and maintenance A project can be analyzed under any of the methods or standards that are available as part of ToolKit In addition any combination of system types can be included in a project For example in a project containing six systems two could be analyzed for failure rates under the MIL 217 prediction standards the third could be analyzed for failure rates under the Bellcore prediction standards the fourth could be analyzed for reliability analysis RBD and the fifth and sixth could be analyzed for failure modes and effects FMECA Fault Tree analysis This chapter includes information about Creating a New Project 2 Opening a Project 3 Cutting Copying and Pasting Systems 4 Editing Project and System Properties 5 Saving a Project 6 Closing a Project 7 Exiting ToolKit 100 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide 1 Creating a New Project Creating a project is the starting point for any system analysis in ToolKit Once a project is created you add the systems you want to use to analyze the project Creating a New Project and Adding a System Start ToolKit 2 From the File Menu select New Project Or click on the new project icon A A blank project opens and the
25. Delete Item Undo Print About Help Xo amp v Description Opens a new project Open an existing document The ToolKit displays the Open dialog box in which you can locate and open the desired file save the active document or template with its current name If you have not named the document the ToolKit displays the Save As dialog box Remove selected data from the document and stores it on the clipboard Copy the selection to the clipboard Paste the contents of the clipboard at the insertion point Delete the selection Reverse the last editing Note You cannot undo some actions Print the active document Open the About ITEM ToolKit Window Open the ITEM ToolKit On line Help The RBD Dialog Window Contains the following Controls Om oV Tool Name KD Undo Changes m Analyse w Check Spelling Description Cancels the latest operation Run the Analysis of the system Check the Spelling of the selected Text 172 The RBD Toolbar The RBD Toolbar is used to create and control RBD Analysis through the commands it contains m ul t A le ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide 9 E w c Rc EP Be Tool JE b Le be Ea al e e EE Be Name Select Block Node 90 Degree Link Orthogonal Link Link Arrow Link Text Image Page Up Page Down Auto Arrange Transfer to MS Word Start RBD Analysis Abort RBD Analysis Result Summary Header
26. Export functions are also accessed from the File menu ToolKit also includes a report engine that is available from the File menu The report engine allows you to create print and save preformatted and custom reports plus report charts File Add Edit Layout Settings Analysis Mew Project iCErl M pee Open Project Ckrl O Ei Save Project Chrl 5 Save Project Os Close Project Mew Library Open Library Save Library Save Library As Close Library Library Lookup Manager Derating Files Save Diagram d Save Grid Print d Print Preview d Print Setup Page Setup d Convert d Import Export 1 V 708 Example Exit Add Menu Chapter 3 ToolKit Basics 93 The Add menu is a multi functional menu The Add menu provides options for adding systems to your project and also adding blocks and components to your system Add Edit Layout Settings Be MIL 217 System AT Bellcore System ro RDF System BE 2998 System AN Mechanical System MainTain System Ra SpareCost System Y FMECA System Dad RBD System E Fault Tree System Event Tree 95 Markov System Add Analysis Menu Add Edit Layout Settings Analysis A Or Gate A And Gate Priority And Gate amp Vote Gate A XOR Gate i NOT Gate NULL Gate Transfer Gate Inhibit Gate Conditional Event Add Edit Layout Settings Basic Event E Block xi House Event F Linked Block Undeveloped Event Dormant Event a Hybrid fi
27. FMECA RBD FT Prink Load Template Mew Template 3HWE Save s Template Mame Selected Fields No Tab Field MILZ1X Pi Factor Pi Factors All MILZ17N Pi Pi RASE Choose Load Template to open an existing Report to edit Choose New Template to create a new template from scratch Use Save Save As to save your work Pick from the lists of available parameters to appear on the report then use the arrow buttons in the center to place or remove them on the template Once you have created or edited your template be sure to save it with a meaningful name Once it is saved return to the Selection tab locate the report and then Preview Chapter 13 Reports 285 This is an example of a template being created A few parameters have been selected from the list on the left and the arrow buttons have been used to move the parameters over to the right side for inclusion in the template If you want to move any parameter up or down the list select it and then use the blue up down arrows to change the order of the parameters IT Reports selection Preview Template Customize Available Fields Parameters B Reports E Praject zi MILZ17 E System Parameters H General Parameters x Y Failure Rate E 1 NocFailure Rate BK J Cancel Load Template Mew Template 3HWE Save s Template Mame Selected Fields Table Field 1 MIL217 General
28. Hade 1 _ What is a connection Connections C indicate the logical flow of a block RBD They are the lines used to connect figures in a block diagram Connections enter the figures on the left input node and exit on the right output node igde 1 C 1 RBD 1 IT Item ToolKit Project RBD a File Add Edit Layout Settings Analysis Chart Window Help Dock t BAX 897 o atAuB i RBD 0 m Model fe Block 1 Zi Dialog 8H Grid GN Red Result For Help press F1 Blocks 1 Nodes 2 164 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide 1 Click the RBD tab D 2 From the RBD Toolbar click on the Node icon s E 3 Move the cursor into the RBD canvas and click the area where you want to add the Input and Output node F 4 From the RBD Toolbar click on the Block icon G 5 Move the cursor into the RBD Canvas and click the area where you want to add the block H 6 From the RBD Toolbar click on the Connection icon Mal D 7 Move the cursor into the RBD Canvas and click on the output blue end of the starting node and then click on the input green end of the Block The connection C1 appears on the diagram J 8 Repeat step 7 to add the connection C2 K 9 Toexit the Add Node Mode select the Select icon from the Diagram Toolbar L 10 From the RBD Toolbar click on the Auto Arrange icon Ed M to organize and align the components on the canvas Editing Block and Node Parameters To edit blo
29. Park Number MILZ17 General n Name MILZ17 General Analyst MILZ17 General Description MIL217 General Failure Rate MILZ17 general LnawvailabiliE After you have arranged the parameters in the order you wish click the Save As button to give the template a meaningful name 286 Item ToolKit Tutorial 3 Customizing Reports Customize Tab This tab provides you access to the specific elements that make up the report Column widths header footers graphics etc are all controlled on this tab Header Tab 4 IT Reports mA Selection Previety Templates 7 Customize ieldz roster Group Header Group Footer Paper Size 0 i al Harizontal Justification Save As C Left Centered Right MIL 217 Failure Report Group Fields ta include in heads section Nertical Justification Centered Bottom When you choose the report E Monop Pi Fact Pu template on the left side the list of None Pi Para fields parameters that appear in the MIL 217 Failure m header of the report appear in a list on the Header tab Check those you wish to see in the header of the report 2 MIL 217 Parts MIL 217 Pi Fac 7 Bellcore Reports L RBE Reports Additionally you can edit the 298 Reports look justification of the header with b NSWC Reports s the settings on the Header tab FMECA Reports E I RED Reports Be sure to Save your settings before FT Reports C C
30. Provides an introduction to the prediction modules and explains their use through a MIL 217 example Provides an introduction to the FMECA module and explains its use through a practical example Provides an introduction to the RBD module and explains its use through a practical example Provides an introduction to the Fault Tree module and explains its use through a practical example Provides an introduction to the Markov module and explains its use through a practical example Provides an introduction to the Maintain module and explains its use through a practical example Provides an introduction to the SpareCost module and explains its use through a practical example Provides an introduction to the Event Tree module and explains its use through a practical example Working with reports covering their selection creation and customization of templates Import and export of data including an example using a bill of materials Library facilities covering their creation editing saving and loading and browsing Grid view customization 3 Conventions Throughout this guide ITEM ToolKit and ToolKit are used interchangeably In examples an implied carriage return occurs at the end of each line unless otherwise noted You must press the ENTER key at the end of a line of input The following table lists the special conventions used in this guide Example Description Edit Words in bold indicate the user enters clicks that button or menu i
31. QRAS CONTACT US Version 2 0 0 Guantianve Risk Assessment psie install Demo e Select ITEM ToolKit The installation wizard begins NOTE f ihe following window appears click Yes to allow the process to uninstall the existing installation and then restart the installation process ITEM ToolKit Existing Installation An existing installation has been detected on vour system This must be removed before a new version can be installed Once removed run Setup again to install the new version Remove the existing installation ITEM ToolKit Version 8 0 0 Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit 61 ITEM ToolKit Verzion 8 0 0 The InstallShield Wizard wall install ITEM Toolkit on pour computer Please close all other open applications before continuing and then click next Cancel Click Next and the following Setup Type dialog box appears ITEM ToolKit Version 8 0 0 Setup Type Choose the setup type that best suits pour needs Click the type of installation you require License Server Network Llient Network Server Standalone Wiew Only Client InstallShield Choose Network Client and click Next Description This option installs Windows Programs menu and a path to a network installation of ITEM Toolkit A Network Server Installation must be present Back Cancel The License Agreement dialog box appears Read the license agreement carefully and click Yes to accept or No to declin
32. SITE SPARES B BASE SPARES C Stock out Risk 5 Repair Lead Time 5 Days Unsupported period 182 Days 6 Months Replenishment Period 24 Months Number of Equipment shelter per site 1 Total Number Fitted 1 Average utilization 100 Overall Utilization 100 Beyond Economic Repair 10 Stock out Risk 5 IT Item ToolKit Project Dialog a File Add Edit Layout Settings Chart Window Help Es jm x D cp bd n 92s P2 hk mO x o fd V SpareCost i SpareCost System SpareCost Systems EA B amp SP 1 n Title SpareCost Tutorial Description Support and Cost for 1 Command Post Shelter v l Name SP 1 Part Number Function Description LCN F Circuit Ref Shelter 26 Notes Analyst Approved By o Compiled By NENNEN Base Spares Repair Lead Time Days sl A Site Spares Replenishment Period Months 24 ITP2 E Stock out risk sf 5 Total Number Fitted 1 amp SP 1 Support and Cost for snd Post Unsupported Period Days 182 Overall Utilization 9 5 100 1 Site 1 Site LEzemmiand Post Shelter No of Equipment per site 1 Bayard Economic Rapak 4 Ho am 1 1 MON 90034 19 YGA Monitor SEC rac fio 1 2 CPU 00746 Pentium 4 CPU 1 51 ee Dosen e Stock out risk 5 zZ am 1 3 KEY 8021 Standard Keyboard EI aam 1 4 MOLI 73320 Serial Mouse Qty E e G a e El gt Dialog B Diagr
33. Select Program Folder Please select a pragram folder Setup will add pragram icons to the Program Folder listed below fou may type a new folder hare ar select one fram the existing folders list Click Next to continue Program Folders EPSON Printers Back Cancel The option to add icons to the desktop is the next window to appear 46 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide ITEM ToolKit Version ER Select Shortcuts Select fram the shortcut options below w Add Shortcut to Start Menu lt Back Cancel e The Setup Status dialog box appears and displays the progress of the installation ITEM ToolKit Version 8 0 0 Setup Status Item Toolkit Setup is performing the requested operations Installing Cancel Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit 47 When the InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box appears click Finish ITEM ToolKit Version 8 0 0 Setup Complete Setup has now finished installing ITEM Toolkit After clicking Finish please walt a few moments until the blue screen disappears before continuing Cancel 48 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Activating the Licenses Once the License Manager Software is installed the license must be activated If not only the demonstration mode features will be available at the client workstations e From the Start Menu select ProgramsMtem Software ITEM ToolKit License Manager m
34. The module also includes the BDD analysis method as an alternative to the Rare Event and Esary Proschan quantification options It uses the Binary Decision Diagram algorithm to obtain cut sets and quantification results BDD algorithms distinguish themselves from conventional quantification methods by returning results that do not involve approximations Instead BDD algorithms produce results that are in accordance with the basic rules of probability theory 6 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Using Fault Tree s detailed information efforts to improve system safety and reliability can be highly focused and tailored to your individual system Possible design changes and other risk mitigating actions can be evaluated for their impact on safety and reliability allowing for a better informed decision making process and improved system reliability This type of analysis is especially useful when analyzing large and complex systems where manual methods of fault isolation and analysis are not viable Markov The Markov module is a powerful modeling and analysis technique with strong applications in time based reliability and availability analysis The reliability behavior of a system is represented using a state transition diagram which consists of a set of discrete states that the system can be in and defines the speed at which transitions between those states take place As such Markov models consist of comprehensive representations of possible cha
35. Z NEIWORKCGEIENTANSEXDEATION 42 5 itt teint EIER Retro TL RE ES PEE eU 57 5 VIEW ONLY CLIENT INSTALLATION ccccccecceccsccscccecceccscescescecescescescescecescescescsccscescscssessescescescesessescesceses 73 TOOLKIT BA SIC S wrcecccveccdcscsssdesccveccdancssdocccvesdeuacenstewccesccdaucanscncacescdenacesccewssswacduaconsccteceeadauxcewstessssacddaccascastocsecs 3 1 STANDARD FEATURES OF THE TOOLKIT INTERFACE cccsceccsceccececcsceccscscescscscscescscsescesescusescecescecesencess 83 2 NHB TOOEISEE WORKSPACE 250 sbertud t secinve itus uso ea al a Le DUI E UT E DUI fau dencael wannese es EODD A ce 84 S DHE TOOERKDUMENDSA uA ea ete cotto eva a LOMA e AEA N T oe E ocean aia P 9 A MEE TOOLKIT TOOLBAR TT T 97 PROVEGE BASIC n E E E E EO A A A A A N A E A ce Ue Ta doe EE 99 CREATING ANEW PROF C Pamonha E e esto AA E E edt dei E E 100 Z C BENING AFRO C eea a ase cart net a s beet rad ater f Dr LIE 101 SJ CUTTING COPYING ANP PASTING O YSTEMS 525i i At EU eter te ca a eb ue TS 102 4 EDITING PROJECT AND SYSTEM PROPERTIES csceccsceccececcececcsceccscecescecescscecscesescecescecesceceecscescscesescesesees 103 De SAVING PROIE T udecctodescetncedeedto satt sce erie vU Vnus ea dn ero es i ep t E Saath L 104 Ot COSTING AP RO IC cae aa Riiie uem emule DLL Aes potent iem e e nie cies semita oe ART 105 S ho WN ad TOOLE Id ctae EAL LI AEMILIA ELLA AMET MEME tet eee AM I 105 PREDICTIONS 125 inidsesesieveivEu eT see eee vu E
36. o f py TT BH General EB Physical E3 Application a Black Part Mumber IP ag Description Mame C Circuit Ref PO Analyst A Designer 00 Motes ee Category Block Update Children Iv LCN Pt T Temperature Power Supply 110 240 v AC Supply 5v r12V f Increment t Absolute Replacement Parameters Checked Mon Op Parameters Chapter 5 Predictions 113 A Unique Reference Identifier Update Children Check this box to update all sub blocks and components when the selected block parameters are changed Control the way temperatures will be changed Parameters Checked Check this box when Block Component parameters are edited and verified Users can add additional information to describe the block Any other pertinent information on the Block LCN Logistic Control Number Internal reference number defined by the user 7 Next edit the Quality fields in the Physical Tab H3 General H Physical E Applicaton Block Quality Microelectronics Commercial ar Lini VI Quality Discrete Semicon Jan Quality Resistors Nonestablished Reliab Quality Capacitors Nonestablished Reliab Quality Coils Mil Spec vj Quality Relays RY IdasM v Quality Relays 55 Mil Spec Quality SAW Devices High Quality Port Quality ther Mil Spec Field Description Quality T Quality level for Microelectronics and Integrated Circuit components
37. 256MB or higher is recommended OY 200MB free disk space Q A 17 inch or larger monitor with display properties set to a minimum of 1280 X 768 pixels OY Mouse or other pointing device u CD ROM drive Less capable machines such as Pentium 133 with Windows 95 98 can run ITEM ToolKit but the performance may be less than ideal The use of additional memory faster processors bigger monitor or stable operating system such as Microsoft Windows 2000 will directly improve performance and capacity 8 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide 3 Getting Technical Support The ITEM Software technical support staff is always ready to help you with answers and guidance to solve any problems that you encounter when installing or using ITEM ToolKit If you need technical support contact Item Software using any of the following methods North American South American and Central American customers 1 714 935 2900 1 714 935 2911 support itemsoft com http www itemsoft com Technical Support ITEM Software USA Inc 34 Executive Park Suite 210 Irvine CA 92614 U S A Telephone Facsimile Electronic Mail WWW Mail European Far East Middle East and Australian customers 44 0 1489 885085 44 0 1489 885065 support itemsoft com http www itemsoft com Technical Support ITEM Software UK 4 Belfry House 4400 Parkway Whiteley Fareham Hampshire PO15 7FJ U K NOTE Please have your product name vers
38. 472 Procedure V System Add a Spare Cost Spares Scaling and Ranging System Add a Failure Modes Effects and Criticality Analysis FMECA System Add a Reliability Block Diagram RBD System Add a Fault Tree Analysis FTA System Add an Event Tree Analysis ETA System Add a Markov Modeling System Description Move the selected components one logical unit up Move the selected components one logical unit down Move the selected components one logical unit left Move the selected components one logical unit right The Canvas Toolbar The Canvas Toolbar contains commands that affect the appearance and behavior of the canvas Chapter 9 Markov 221 Description Undo the last command executed on the canvas Redo the last undo that was performed ca iu Li DB Tool Name x Undo x Redo ii Toggle Grid IE Snap to Grid Bi Toggle Page Bounds The Markov Toolbar The Markov Toolbar is used to create and control Markov Analysis through the commands it contains m Gm c Turn display of the grid on and off Toggle the snap to grid feature on and off Turn display of page boundaries on and off P 2 Phase List Name Select State Arrow Link Group Text Image Transfer to MS Word Start Markov Analysis Abort Markov Analysis Summary Header Footer Description Cancels add mode Creates a State into the Markov System Creates a Link into the Markov System Creates a Group into th
39. 6 0 0 Kopyright C 20t T eae Fee BORD A Network Info ITEM Software i Reliability analysis tools include MIL HDBE 217F Notice 2 Electronics Full version Bellcore Telcordia 5R 332 Issue 2 SR 332 Issue 1 TR 332 Issue 6 Electronics Demo Version MSC NSWC De6 LE10 NSWwC S8JLE1 Mechanical Demo Version FMEA FMECA MIL STD 1629 4 IEC 61508 150 9000 Failure Mode Effects and Full version Reliability Block Diagram Reliability Block Diagram Demo version Fault Tree Analysis Demo Version Event Tree Analvsis Demo Version Markov Modelling Demo Version RDF 2000 IEC 62380 TR 1 LITE C 80 810 French Telecom Standard Electror Full version 998 China 2996 Electronics Demo Version Spares Scaling and Rangin Spares Scaling and Ranging Demo Version MainTain Maintainability MIL HDBE 472 Procedure w Demo version e Clicking the Network Info button will display the following dialog showing the number of network licenses available licenses and maintenance expiration date Server License Information Module Mame 3 of Network Licenses p Available Licenses Maintenance Expiration Oct 23 2011 cas my E CEE AN Mil217 Bellcore ASL FMECA RBD FaultTree EventTree Markov ROFZO00 2996 Sparecost Oct 23 2011 jet TUI eI MainTain NOTE f you click Continue from the Demo
40. 76 Overall average utilization for all equipments throughout the period being modeled Beyond Economic Repair 9b Average proportion of failed items that will be beyond economic repair The value here is used for each item in the range It is not the same value as the target Stock out Risk dab SE o value used for site spares optimization 12 Move the mouse to the System Window in the bottom left of the ToolKit screen and click the left mouse button to the system Header to make this the active window A 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Chapter 11 SpareCost 245 IT Item ToolKit Project Dialog a File Add Edit Layout Settings Chart Window Help E Y SpareCost Block a SP 1 FR 0 Part Number Name 1 Circuit Ref NATO Stock No Notes geui Fl Failure Rate Quantity tst lt CS s SS Analyst FO cs fi SP 1 bareable Item In Range Failure Rate Source 12 Qtys1 FR 6 m C Prediction aa 1 1 Gty 1 FR O z am 1 2 Qty 1 FR 0 ja Manual aj 1 3 Qty 1 FR 0 gj 1 4 Oty TN FR 0 Dialog Diagram faf Chart Result SpareCost MIL 217 MainTain For Help press F1 From the Add Menu B select Block Add Edit Layout Settings TN im Component Move the mouse cursor to the System Window The mouse cursor changes to add mode Click the system header A The Block is added C and its properties appe
41. Block Component Category Category Name of the Block Component Part Number Part Number of the Block Component Description Description of the Block Component Circuit Reference Circuit Reference or Reference designator of the Block Component Quantity Quantity of Block Component Total F Rate Total Failure Rate of the Block Component Contribution Failure Contribution of the Block Component PI FACTORS Name Name of the Component Category Category Name of the Component Part Number Description Circuit Reference Pi Factor Quantity Total F Rate Contribution Failure Contribution of the Component Additional Features All the topics within this manual as well as the additional features of the ITEM ToolKit prediction modules are fully discussed in the online help provided within the full program Some of these features include Creating and customizing charts Importing and exporting data Derating Grid view templates and customization Software settings and customization Automatic name generation and customization Library management Linking modules and projects Chapter 5 Predictions 119 4 Derating Components Most equipment failures are precipitated by stress When applied stress exceeds the inherent strength of the part either a serious degradation or a failure will occur To assure reliability equipment must be designed to endure stress over time without failure Design stress parameters must be ident
42. By Capacitor 10 3 FR 0 018210663 MTTR Transformer 10 4 FR 0 010479688 Capacitor 10 5 FR 0 029338662 T t Rate Capacitor 10 6 FR 0 52654219 setis D Failure Rate 22 525928 Diode Low Frequency 10 7 FR 0 034869388 Life Time Hours 24 MTBF 44393 285 Resistor 10 8 FR 0 0073261 242 Redundancy True Unavailability 0 00054056296 Resistor 10 9 FR 0 040032089 Capacitor 10 10 FR 0 02521 9366 Capacitor 10 11 FR 0 040561542 Connection 10 12 FR 0 0104 Block 11 FR 8 4647017 e Block 12 FR 13 263585 xl Dialog i amp Diagram Result For Help press F1 Blocks 5 Comps 47 NUM 104 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide 5 Saving a Project ToolKit follows standard Windows save functionality Each saved project is stored in a separate data file with an ITP extension 1 If more than one project is open ensure the correct project is selected The name of the currently selected project is displayed in bold on the Project window tab b BO cacoonaSeeced o m Y LEA i E PROJECT V 8 Example Prediction Totals fS MIL 217 Systems FR 23 112221 Q MIL 217 System M E a x ABCSYS MIL 217 1 FR 22 525 Title MIL 217 Example Description ABC Computer System Model ABC XT E ER c ium i B x eeu es 7 aias Name ABCSYS MIL 217 1 Pentium based Microcomputer ellcore eicordia stems z 3 3 T i Part Number Function x ABCSYS BellCore TR 332 Is
43. C Documents and SettingssGemina Pa EXPLOSION BASIC PIPE SI c AND EXPLOSION ABC EXPLC BASIC CORRC H TRANSFER PROTECTION BASIC SPARK Sp MIL 217 Evert Tree Fault Tree OR LEAK Leak IE BASIC SPARK Spark Q 1 TA BOA Top Gate TOP GATE OR Gate 1 GATE 1 De BASIC Event 1 EV BASIC Event 2 EV BASIC Event 3 EV BASIC Event 4 E BASIC Event 5 EV AND EXPLOSION TRANSFER P OR LEAK Lee BASIC PIF BASIC CO BASIC SPARK miL 217 Event Tree Fautt Tree Chapter 15 Library Facilities 307 3 Saving and Close a Library Project Library project files are saved and closed via a set of commands on the File menu that are different from regular project files With the Library Project active note that the File menu Save Save As and Close are active The Save Library command will save the existing library with the file extension of ITL The Save Library As command will save the existing library allowing an opportunity to rename the library file The Close Library command will close the active library Mew Library Open Library Save Library Save Library 45 Close Library Library Lookup Manager 4 Loading and Browsing a Library Using the Library Lookup Manager under the File Menu any library file can be loaded into memory eliminating the need to have an extra window open on your workspace 1 Open an existing or create a new project 2 Click Fil
44. Check Spelling Save Phrase Get Phrase The Project Toolbar The Project Toolbar displays the available analysis options for the ToolKit application A X A A A PSEA ES Tool A Name MIL217 Telcordia Bellcore IEC 62380 RDF 299B NSWC Mechanical Maintain SpareCost FMECA RBD Fault Tree Event Tree Markov Description Run the Analysis of the system Check the Spelling of the selected Text Save the phrase to the phrase library Get a phrase from the phrase library Description Add a MIL HDBK 217 Electronic System Add a SR 332 Telcordia Electronic System Add an IEC 62380 French Telecom Standard Electronic System Add a 299B Chinese Military Standard Electronic System Add a NSWC Mechanical System Add a Maintain MIL HDBK 472 Procedure V System Add a Spare Cost Spares Scaling and Ranging System Add a Failure Modes Effects and Criticality Analysis FMECA System Add a Reliability Block Diagram RBD System Add a Fault Tree Analysis FTA System Add an Event Tree Analysis ETA System Add a Markov Modeling System 155 156 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide The FMECA Toolbar The FMECA toolbar is used to create and control FMECA Analysis through the commands it contains FELA El he E E Category Not Selected dn Tool Name Description Select Cancels add mode FMECA Block Add a Block Component Add a Component Failure Mode Add a Failure mode
45. Click OK when finished Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit 21 2 Network Server Installation ITEM ToolKit supports five types of installation Standalone Network Server License Server Network Client and View Only Client This chapter will provide you the required instruction for installing the software as Network Server It contains the following sections What is Network Server Installation a Installing the software Activating and verifying the software Setting up the license manager 22 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide What is Network Server Installation Network Server Installation is designed to provide access to the License Key through a network After installing the software on the Network Server or on a designated Network Client used as a server the Network Client installation must be performed on the client workstation The software can be launched on the client workstation or on the server This option is intended for a single user or multiple users that are required to have the software installed on a shared server The number of users accessing the software will be limited to the number of licenses purchased NETWORK CLIENT 1 Full ITEM ToolKit Installation NETWORK SERVER or Path to the Network Licenses DESIGNATED NETWORK CLIENT USED AS SERVER Full ITEM ToolKit Installation NETWORK CLIENT 2 u Full ITEM ToolKit Network Licenses Installation Path to the Network Licenses NOTE The followin
46. FI 33 Catastrophic Catastrophic 32 1 2 Mechanical colla f 3 1 4 RESISTOR FI gt l i A 3 1 5 CONNECTOR Intermittent Operation 3 25 Locked Input Lev f 3 1 6 TRANSFORME v Locked Output L f 311 7 CAPACITOR FI Bi furcation of sp e 3 2 RAM BOARD AFR 1 QChnartad Flactric Mi f 321 UNDULATOR ii gt f 322 CAPACITOR FLY z gt HH Gid Diagram fig Chat B Result For Help press F1 Blocks 29 Comps 114 gt Faut Tree FMECA ISO 9000 Information The ToolKit FMECA Module continues to support the addition of ISO 9000 information However now the point of data entry is the ISO 9000 Grid View Using this view as the data entry and reporting function is much preferred due to the one to many relationship of ISO 9000 elements that only the Grid View can display clearly Right click the Grid and select ISO 9000 Switch between 1629A and ISO 9000 Grid Views as desired Part Name Potential Potential S Delt Potential 0 Design Failure Effect s of E 5 Cause s of C Verification Part Function Mode Failure y Failure C i Erroneous Input Increased Loss of Output nm Intermittent Operation 1 7 Erroneous Output Decreased BEL c Intermittent Operation quibue ri T CDU Ne Tu a Negligible Effect for small chan Negligible Effect for small chan Weg Ad qe T iE Mi E Fails to Switch Negligible Effect for small changes No effect i n Catastrophic
47. Factor Part Number Application Construct M Quantity Application AM q Failure Rate Application CM Ambient Temperature degC Applicatian GA Environment Application HB 1 Analyst Application HDi Notes Application T LEM Each ToolKit module has a default Grid template Header Aow Fields Row Height 18 Column Style Column Width ff C jy Apply following setting to all grid calum Header Style Lie uper Sample Field Style eh 2 You can edit the default Grid template as you wish or a better suggestion is to create your own Grid template Use the File Add Template menu option to start creating your own 310 Item ToolKit Tutorial 3 Name the template then choose from the Available Fields column Use the arrow buttons to move the fields to the Selected Fields column You can move the fields up and down the list as desired using the Up and Down arrows 4 Check the Set selected template as active grid template for selected system box to activate your new template Then click OK 5 When you return to the Grid View the selected default Grid template for the module is used to display the system data 2 Additional Grid options There are several options you can utilize within your Grid templates to make the display of data fit your needs Filtering the Grid template can be set to display fields that contain data that meets certain filter criteria Colu
48. Failure mode 1 5 2 M5 0 Shaw Msgs 4 Click on save if you want to print and review all error messages The following window opens Click OK to save Chapter 6 FMECA 151 5 If no errors are present the Verification Complete Without Errors message appears Click OK Performing Analysis To analyze a FMECA project 1 Inthe System Window click the system header A 2 If you want to turn the weighted criticality method option on or off click the Use Weighted Criticality Method check box B IT Item ToolKit Project Dialog O File Add Edit Layout Settings Analysis Chart Window Help Ow o G R ls 3 imi Category Not Selected G a xl E PROJECT IT Project Prediction Tot HA FMECA Systems Y FMECA 0 Block Info Mode Info E Detectability E Diagnostic Coverage SFF FMECA System Info Title Description Mame FMECA 0 Park Number LCN l Analyst Function Life Time Hours 1 Description Compiled By Approved By Normalize Apportionments Notes Standard IEC 61508 v Calc Engine Mode Basic Mode 3 From the Analysis Menu select Perform or click the GO button C A dialog box displaying the progress of the analysis appears 4 When the analysis is complete the Verification Msg dialog box appears Click OK The objects in the System window are updated with the analysis results D 5 Click on the Result Tab
49. Footer Fit to Page Reset Fit to Page Description Cancels add mode Creates a Block symbol on the RBD diagram Creates a Node symbol on the RBD diagram Creates a 90 Degree Link on the RBD diagram Creates an Orthogonal Link on the RBD diagram Creates a Simple Line Link on the RBD diagram Creates an Arrow Link on the RBD diagram Allows the user to add a text component to the canvas Allows the user to add an image component to the canvas Allows the user to go one level up in the canvas Allows the user to go one level down in the canvas based on selected Block Allows the user to organize the components on the canvas Allows the user to transfer the RBD Canvas directly into Microsoft Word Allows the user to perform the analysis Allows the user to stop the analysis Displays a summary of the analysis Allows the user to create a header and footer for all RBD pages Allows the user to Fit the RBD diagram in one page automatically Allows the user to undo the Fit in one page previously done The Project Toolbar The Project Toolbar displays the available analysis options for the ToolKit application A A AD A 5 LG Au Tool A d Name MIL217 Telcordia Bellcore IEC 62380 RDF 299B NSWC Mechanical Maintain SpareCost FMECA RBD Fault Tree Event Tree Markov The Nudge Toolbar The Nudge Toolbar contains commands for moving the selected components by one logical unit in any direction
50. Hi Mode Info Detectability Diagnostic Coverage SFF FD CP Remarks A Maintain Systems IF SpareCost Systems Failure Modes v 800 Exampl Psst no oes six Loss of Oul 1 C Documents and Settings Gemina PakeM ia Negligible E qall changes 1 a a ABCSYS FMECA MIL STD 16294 s n 2 duel ls P 1 POWER SUPPLY amp f 12 No power output 1 e z A 1 1 CAPACITOR FIXED Ct us fJ 1 2 CAPACITOR FIXED CE e i 1 3 CAPACITOR FIXED Ct Causes Contributors Co Burned Power Supply Fuse Cause Power Grid Down MORY UNIT 1 ROM BOARD 3 2 RAM BOARD f 321 UNDULATOR fl 322 CAPACITOR Fix 3 2 3 CAPACITOR Fle ah Immediate Direct Effects P 3 2 4 RESISTOR FIXE 7 pem em pee i 3 2 5 1 C DIGITAL 3 2 5 CONNECTOR P ABCSYSF No Output from Motherboar FMECA MIL 217 Event Tree Sy Dialog i B Diagram Result Blocks 29 Comps 116 NUM For Help press F1 2 Inthe Dialog tab click the Mode Info tab B 11 Follow the above procedures to the remaining failure modes shown in the Table below The failure modes should appear in the System Window J If not select Show Modes from the Layout Menu Burned power supply fuse No output from Motherboard 1 Power Supply No Power Output Power grid down No output from Motherboard 1 ES Ie DEL ACA ese Chapter 6 FMECA Click the Mode button to add a new mode to the list C In the new mode box type No
51. IP Part Humber IH The Select Program Folder dialog box appears To accept the Item Software folder click Next To create a new folder type the name of the new folder in the Program Folder box and then click Next To select an existing folder locate the desired folder in the Existing Folders list select it and click Next ITEM ToolKit Version 2 0 0 Select Program Folder Please select a program folder Setup will add program icons to the Program Folder listed below fou may type a new folder nare ar select one trom the existing folders list Click West to continue Program Folders Item S aftu Administrative Tools Adobe Acrobat 4 0 4tomP ark Audio Related Programs DemoShield 6 0 DWO Shrink JEPSON Printers X Back Cancel Select the optional Components to be installed and then click Next 28 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide ITEM ToolKit Version 8 0 0 Optional Components Example Files 9135 K Description These components install a range of templates settings and samples tis highly recommended that you Include these in your installation Space Required on C 212068 K Space Available on C 1939204 2 K Back Next gt Cancel The option to add icons to the desktop is the next window to appear ITEM ToolKit Version 8 0 0 Select Shortcuts Select from the shortcut options below i Add Shortcut to Start Menu lt Back Cancel e The Setup
52. ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Shortcut Keys Key Function Ctrl N Open a new project Cr 0 Open an existing document Displays the Open dialog box in which you can locate and open the desired file Ctrl 4 S Save the active project with its current name If you have not named the project the Save As dialog box will open Ctr P Print the Active View Ctrl X Remove selected data from the document and stores it on the clipboard Ctrl C Copy the selection to the clipboard Ctrl V Paste the contents of the clipboard at the insertion point Ctrl W Paste the contents of the clipboard Gate or Event at the insertion point as a Repeat Gate or Repeat Event Del Delete the selection Fl Open the ITEM ToolKit On line Help Chapter 11 SpareCost 239 CHAPTER 11 SpareCost SpareCost provides methods for calculating the requirements for replacement of spares for operational systems and equipment It generates spare holdings required at Sites First and second line maintenance by replacement and at Base Third line maintenance to support Sites and repair of returned defective spares The SpareCost Module supports algorithms and models defined in Repstock and Optcost provided by British Ministry of Defense This chapter 1 Introduces SpareCost 2 Describes ToolKit s SpareCost features 3 Outlines an example SpareCost System 4 Describes the SpareCost Editor Screen Toolbars and Shortcut Keys 1 Introduction IT
53. ITEM ToolKit contains powerful features that make it easy to create and analyze projects This chapter will familiarize you with the ToolKit interface It includes information about 1 Standard Features of the ToolKit Interface 2 The ToolKit Workspace 3 The ToolKit Menus 4 The ToolKit Toolbar Once you are familiar with ToolKit s features see Chapter 4 for information about creating a new project 1 Standard Features of the ToolKit Interface This section describes the general functionality of the features and command menus within ITEM ToolKit The standard features described are used throughout all of the applications The use of these features and commands might be different and dependent upon the type of analysis performed However the functionality of the features and commands will remain the same For example the ADD command will e Allow you to add Systems Analysis types to your project when creating a Project e Allow you to add Blocks and Components to the systems created within your Project For detailed instructions on how to use the standard features specific to each analysis type please refer to the respective analysis type s section in this tutorial Multiple Document Interface The ToolKit workspace is the area you use to build your projects It consists of menus toolbars and windows All of the features in the ToolKit workspace follow standard Windows Graphical User Interface GUI conventions The ToolKit w
54. Microelectronics Quality Discrete Quality level for Discrete Semiconductor components Semiconductors Quality Coils Quality level for Coils and Inductive components Quality Relays MR Quality level for Mechanical Relay components Quality Relays SS Quality level for Solid State SS and Time Delay TD Relay components Quality SAW Devices Quality level for Surface Acoustic Wave SAW Devices or components Quality Other Quality level for Other components 8 Next edit the fields in the Application Tab 114 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide General tm Physical E Application Black Quantity 1 Repair Mode Non Repairable Environment Connection Type Ground benign Crimp MO MTTR hrs Mo On Standby i i 5 Ambient Temperature deg voltage Stress Current Stress Power Stress Adjustment Factor Field Quantity Repair Mode Environment Connection Type MTTR No On Standby Number of Blocks on standby used for redundant Blocks only Ambient temperature for the Block and it s attached Blocks and Components Ambient Temperature Voltage Stress Set a voltage stress for the Block reliability calculation Set a current stress for the Block reliability calculation Current Stress Power Stress Set a power stress for the Block reliability calculation Adjustment Factor Optional user adjustment
55. Not Selected B PROJECT 8 Example Pre als MIL 217 Systems FR 23 JM ABCSYS MIL 217 1 FR 22 525928 JM ABCSYS MIL 217 2 FR 0 5862919 c fl V LUISA MIL 217 System Title MIL 217 Example Description ABC Computer System Model ABC XT n ABCSYSMIL217 1 Pentium based Microcomputer Part Number Function Description LCN Circuit Ref Notes Analyst A Bellcore Telcordia Systems FR 19 3263 Qi ABCSYS BellCore TR 332 Issue 6 amp B NSWC Systems FR 1810 6654 Q 0 04 QN ABCSYS Mechanical NSWC 98 LE1 E i AN a 1 rc rm Te Quantity Compiled By NENNEN ixi No On Standby Approved By L W Documents and SettingssGemina Pake My Dacum MTTR i t v so0 Example ITP nA oe H MIL 217 System ABCSYS MIL 217 1 ABC Com f gt Block 10 Power Supply 110 240 V AC S E Block 11 CPU Board 8086 Processor Target Rate 0 Failure Rate 22 525928 J gt Block 12 Display Memory Unit Display p PA a 44393285 gt Block 121 Memory Board 256K RAN atm oo 7 e Block 122 Display Processor Mk2 M Redundanc Y Unavailability 0 00054056296 Diagram Result For Help press F1 Blocks 5 Comps 47 NUM 4 Select the Dialog tab from the viewing window E Select a block from the systems window 6 The Dialog view will display all parameters for the selected block Edit the fields into the General Tab
56. Notification Dialog Box the software opens in demonstration mode You can register the software at any time by selecting Edit License Key from the Help Menu e Select Help from the Standard Toolbar e Select Edit License Key from the Help Menu Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit File Settings Window Help Eeuna Help Topics Edit License Key Update License Online TCPVIP Client Setup Check hor Hodala ITEM Software on the Web F about ITEM Toolkit e The Program Activation Dialog box will appear e Follow the previous activation procedure 34 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Setting Up the License Manager Once the software is activated the license manager needs to be set with the correct types of network connections ITEM ToolKit has two types of network connections available Network File Share Connections LAN WAN Connections NETWORK CLIENT 1 Local or installation path C Program Files tem Toolkit Programs SERVER Server or License Path rere Server Program Files tem Toolkit Programs IT_Local_License Local or installation path C Program Files tem Toolkit Programs The path is shared and accessible to the users Power user right NETWORK CLIENT 2 minimum Local or installation path C Program Files tem Toolkit Programs Server or License Path Server Program Files Item Toolkit Programs IT_Local_License TCP IP
57. Paste the contents of the clipboard Gate or Event at the insertion point as a Repeat Gate or Repeat Event Delete the selection Open the ITEM ToolKit On line Help 254 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Chapter 12 Event Tree 255 CHAPTER 12 Event Tree Analysis Event Tree Analysis ETA is used to determine the consequence of an initiating event and the expected frequency of each consequence For example a pipe breaking in a nuclear power station may have many consequences ranging from a very small release of radiation no significance up to a very large release of radiation catastrophic Event trees model these initiators and consequences and determine their frequencies This chapter 1 Introduces ETA systems 2 Describes ToolKit s ETA features 3 Outlines an example ETA system 4 Describes the ETA Editor Screen Toolbars and Shortcut Keys 1 Introduction Event tree analysis is based on binary logic in which an event either has or has not happened or a component has or has not failed It is valuable in analyzing the consequences arising from a failure or undesired event Event tree analysis is generally applicable for almost any type of risk assessment application but used most effectively to model accidents where multiple safeguards are in place as protective features Event tree analysis is highly effective in determining how various initiating events can result in accidents of interest An event tree begins with
58. Pi 0 State 5 Both Failed Pi 1 State 4 Primary Failed Pi 0 Transition T 1 R 0 001 Transition T 2 R 0 0001 RBD Markov Fault Tree Transition T6 A 0 5 Transition T 7 R 0 5 O O O O o Ro ao Transition T e rer 6 fo ao Transition AO e aM Transition T8 R 0 001 zl Groups Count 0 gt SJ Diyo FH Grid WV Markov fg Chart Result uH LE nn a Tga e For Help press F1 States 5 Transitions 8 i NUM The Markov editor can be made visible by selecting the Dialog Tab 1 or the Markov tab 2 Its main elements are the following e Main Menu 3 Quick access to the main functions Markov Toolbars 4 Quick access to editing functions Project Window 5 A hierarchical view of the project and systems System Window 6 A hierarchical view of the states transitions and groups in the model Markov Window or canvas 7 The area in which Markov can be graphically edited The Default Toolbar Chapter 9 Markov 219 Immediately below the pull down options resides a group of buttons that form a Default Toolbar allowing the user to access directly some of the more frequently used menu options Defaulk D cm he ot FS D C L B ka E E x The Markov System Dialog Window Controls Name New Open Save Cut Copy Paste Delete Item Undo Print About Help Xo amp Y N Description Opens a new project Open an existing document Save the active docum
59. Plastic Paper jE Fixed Plari c Delice Paper Dlelechc Gapa ior Fixed Pilar lc Paper DIeleikhc Cena kr Fixed Pla fic Paper DlIeleckic Indiuc lor Tren dimer Gapa kr Fined Plariic Dieleckic Paper Delezio Capac kr Capac kr Fixed Ple ic Paper C 12 16 Fixed Plaice BDlel amp eckic Paner DIelechc Diode LED Diode LED Click the envelope icon to export the report to another file format such as PDF RTF Excel HTML XML etc Choices At this point you can decide if the pre built reports will suit your needs If not continue to the next sections to learn how to modify the existing reports or build your own 284 Item ToolKit Tutorial 2 Creating Report Templates Templates Tab As mentioned earlier each report pre built or custom is stored as a trt file under the Reports folder where ToolKit is installed on your PC You can Load an existing template edit it and save it on the Templates tab or you can create a new template from scratch 4 IT Reports selection Previeu Templates Customize Available Fields Parameters lz Reports Project MIL217 Ei System Parameters E General Parameters ii Physical Parameters E Application Parameters 5 Pi Factor mm ful Pi Factors All rn Pi Environ E Pi Quality Pi Temperature Ed Pi Stress E Allocation Parameters E Man Op Failure Rate i Mon Op Pi Factors Ex Mon Op Parameters Bellcore RDF 2996 NSWic
60. Plated Through Label l Surface Mount ly Clear Add Mode MIL 217 Add Menu Fault Tree Add Menu When starting a new project the Add menu will allow you to add different types of analysis and systems to your project After selecting and adding an analysis type to your project the Add menu will change and will provide a different selection for each type of analysis system The type of data that can be accessed with this command is relative to the analysis that is performed You will have different Add options for each type of analysis Please refer to the specific analysis section for additional information on using the Add menu Edit Menu Where appropriate choosing the Edit selection from the pull down menu options accesses the attributes of a selected object You can access the same Edit functions by placing the cursor over the object selecting the object and using the Edit menu Edit Layout Settings Chart Window KD Undo db Cut Copy B Paste X Delete Find Replace Global Parameters Custom Connections Set To Default Save As Default Allocation Non Operational Derating Renumber LCN Ctrl x Ctrl C Ctrl V Del Ctrl F Ctrl R Edit Layout Settings Analysis Chart Window x Undo d Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C amp Paste Ctrl Paste Repeat Ctrl Find Ctrl F Replace Ctrl R X Delete Del Set All Symbol Properties To Default Strict Duplicate Name Check Global Paramete
61. Reference The Event Tree Editor Screen Event Tree 1 IT 7n ToolKit C Documesand Settings Gemina Paf My Documents DemoShield Demoshield Version 6 CD ROM 800 Toolkit PREJIES A NSWC Systems FR 1810 RDF Systems FR 1 66688 2998 Systems FR 6 8023 s FMECA Systems A Mainta s A Spare 7 ems HE RED Speer amp Fault Tree Systems A Markov Systems HA Event Tree Systems I Fire Protection System f Pipe Break Loss of Coolant Accide B8 072 7207987 e 5 ne3 2646 Sprinkler System is activated Automatically B5 022 72079887 e 5 wr 3 264 Fire Alarm Starts Successfully B10 0 0 99997279 n 3 2649 Sprinkler System DOES NOT Activate ee B2 0 2 7207987 e 5 13 264t Fire is Detected by the Detection System r rB11 0 2 7207987 e 5 wr 3 264 Sprinkler System is activated Automatically B6 020 98887279 3 26407 Fire Alarm DOES NOT Start Initiator B1 220 0015 w 10 Fire Starts in the Main EE Event Tree System Fire Protectio B12 0 0 99997279 n 3 2649 p m z Buildi s Initiator B1 Fire Starts in the M cdd i Sprinkler System DOES NOT E Success B2 Fire is Detect vas a Success B5 Fire Alarr g L Success B9 Sprir i i Failure B1 Sprin B3 0 0 98897279 w 3 2648 t B8 0 0 900097279 3 2640 i B16 070 99997279 3 2649 t NT Fire is NOT Detected by the Fire A
62. System Window 6 A hierarchical view of the system blocks components and modes e Library Window 7 A hierarchical view of the components and failure modes library Dialog Window 8 The area in which the FMECA can be edited e Grid Window 9 In this area the FMECA can be edited in a tabular style The Default Toolbar Immediately below the pull down options resides a group of buttons that form a Default Toolbar allowing the user to access directly some of the more frequently used menu options ah aE Xo amp Y M L4 C e x E E x Name Description New Opens a new project Open Open an existing document The ToolKit displays the Open dialog box in which you can locate and open the desired file save the active document or template with its current name If you have not named the BONS document the ToolKit displays the Save As dialog box Cut Remove selected data from the document and stores it on the clipboard Copy Copy the selection to the clipboard Paste Paste the contents of the clipboard at the insertion point Delete Item Delete the selection Undo Reverse the last editing Note You cannot undo some actions Print Print the active document About Open the About ITEM ToolKit Window Help Open the ITEM ToolKit On line Help Chapter 6 FMECA The FMECA Dialog Windows Controls The FMECA Dialog Window Contains the following Controls f V B Bj Tool ilu lt 2 BI Name Analyse
63. Systems JB MTO a M N 5 3 z o e J9 MT 0 Oty 1 ffl 1 Power Supply 110 24 es am 1 2 Qty 1 am 1 3 Qty 1 am 1 4 Qty 1 miL 217 MainTain For Hel ress F1 2 kk mO Ixl MIL 217 System DemLib MIL 21 Block 1 FR 4 594943 MT Bubble memory 1 1 FR Capacitor 1 2 FR 0 01 Circuit Breaker 1 3 FR Coil 1 4 FR 3 7317997 Connection 1 5 FR 7 Connector General 1 6 Connector Socket 1 7 Detector Isolator Emit Diode Hi Diode Lo Micro Di Micro EEPROM 1 12 1 Micro Ga amp s Digital 1 1 Micro Ga amp s MMIC 1 1 Micro Linear 1 15 FR Micro Not EEPROM 1 Micro PLA PAL 1 17 F Micro SAW Device 1 1 Micro VHSICAVLSI CMC Microprocessor Digital av Hi General Maintenance Philosophy amp Fault Isolation Static Part Number Mame Circuit Ref LCN Failure Rate Quantity Replaceable Item Sy Dialog iH Grid Fault Isolation to a single RI Fault Isolation to a Group of RIs E Diagram faf Chart Blocks 1 E Maintenance Element amp Failure Rate Allocation Description Power Supply 110 240 VAC Supply 5Vy 12V DC Output Analyst Comps 4 NUM The Maintain editor can be made visible by selecting the Dialog tab 1 Its main elements are the following Main Menu 2 Quick access to the main functions Maintain Toolbar 3 Quick access to editing functions Project Window 4 A hierarchica
64. The Data View window is located on the right hand side of the workspace default location The window allows for the display and entry of component data in the Dialog view displays a grid or spreadsheet view of system data creates and displays RBD Fault Tree Event Tree and Markov diagrams generates and displays preformatted and custom graphs and it displays the final calculated results of the reliability model in use Tabs along the bottom of this window allow for selection and the display of the different types of information L1 Dilog H Grid f Chart Result Fault Tree Options available in the applications window will change in accordance with the analysis performed The data window has seven tabs The Dialog tab displays information for the item selected in the Project or System Window and is the primary location for viewing and editing data The tabs and information presented in the Dialog tab vary depending on the selection made in the Project or System Window c Bl e Tt i MIL 217 System Title MIL 217 Example Description ABC Computer System Model ABC XT Mame ABCSvS MIL 217 1 Pentium based Microcomputer Park Number Function Description LEM IF Circuit Ref Nokes Analyst Ss pA Compiled By Mao On Standby Io EE d Approved By MTTR E Target Rate E Failure Rate 22 525926 Life Time Hours 24 MTEF 44393 285 Redundancy True Unavailability 0 000540562996
65. The Links will flash repeatedly on the screen a Nodes Connected From Nodes Connected To Click on this symbol to display all the Block Nodes connected to the selected Block Nodes The Block Nodes will flash repeatedly on the screen Click on this symbol to display all the Block Nodes connected from the selected Block Nodes The Block Nodes will flash repeatedly on the screen Click on this symbol to display all Block Nodes that are logically connected within the Led Nodes Connected RBD Diagram Block Nodes symbols will flash on the screen in order for you to discern which Block Nodes are connected The Rotate Toolbar The Rotate Toolbar contains commands for rotating the selected components B Cei 1G a 2h A S Name Description Rotate Sets the canvas to Rotate mode Allows grabbing a component and rotating it Rotate Left Rotate Right Rotates the selected components by 90 degrees to the left Rotates the selected components by 90 degrees to the right as gt Lo Flip Vertical Flip Horizontal Flips the selected components 180 degrees about the Y axis Flips the selected components 180 degrees about the X axis 176 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide The Canvas Toolbar The Canvas Toolbar contains commands that affect the appearance and behavior of the canvas Tool Name Description Undo Undo the last command executed on the canvas Redo Redo the last undo t
66. US EORR RRT A A 286 A EPROBIEMS OB VING wijicsntcansrcoadouseansvabbebandauioediuabbramadac uanaes A A E E 291 IMPOR TEX POR 14 o 293 Contents iii 1 CREATING A BILL OF MATERIALS IN EXCEL ccceccsceccsceccecsccccscecscscscecescecescesesceceecscscscescscusescusescecescs 293 2 IMPORTING THE BILL OF MATERIALS INTO TOOLKIT c ccceccececcscecescscecscescscucescecescecescecescscesescesences 295 3 EXPORTING A S YSTEM PROM TOOLKIT TO EXCEL eee ete D eae EA V 299 EIBRARY PFACILLETIES deo doeet ce a ease eed 303 I CREATING ANEW LIBRARY PROJECT x It eoe d ee Pes So peor PIU eas Peebbt e ee Pond so aen PIU oae ebba ee Peto det bet 303 2 ADDING AND EXTRACTING FROM LIBRARY PROJECT ccccsceccscsceccscsccscecscscascscuscscecescscescscscscasescesences 305 3 SAVING AND CLOSE A LIBRARY PROJECT 5 erttioietaste in pridis fate Uso E ERE RA tex i tae Ea Vor tub SERM AS Led Rd dd 307 d AcOADING AND BROWSING A LIBRARY ieiidediiutie densa S evi atit Lp evo atit RE Rd 307 GRID VIEW CUS TOMA TION cairo 6osesGoacuevo Pe odo avecaedvetut bebe vo oe oe cone edo vea edestout oet av co sor coo ea Copes va eoui ve 309 1 VIEWING CREATING GRID TEMPLATES ccsccsceccsceccsceccecsccscscescscscscescscesescesescesescssescscescscasescusescesescecescs 309 2 ADDITIONAL GRID OPTIONS sccscoscscosceccccsccccsceccscevssc
67. Voltage Ceramic Disk Kin Mas Display E oni Library lookup manager rali Cancel Case Sensitive CHAPTER 16 Chapter 16 Grid View Customization 309 Grid View Customization ITEM ToolKit contains a feature that allows you to create your own grid layouts The Grid View is available for all ToolKit modules 1 Viewing Creating Grid Templates If you wish to use a Grid View that is different than the default that comes with ToolKit use the following steps to create your own l Select Settings Grid Templates menu to open the Grid Templates window Grid Templates File Grid Template Selection Templates EX s A Ca EE a D EE s D System Templates FaultTree Template Fmeca Templates HBD Templates MEW Templates EventTree Templat SpareCost Template AOFZO00 Template Miliz Templates AS C Templates Bellecke Templates China ASB Templa Iain T ain N emplate Template Mame Default Filtering U Set up 4 filter or criteria to look for components matching specific criteria Hrderinait Select the fields used t sort components iw Set selected template s active grid template for selected syster User Defined Fields 0 Create delete madify user defined fields Available Fields Selected Fields Ballast Vol Increase z Symbol TL zs CO 2 Overfill 59 Mame Activation Energy Category Active Optical Surfaces J Description Adjustment
68. amp Fault Isolation dialog tab becomes active 2 Click on the Maintenance Philosophy amp Fault Isolation dialog tab 3 Click on New Group button A and the RI Group name will be set as Group 1 B and tick Group Replacement in the Isolation to a Group of RI s section C to set the maintenance philosophy for the group H3 General Ed Maintenance Philosophy amp Fault Isolation EH Maintenance Element amp Failure Rate Allocation Description RI Group Mame Group 1 Quantity In This Group o Total Group Failure Aate o Fault Resolution Isolation to a Group of Ale W Group Replacement Single Access Iterative Replacement Multiple Access Reassembly Required for Checkout 4 Click the Add button D twice in the Fault Resolution section still in the Maintenance Philosophy amp Fault Isolation dialog tab Click in the Resolution for the first line just inserted E and change the number to 20 Leave the No of RI s set to 1 for the first line and click in the Resolution for the second line inserted 7 Leave the Resolution at 100 and change the No of RI s to 2 F E General E Maintenance Philosophy amp Fault Isolation E Maintenance Element amp Failure Rate location Static Al Group Mame Group j Quantity In This Group o Total Group Failure Fi ate o New Group Description Fault Resolution NN egsolution No o
69. aon Save the active document or template with its current name If you have not named the document the ToolKit displays the Save As dialog box Cut Removes selected data from the document and stores it on the clipboard Copy Copy the selection to the clipboard i Paste Paste the contents of the clipboard at the insertion point Ps Delete Item Delete the selection k Undo Reverse the last editing Note You cannot undo some actions Print Print the active document P About Open the About ITEM ToolKit Window K Help Open the ITEM ToolKit On line Help The Event Tree Dialog Window Controls The Event Tree Dialog Window Contains the following Controls gt mv Tool Name Description kj Undo Changes Cancels the latest operation mi Analyse Run the Analysis of the system d Check Spelling Check the Spelling of the selected Text The Project Toolbar The Project Toolbar displays the available analysis options for the ToolKit application A ALL A AB 0L A T Tool Name Description A MIL217 Add a MIL HDBK 217 Electronic System AL Telcordia Bellcore Add a SR 332 Telcordia Electronic System Chapter 12 Event Tree 277 AX IEC 62380 RDF Add an IEC 62380 French Telecom Standard Electronic System Ax 299B Add a 299B Chinese Military Standard Electronic System aM NSWC Mechanical Add a NSWC Mechanical System JI Maintain Add a Maintain MIL HDBK 472 Procedure V System oh SpareCost Add
70. application but used most effectively to model accidents where multiple safeguards are in place as protective features Event tree analysis is highly effective in determining how various initiating events can result in accidents of interest An event tree begins with an initiating event such as a component failure increase in temperature pressure or a release of a hazardous substance The consequences of the event are followed through a series of possible paths Each path is assigned a probability of occurrence and the probability of the various possible outcomes can be calculated The module also includes the BDD analysis method as an alternative to the Rare Event and Esary Proschan quantification options It uses the Binary Decision Diagram algorithm to obtain cut sets and quantification results BDD algorithms distinguish themselves from conventional quantification methods by returning results that do not involve approximations Instead BDD algorithms produce results that are in accordance with the basic rules of probability theory Chapter 1 Introducing ITEM ToolKit 7 2 Hardware and Software Requirements The minimum recommended system configuration for ITEM ToolKit is Q Microsoft Windows 7 Microsoft Windows Vista Microsoft Windows 2000 Microsoft Windows XP Microsoft Windows NT 4 0 SP6 or later or Microsoft Windows 95 98 OW Microsoft Office 2000 or higher OY Intel Pentium IJ or AMD K6 II 450MHz based PC or higher QO 128MB RAM
71. as 117 Fh 00123335 WIndO Ww 1 18 FR 20 105 MTBT 119 FR 0 27375177 1 Parameters Checked Non Op Paramet g 3M ABCSYS MIL 217 1 FR 15 3426 1 20 FR 0 31225738 t e f 10 FR 0 13071763 MTBF 76 m 11 FR 7 4397116 MTBF 134 ps f 12 FR 7 5028092 MTBF 133 ff 1 FR 0 26931518 MTBF 371 2 1 1 FR 0 0051233671 M1 T GN 1 2 FR 0 24465507 MTBI E 1 3 FR 0 0095275015 M1 Project system 1 4 FR 0 01045726 MTBI window showing eN zi open and selected Project system gt gt SJ Dialog Grid E Diagram fg Chart Result For Help press F1 Blocks 1 Comps 20 Library Project A Library Project is identical to ToolKit Project with the exception that it has an embedded Library label This labeling allows it to be treated slightly differently such that it can be created saved and viewed in parallel to a regular project file The disk file extension of library files are ITL which is different from the project files ITP A Library project file and its contents are also displayed and edited using the same facilities as a project file Library System Window Library System Window is identical in operation and capabilities to the System Window and it embeds the Library Hierarchy The Library System Window is identified by its window title if it is in a floating state and by the hierarchy header which has Library appended to the project name By default this window is docked on the right side
72. check the spelling of your phrase E 6 Click Add The phrase is added to the phrase table F Save Phrase Library As Save in L Examples E Failure Mode Phrases txt E Phrases txt FMECA Tutorial Save as type Text Files txt Cancel File name Cancel P eE Sore Delete All Import Save En File add Save 7 Click Save to file H The Phrase Library will be saved in a text file I and can be edited Open Phrase Library Look in 7j Examples JiFsilure Mode Phrases txt Phrases Ext Type Text Document Date Modified 08 09 11 01 04 Size 2 22 KB File name Files of type Text Files t t F allure Mode Phrases txt Cancel 150 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide 8 Click on Import Phrase J and selected the edited and saved Phrase Library K in the Open Phrase Library 9 Click on Open L to import the Phrase Library 10 When you are finished editing phrases click OK G to close the Phrase Library dialog box Verifying Data You must verify system data before performing project analysis Verifying data before performing an analysis can be a great time saving feature When verifying FMECA projects ToolKit checks for Component blocks with no failure modes Component failure mode apportionment that does not total 100 System failure modes with no severity category Component bloc
73. defining the failure or not of the system and sub systems such as Predictions RBD or Markov models can also be used for the quantification of branch probabilities In the following example fire protection is provided by a sprinkler system A detector will either detect the rise in temperature or it will not If the detector succeeds the control box will either work correctly or it will not and so on There is only one branch in the tree that indicates that all the subsystems have succeeded Chapter 12 Event Tree 257 MEG Sprinkler System Detector FIRE Once the system events have been defined they can be combined to derive the various end states or accident scenarios In the graphical representation columns depict the events and the horizontal lines represent the success failure or partial failure branches Each combination of these branches from left to the right depicts a path or a scenario ending in a particular end state or consequence i j z Minimum Damage W 1 Seg 0Q 3 021c 77 509 w 9 393 See Sy elem ps Bciresbeg Butomahbo wy Fire Aka Sharia Dantet ulby 7 Damage No Loss of Life W 2 Seq Q 1 11e 12 80g w 8 999 Tire it Detected by the i Detection Sytem abla F Limited Damage Wei People Wer o Fegan TTe 12 Segen 009 Supe E oer Sy Ee EE 1 3 sraa Aulia nitiata FER Zim DOES NOT Sine Fire Siml in lhe bor i ailurg i Bulkdria T Sconnier rst Uz 5 i TTA SEE
74. displayed Event Tree System Title Fire Protection System Description Event Tree Example 1 Mame Event Tree Example 1 Fire Protection System Part Number ETA Example 1 l Functian EEN F Description Circuit Ret a Analyst Janna Liste A Compiled By Mike Krossauft Approved By Ja P Rouve rl Mission Life time Uncertainty Perom Sample Size 200 Life Time 87500 Ma af Intermediate Time Points 20 Quantification Method Esan PFroschan C Rare Cut Off Probability Unavailability 0 0001 Frequency 1 amp 006 Order Order Sort Cut Sets off C By Frequency f By Unavailability C By Order Max Sorted Sets Percentile 95 Miscellaneous EDD IY Primary Event Tree Use Maz Risk Dormant Model Modularize super events 00 Perform Common Cause Failure Analysis Chapter 12 Event Tree 263 11 Enter your system information by placing the cursor or clicking in the appropriate fields 12 The information entered here is for the system level The following table describes what could be entered and what each field and block of fields pertains to Name If you select the Probability box enter the unavailability and the Frequency cut off rate for Cut Off this project Click the Order box to have an Order Cut Off and then enter the cut off value for this project select whether you wish to Sort Cut Sets by unavai
75. numbers for the components e Import the spreadsheet matching the single column to the Part Number field with ToolKit e The list of Part Numbers is imported yet the components are categorized as External for manual editing later e If however you have a Library open during the import that has matching part numbers to those in the spreadsheet ToolKit will match the part numbers and bring in the information on the parts contained in the Library into the Project file Chapter 14 Import Export 299 3 Exporting a System from ToolKit to Excel The export function enables you to extract all of the information you have entered into ToolKit and the calculated values results that ToolKit has made for you Not only do you get the information in a spreadsheet database or text file but the relationships between the blocks components and other elements of your systems are maintained Any system created using any ToolKit module can be exported One common use of an export is for review purposes by colleagues who do not have ToolKit Then once they have made their changes to the values in the exported spreadsheet it can be re imported back into ToolKit To export a System from ToolKit 1 Select the system you wish to export on the System window Fil ABCSYS MIL 217 81 FR215 342553 MTBF BB177 773 PJ TU FRZ0 13071 BE3 MTBFz B550073 5 E TTzFRz27 433 115 MTBFz134413 81 E 12 FR 5023032 MTBFz133281 54 E 1 FR20 25331818 M
76. of functions Blocks can be added to the FMECA system hierarchy tree by selecting the FMECA system tab Select the Block options from the Add menu Blocks can also be created or added using the equivalent toolbar option To add blocks using the toolbar 1 Select the block from the toolbar menu A The cursor should take the shape of a plus sign IT Item ToolKit Project Dialog File Add Edit Layout Settings Analysis Chart Window Help A E x Dg Ez K e 9 R R EN Category Not Selected GQ ajx a amp 5 amp AGE i PROJECT IT Project Predi s FMECA Systems QL FMECAO E3 Block Info info mm Detectabiity tx Diagnostic Coverage SFF FMECA Syste Title Description Name FMECA 0 Part Number LCN F Analyst mon Function Life Time Hours 1 Description Compiled By Approved By Use Weighted Criticality Method D Normalize Apportionments Notes 3 0 sees Standard IEC 61508 Calc Engine Mode Basic Mode Y Mission Phase gt Dialog B Diagram Result For Help press F1 Blocks 1 Comps 0 NUM Chapter 6 FMECA 139 2 Place the block cursor where you would like to add the new block on the system window and click your mouse once The new block should appear 3 Multiple blocks can be added by repeating step 2 To disable the add block mode select the Release button B from the Toolbar or right click the mouse button Select the Di
77. or Internet resource and Windows will open it For you Tancel Browse e In the Run dialog box type D setup replace the letter D with the correct letter for your CD ROM drive e Click OK to activate the installation program e If the Auto Run feature is activated the following screen appears Welcome to Item Software s interactive Product Demonstration CD ROM PRODUCTS ji CUSTOMERS This disc will also penis you with information about the company tt products and services You can also install demonstrations of aur latest software products lor evaluation purposes SERVICES CONTACT Us INSTALL OR UPGRADE lise the menu buttans on the left of the screen POF FILES lo navigate around the demo CD ROM INSTALL DEMO Lu To exit the demo at any time simply press the escape key on your keyboard Thank you for chosing ltem Software and we look forward to being of service to you in the near future litem Software e Select Install or Upgrade 60 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide INSTALL PRODUCT SEMUZ ToolKit ABOUT US J Version 7 97 1 for new znsiallatoss PRODUCTS CUSTOMERS i xh z ToolKit Upgrade SERVICES If you have purchased d sofiware prodici Upgrade an axisiiug copy from Item Software of ITEM Toolkit PDF FILES please click a button for 7x installations only on the rishi to insiall INSTALL DEMO QD or upgrade the program
78. points for the Dormant Model Description Description for this System Function er d Purpose Description of this system Description Notes Any other pertinent information about this system This is the probability of failure per unit time given that the component was working as designed at time zero and has survived to time t Miscellaneous Failure Rate Q Displays the project failure frequency once analysis is complete The unconditional failure intensity is the probability that the system fails per unit time given that it was working as designed at time 0 Failure Frequency No of Expected Failures Display the number of times the system is expected to fail over the specified lifetime in hours of this project once the analysis is complete This is the probability of failure per unit time given that the component was working as designed at time zero and is working at time t Conditional Failure Intensity Displays the total down time for this project if and when a failure occurs during the specified system lifetime in hours once the analysis is complete Unreliability This is the probability that one or more failures will occur over a specified period of time Unavailability This is the probability that the component or system is unavailable at any given time Sore E Click on the selected Quantification method BDD Click this box to enable the Binary Decision Diagram analysis facilities Modulariz
79. project toolbar is activated IT Item ToolKit Project Dialog D File Add Edit Layout Settings Chart Window Help A fh s 89 NXXEXX S80848cv jx e Mame IT Project 00 Fart Number PO LEM Circuit Ref Analvst Pe Compiled By 3 From the Add Menu or from the project toolbar B select the desired system module IT Item ToolKit Project Dialog a File Add Edit Layout Settings Chart Window Help Dae tee xXo SPR XNXAXXXS250B89A1 9 21x o fa y aikee S a E H Bellcore Telcordia Systems FR 0 320 MTBF None Bellcore System S PROJECT IT Project Prediction Totals FR 0 Q 0 MTI 2r TEL 0 FR 0 Q 0 MTBF None tte Name TELO Part Number LCN F Circuit Ref Analyst Quantity 1 No On Standby 0 MTTR fo MIL 217 4 The selected system will be added into the project C and in the system window D 5 If you want to add additional systems to the project repeat step 3 2 Opening a Project To Open a Project 1 Start ToolKit Chapter 4 Project Basics 2 From the File Menu A select Open Project or click on the Open project icon B 3 Look in J Examples D alternate Symbols 1 alternate Symbols 2 FT Example2 VEINS t File name v 708 E xample Files of type iT Project Files ITP xl Cancel 4 The selected project opens IT ltem Too
80. provide you the required instruction for installing the software as Standalone It contains the following sections What is Standalone Installation Installing the software Activating the software Verifying the software 10 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide What is Standalone Installation standalone Installation is one of the options that are available for installing Toolkit This option will allow you to install ToolKit s program files to a local or standalone workstation It is intended for a single user license or when the software license is not shared through a network DESKTOP NETWORK COMPUTER r e m SERVER Toolkit License Shared ToolKit Project LAPTOP COMPUTER Toolkit License The Software and the license key are installed by default on the C Drive of the desktop or laptop computer under Program Files Item Toolkit Programs NOTE The following must be noted when performing a Standalone Installation STANDALONE INSTALLATION MUST BE PHYSICALLY PERFORMED AT THE DESIGNATED WORSTATION STANDALONE INSTALLATION CANNOT BE PERFORMED FROM REMOTE WORKSTATION OR SERVER STANDALONE INSTALLATION REQUIRES FULL ADMINISTRATIVE RIGHTS STANDALONE USERS MUST HAVE AT LEAST POWER USER ACCESS RIGHTS TO THE WORKSTATION FULL ADMINISTRATOR ACCESS RIGHTS IS RECOMMENDED Installing the Standalone Version of the Software The Install Wizard will guide you through simple s
81. reliability measures that are computed by default Available measures include state probabilities time spent in a given state or state group as well as transition rate and number of transitions in and out of a given state or state group After computation of the solution Step 3 these results can be observed in the various tabular and graphical formats Chapter 9 Markov 205 2 ITEM ToolKit amp Markov Analysis Markov Analysis is one of the many modules within the ITEM ToolKit application which includes ITEM ToolKit s standard features and integration Item Software s Markov Module provides a powerful Markov modeling and analysis technique with strong applications in time based reliability and availability analysis The reliability behavior of a system is represented using a state transition diagram which consists of a set of discrete states that the system can be in and defines the speed at which transitions between those states take place As such Markov models consist of comprehensive representations of possible chains of events i e transitions within systems which in the case of reliability and availability analysis correspond to sequences of failures and repair The Markov model is analyzed in order to determine such measures as the probability of being in a given state at a given point in time the amount of time a system is expected to spend in a given state as well as the expected number of transitions between states for instanc
82. rilakc B 1 Name gi wan re Slr In I Building acess Branch Parameters g a E x ud o S 7 gt E Event Tree System Fire Protectio nitiator B1 Fire Starts in the t Success B2 Fire is Deter Group Labels V Success B5 Fire Ala Success BS Spi Spelling Cancel T Failure B10 Spri F Failure B6 Fire Alarm Success B11 5 JT Failure B12 Spri F Failure B3 Fire is NOT D Failure RA Fire Alam Dialog Grid Event Tree b For Help press F1 Columns 4 Branches 11 Double Click on the Initiator Branch B The Branch Parameters window appears Enter the Branch Name Description and Notes Click OK when finished C Edit the branches according to the following table Fire is Detected by the Detection System pig e Du Fire Detected x Fire is NOT Detected by the Detection System Fire Alarm Starts rame Be Fire Alarm DOES NOT Start Fire Alarm DOES NOT Start 270 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Column T D t C Name me escription onsequence Sprinkler System is activated Automatically Minimum Damage Limited Damage Wet People B Major Damage and Loss of Life B Major Damage and Loss of Life 6 The Diagram should looks like the following Fire Starts Fire Detected Fire Alarm Starts Sprinkler Starts Sprinker Svstem is activated Fire Alarm Starts Successfully silure DEM Sprinkler System pos 8 agg coc do
83. selected components one logical unit left Move the selected components one logical unit right 200 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide The Rotate Toolbar The Rotate Toolbar contains commands for rotating the selected components J 6452 A S Tool Name Description CG Rotate Sets the canvas to Rotate mode Allows grabbing a component and rotating it de Rotate Left Rotates the selected components by 90 degrees to the left h Rotate Right Rotates the selected components by 90 degrees to the right he Flip Vertical Flips the selected components 180 degrees about the Y axis Flip Horizontal Flips the selected components 180 degrees about the X axis The Lavout Toolbar The Layout Toolbar contains commands for arranging components with respect to each other PELIT Tool Name Description H Space Across Space the components evenly between the left most and right most components selected Space Down HH Same Width is Same Height Change the height of the components to match the anchor component Space the components evenly between the top most and bottom most components selected Change the width of the components to match the anchor component bH Same Size Change the width and height of the components to match the anchor component Chapter 8 Fault Tree 201 The Canvas Toolbar The Canvas Toolbar contains commands that affect the appearance and behavior of the canvas Name Description U
84. selecting the FMECA system tab Select the Component options from the Add menu Components can also be created or added using the equivalent toolbar option To add components using the toolbar 1 Select the component from the toolbar menu A The cursor should take the shape of the component selected IT Item ToolKit Project Dialog D Fie Add Edit Layout Settings Analysis Chart Window Help es jm x D c b o amp 9 M D Category Not Selected s x PROJECT IT Project Predi HE FMECA Systems a FMECA 0 Block Into B3 MANnfo E Detectability B3 Diagnostic Coverage SFF FMECA System Info Title Mame FMECA 0 Part Number LCN F Analyst DEN Function Life Time Hours o Description Compiled By Approved By Use Weighted Criticality Method Normalize Apportionments D Description Notes Standard IEC 61508 Y Calc Engine Mode Basic Mode Y Mission Phase 4 m N Dialog EH Grid g Diagram la Chart Result For Help press F1 Blocks 3 Comps 0 NUM 2 Place the block cursor where you would like to add the new Component on the system window and click your mouse once The new component should appear 3 Multiple components can be added by repeating step 2 To disable the add component mode select the Release button B from the Toolbar Select the Dialog tab from the viewing window C Select a component from the systems window
85. the Mil 217 toolbar select a component B Place the block cursor C where you would like to add the new Component on the system window and click your mouse once The new component should appear Multiple components can be added by repeating step 2 To disable the add component mode select the Release button D from the Toolbar or right click the mouse button To edit a component select it from the systems window E Click on the General Tab F to edit the general information of the selected component Ea General E3 Physical E Application Micro VHSICIVLSI CMOS Part Number X Description Micro WHSICIVLSI CMOS Name Circuit Ref Analyst Mister Category Micro VHSICJVLSI CMOS ri LON F22 oa VHSIC YLSI CMOS Detail Model Parameters Checked Non Op Parameters Part Number Component Part Number Name A Unique Reference Identifier Circuit Ref Circuit Reference or Reference designator of the Component 116 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Any other pertinent information on the Block Logistic Control Number Internal reference number defined by the user Detail Model Used to more accurately model VHSIC VLSI CMOS components using DMEA Non Op Parameters Used to calculate non operational dormant failure rate of components 7 Click on the Physical Tab H to edit the Physical information of the selected component Capacitor Style Ceramic Temp Com MER Q
86. the Program Folder box then click Next To select an existing folder locate the desired folder in the Existing Folders list select it and then click Next ITEM ToolKit Version 2 0 0 Select Program Folder Please select a program folder Setup will add program icons to the Program Folder listed below fou may type a new folder nare ar select one trom the existing folders list Click West to continue Program Folders Item S aftu Administrative Tools Adobe Acrobat 4 0 AtamP ark Audio Related Programs DemoShield 6 0 DYD Shrink EPSON Printers X Back Cancel Select the optional Components to be installed and then click Next ITEM ToolKit Version 8 0 0 Optional Components Please select from the optional components below for inclusion in your installation Example Files 9135 Description These components install a range of templates settings and samples tis highly recommended that you include these in your installation Space Required on C 212068 K Space Available on C 19392041 2 K lt Back Next gt Cancel 16 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide e The Setup Status dialog box appears and displays the progress of the installation ITEM ToolKit Version 8 0 0 Setup Status Item Toolkit Setup is performing the requested operations Installing Setup Complete Setup has now finished installing ITEM Toolkit After clicking Finish please wa
87. to display the results E Clicking on different items in the system window will display results for this item F 152 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide IT Item ToolKit C Documents and Settings Gemina Pake My Documents DemoShield emoshield Version 6 CD ROM 800 Toolkit Defaults Exam SEE File Add Edit Layout Settings Analysis Chart Window Help MB PROJECT V 8 Example Predictic 3 Parameter HH MIL 217 Systems FR 23 112 1 Actual Failure Rate 2 8008134 fS Bellcore Telcordia Systems F Calculated Failure Rate 2 8008137 IB NSWC Systems FR 1810 66 Criticality Cr I D 1655 Cr Ill 2 1166828 Cr IV 0 50218582 Cr II 0 016445 lt HA RDF Systems FR 1 666884E TT HA 2998 Systems FR 6 802306 E FMECA Systems Y 4BCSYS ES Mode Ref ID Comp ID Function Failure Mode Failure Cause Local Fffects gt ae 3 3 3 Catastrophic Complete Disintegration Catastrophic 2 Erratic Operation Intermittent Operatior Fails out of Tolerance High C Documents and Settings Gemina P 34 Intermittent Inadvertant Operation c f ABCSYSFMECA MIL STD 1629 Operation Erratic Operation H 1 POWER SUPPLY AFR 5 1 Fails out of Tolerance High i 2 CPU BOARD AFR 0 38621 E 3 MEMORY UNIT AFRzZ2ATTI a f 3 1 ROM BOARD AFR C End Effects A 3 1 1 SPLIT FIBRILS Em L3 f 312 C DIGITAL Mode Ref ID End Effect Severity ID Severity Description Detectable ID Dete f 3 1 3 CAPACITOR
88. to view the results The RBD Results dialog box appears C RBD 1 IT Item ToolKit Project RBD DER O File Add Edit Layout Settings Analysis Chart Window Help _ x Dees Bag X et um m f A gt mw 0 Agp Iso lPerform r Status PROJECT IT Project Pre Summary A RED Systems iE RBD 0 FR 0 0 0 RBD System Summary Life Time Hours Node 1 2 Values t 1 Steady State Value t in A Unavailability Q Failure Frequency W Mean Unavailability Qm Mean Availability Arn Conditional Failure Intensity Expected Failures Unreliability oooroceo oo Importance m Node Bm Block 1 0 0 w 0 m Node 1 1 fe Block 1 1 0 0 m Node 1 2 0 0 F Vesely Birnbaum B Proschan Cut Sets No Unavailability Frequency 0 Block 1 2 0 0 v Events i Block 2 Block 1 1 Block 1 2 Dilog FH Gid B E Start RBD Analysis 5 You can view the results for each item in the hierarchy displayed on the left side of the dialog box D Chapter 7 RBD 169 Understanding Analysis Results Unavailability Q Unavailability Q represents the probability that the component or system is unavailable at any given time Q equals the probability that the system is unavailable Failure Frequency W Failure Frequency W or unconditional failure intensity is the pr
89. troubleshooting purposes only and will stop the service when exiting the license manager TCP IP License setup Item Toolkit license setup f Standalone Workstation C Network Client Hetwork Server 5j C Network file share License path C Program Files sltem sTaoaolkitPragrams Browse Port Humber 10000 Server exe ervice Thread Start Server Service Stop Server Service Install as Service pamm Click OK when finished Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit 57 4 Network Client Installation ITEM ToolKit supports five types of installation Standalone Network Server Network License Server Network Client and View Only Client This chapter will provide you the required instruction for installing the software as a Network Client It contains the following sections What is Network Client Installation nstalling the Software Activating the Software Setting Up Network Client Verifying the Software 58 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide What Is Network Client Installation Network Client Installation is designed to install ITEM ToolKit on the client workstation and to create a path from the client workstation to the network server Upon completing the installation of the Network Client client workstation the license keys that are installed on your network server can be accessed from the client workstation Network server installation must be present and activated within
90. which this option is selected by a small circle next to the state e Initial state a flag indicating whether the state is the sole initial state Repeat the steps 17 to 19 for the remaining states with the parameters listed below Original Name Unavailability State Initial State Primary Failed X Both Failed Lo X 0p StandbyFailed X Chapter 9 Markov 211 Primary Repaired OSC Furthermore we assume that the system as a whole is unavailable when both the primary and standby components are failed While in principle any number of states can be marked as unavailable here we will limit it 20 Right click the state corresponding to the both components failed state A popup menu appears 21 Inthe popup menu select the State Parameters option A dialog box opens 22 Inthe dialog box check the Unavailable State option and click OK 23 Ensure that in the editor pane the state is indicated as being an unavailable state of the system by a small circle A appearing next to the state Beth Available Dll sss sss Primary Failed Both Failed a Standby Failed 24 Next we introduce into the model the transitions representing the failures as well as repairs of the components By inserting a transition originating in one state and leading to another we model the possibility of an event taking place that would bring the system from one state to another In our simple model we will insert eight t
91. you can locate and open the MPO desired file Ctrl 4 S Save the active project with its current name If you have not named the project the Save As dialog box will open Ctrl P Print the Active View Ctrl X Remove selected data from the document and stores it on the clipboard Ctrl C Copy the selection to the clipboard Ctrl V Paste the contents of the clipboard at the insertion point Ctrl W Paste the contents of the clipboard Gate or Event at the insertion point as a Repeat Gate or Repeat Event Del Delete the selection Fl Open the ITEM ToolKit On line Help Chapter 9 Markov 203 CHAPTER 9 Markov Markov Analysis is a technique used to obtain numerical measures related to the reliability and availability of a system or part of a system Markov Analysis is performed when dependencies between the failure of multiple components as well as dependencies between component failures and failure rates cannot be easily represented using a combination of fault trees and standard time to failure and time to repair distributions Specific examples of application areas are standby redundancy configurations as well as common cause failures This chapter 1 Introduces Markov system 2 Describes ToolKit s Markov features 3 Outlines an example Markov System 4 Describes the Markov Editor Screen Toolbars and Shortcut Keys 204 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide 1 Introduction Why Use a Markov Analysis Markov model
92. your network prior to installing the Network Client NETWORK CLIENT 1 Full ITEM ToolKit Installation NETWORK SERVER Path to the Network Licenses or LICENSE SERVER NETWORK CLIENT 2 with installation and activation Full ITEM ToolKit completed Installation Path to the Network Licenses NOTE The following must be noted when installing the software on a Network Client NETWORK CLIENT INSTALLATION MUST BE PHYSICALLY PERFORMED AT THE DESIGNATED CLIENT WORKSTATION AND CANNOT BE PERFORMED FROM REMOTE WORKSTATION OR SERVER TOOLKIT OR THE LICENSE MANAGER MUST BE INSTALLED ON THE NETWORK SERVER BEFORE DOING A NETWORK CLIENT INSTALLATION NETWORK CLIENT INSTALLATION REQUIRES FULL ADMINISTRATIVE RIGHTS THE PROGRAMS FOLDER FOR EXAMPLE C PROGRAM FILES ITEM TOOLKIT PROGRAMS INSTALLED ON THE NETWORK SERVER MUST BE SHARED BETWEEN THE NETWORK SERVER AND CLIENT WORKSTATION NETWORK CLIENT MUST HAVE FULL ACCESS RIGHTS TO THE PROGRAMS FOLDER FOR EXAMPLE C PROGRAM FILES VTEMN TOOLKIT PROGRAMS INSTALLED ON THE NETWORK SERVER Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit 59 Installing the Software The Install Wizard will guide you through simple steps for installing ITEM ToolKit Please complete the following steps e Insert the ToolKit CD into your CD ROM drive e If the Auto Run feature is not activated choose Run from the Start Menu The Run dialog box appears Type the name of a program Folder document
93. 1 Export Wizard Select Table Input Fields Output Fields HE l7 Blacks and Components Select the table first Category Description then use these M x Failure Rabe Linie buttons to select all Percent Contribution l i or specific fields for export Adjustment Factor Mean Time To Repair Name w Wizard The final step is to confirm the format of the export Amongst other formats Excel spreadsheets or Microsoft Access are the most popular Click Finish when ready to start the export Show Preview fw 4 Export Wizard Step 4 of 4 CiDacuments and Settings Gemina PakeiMy Documents DemoShield Demashield Browse Text Export Options Microsoft Excel Specified Delimiter v Field Names 4s First Record Delete Existing Records Decimals Places 5 C Append to Existing Records Delete Unselected Fields O p semp Pareo 1 Export e MAE TM TTN mi 217 Blocks and Components a Show Preview W zz Back Cancel The end result of the export if you chose Excel is an xls file with a worksheet for each major table of data within ToolKit 302 Item ToolKit Tutorial Chapter 15 Library Facilities 303 CHAPTER 15 Library Facilities ITEM ToolKit contains several library facilities The first facility is referred to as Library Project and is functionally identical to a regular Project File with the addition of another Sys
94. 5 5 Predictions Editor Screen Toolbar and Shortcut Keys Quick Reference The Prediction Editor Screen ice TE EG TAO 42 zx cuments and Settings Gem MIL 217 System DemLib MIL 217 H Block 1 FR 4 594943 MTBF Bubble memory 1 1 FR 0 D IT Jtem ToolKit Progect Dinloe o i pb V Dea E MIL 217 Systems FR 0 1625 g MIL 0 FR 0 16259044 6 Capacitor 1 2 FR 0 0101 Circuit Breaker 1 3 FR 0 2 Coil 1 4 FR 3 7317997e Connection 1 5 FR 7 000 Connector General 1 6 FF Connector Socket 1 7 FR Detector Isolator Emit 1 8 US General 13 Physical m Application FMEcA miL 217 Block Dbdemtib itL QiTr2 Part Number m Description Block Diode High Frequency 1 Diode Low Frequency 1 1 Micro Digital 1 11 FR 0 0 Name Micro EEPROM 1 12 FR Micro Ga amp s Digital 1 13 F Micro Ga amp s MMIC 1 14 F Micro Linear 1 15 FR 20 0 Micro Not EEPROM 1 16 Micro PLA PAL 1 17 FR Micro SAM Device 1 18 1 Micro VH CMOS j Microproc 7 1 2 Circuit Ref Analyst Notes dur Category Block CN Update Children Iv L Temperature NEN Increment SE Absolute Replacement Hao Item ToolKit Project Grid B Name Category D Description Block Capacitor FMECA MIL 217 Eonpscibra 1 5 Connect c ffl Block 2 Block FR 0 09299 Capacitor 2 1 Ca
95. 50 9000 Failure Mode Effects and Full version Reliability Block Diagram Reliability Black Diagram Demo Version Fault Tree Analysis FTA Demo Version Event Tree Analvsis ET Demo Version Markov Modelling MEY RDF 2000 IEC 62380 TR 1 LITE C 80 8103 French Telecom Standard Electror 998 China 2996 Electronics Spares Scaling and Rangin Spares Scaling and Ranging Dero Yersian MainTain Maintainability MIL HDBE 472 Procedure w Demo Version After dismissing the above dialog the Time Trial Notification Dialog dialog will be displayed along with the number of days left in the trial period NOTE f you click Continue from the Demo Notification Dialog Box the software opens in demonstration mode You can register the software at any time by selecting Edit License Key from the Help Menu e Select Help from the Standard Toolbar Select Edit License Key from the Help Menu File Settings Window Help n tae fed ct al Help Topics Edit License Key Update License Online TCPHIP Client Setup Check Fer Update ITEM Software on the web TE about ITEM Toolkit e The Program Activation Dialog box will appear Follow the previous activation procedure 20 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Verifying the Software To Check Which Modules Are Activated Select Help From the Standard Toolbar e Select About ITEM ToolKit ile Setti
96. 6 S o a Le XOR GATE NOT GATE NULL GATE TRANSFER GATE INHIBIT GATE BASIC EVENT HOUSE EVENT UNDEVELOPED EVENT DORMANT EVENT CONDITIONAL EVENT Text Image Page Up Page Down Auto Arrange Transfer to MS Word Start FTA Analysis Abort FTA Analysis Summary Header Footer Auto Paginate Undo Auto Paginate Fit to Page Reset Fit to Page Creates a XOR GATE symbol on the Fault Tree diagram Creates a NOT GATE symbol on the Fault Tree diagram Creates a NULL GATE symbol on the Fault Tree diagram Creates a TRANSFER GATE symbol on the Fault Tree diagram Creates an INHIBIT GATE symbol on the Fault Tree diagram Creates a BASIC EVENT symbol on the Fault Tree diagram Creates a HOUSE EVENT symbol on the Fault Tree diagram Creates an UNDEVELOPED symbol on the Fault Tree diagram Creates a DORMANT EVENT symbol on the Fault Tree diagram Creates a CONDITIONAL EVENT symbol on the Fault Tree diagram Allows the user to add a text component to the canvas Allows the user to add an image component to the canvas Allows the user to go one level up in the canvas Allows the user to go one level down in the canvas based on the selected Block Allows the user to organize the components on the canvas Allows the user to transfer any Fault Tree Analysis data directly into MS Word Allows the user to perform the necessary calculations of the analysis Allows the user to stop the analysis or calculations currently being perfor
97. 8 33330 6389 0 6389 Group 1 8 46 REETIS 1141 Y 5 0 0833 0 0833 Group 11 41 a l4 1 85 6 0 0833 0 0833 Group 1 B5 Blocks 1 Compsi4 Numi 2 Click on the Result tab J at the bottom of the ITEM ToolKit screen to display the results Summary View MEM Parameter Value 41 Total MTTR Min 21 7099 MMH Hour 0 2778 MMH Repair Hour 0 292 a RI Group Name Quantity F Rate fpmh Code S avg 4 Group 1 1 0 I 0 8 1 8 46 1 3 iB 41 41 1 4 j 1 85 1 Name Failure Rate Quantity RI MainTain Summary Results Tp Tfi Td Ti Tr Ta Tc Tst MTTR 15 708285 00 0000 00 00 00 21 7099 22 52 B 1 8 Replacement Items MTTR MMH MMH Repair Group Name NxFailure Rate Y 10 0 0833 0 0833 Group 1 0 8 Y 38 3333 0 6389 0 6389 Group 1 8 46 Y 5 10 0833 0 0833 Group 1 11 41 Y 5 0 0833 0 0833 Group 1 1 85 234 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Understanding Analysis Results The following is a brief description of all the fields MMH ou Rte a Average Alignment Time REPLACEMENT ITEMS i vni NxFailure Rate RI s Total Failure Rate RI s Failure Rate X Quantity Chapter 10 MainTain 4 Maintain Editor Screen Toolbar and Shortcut Keys Quick Reference The Maintain Editor Screen 235 IT Item ToolKit Projer malog a File Add Edit Layout Settings Chart window Help Duk ts BEX B amp F N iB PROJECT IT Project Pred 5 HA Maintain
98. Catastrophic No operation eie ee ee ee ee ee ee ee B Chapter 6 FMECA 153 Use the SEV OCC and DET fields to enter the ISO 9000 range of values appropriate for the element you are considering The RPN number will be automatically calculated This view is also intended to be used as the reporting mechanism for ISO 9000 based FMECA Simply print the Grid View as your report File Print Preview Print Active View or File Save Grid You can also construct ISO 9000 based reports via the Report Generator but they will not be able to represent the ISO 9000 one to many relationships as the Grid View does 4 FMECA Editor Screen Toolbar and Shortcut Keys Quick Reference The FMECA Editor Screen V 800 Examp Zz31P 1 ile Add Edit Layout Settings Analysis Chart Window Help Dc Ai amp ea EX 8 9 e ls i D imn Category Not Selected G lt gt ajx ids az _C Documents and Settings A IT Iter ToolKit C Wocupents and Settings Gemina PakeW DocumentsiDemos g 9 Q DemLib FMECA 1 _ ff 1 CAPACITOR FIXE m gt Ph PA FMECA A ex fg 2 CONNECTOR g 2 f 3 DIODE 9o u Block info E3 Mode Info IB Detectability EB Diagnostic Coverage SFF z A E 2898 Systems FR 0 Q 0 b FMECA System Info M r Title FMECA Exampl Description ABC Computer System Model ABC m xample omputer System Mode OL ABCSYS FMECA mcs al Pentium based M
99. Connections Internet Connections NETWORK CLIENT 1 Local or installation path C Program Files tem Toolkit Programs Server IP Address 127 0 0 1 SERVER Server Port Numbers Local or installation path 10000 C Program Files Item Toolkit Programs IT_Local_License Port Number 10000 NETWORK CLIENT 2 Local or installation path C Program Files tem Toolkit Programs Server IP Address 127 0 0 1 Server Port Number 10000 Server path IP Address and Server Port Number should be obtained from your Network Administrator Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit Network File Share Connections Setup e From the Start Menu select Programs Item Software ITEM ToolKit License Manager lan Item S ftwar leg ITEM Toolkit Additional Help Files fj Audio Related Programs j fi ITEM Toolkit 4 ITEM Toolkit License Manager ITEM Software Website LJ RecordPad Sound Recorder e The License Manager Dialog box appears Item ToolKit License Manager IT License Server IT License Client Help Computer Info User Name lt lt Cosibu Nani GRAHAM 9 3 IP Address uc e oc e Item ToolKit License Manager Jaimee IT License Client Help License information License Activation ze Server configuration SSP aS Sar m IP Address 32 i Cancel 35 36 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide e The license setup window opens e Verify that Network Se
100. D The Dialog view will display all parameters for the selected component Edit the required fields The following view is displayed in Dialog View in the Component tab pro es 142 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide E Block Info H3 Made Info E Detectability H3 Diagnostic Coverage SFF Component Function Name ID RA Description Part Number C C LEN Fel Quantity Mo Parent Name ID La No of Modes Function a Description Circuit Ref Failure Rate E Motes p Time Factor 1 Mission Phase Field Name ID Part Number Parent Name ID No of Mode Failure Rate Failure Rate of the component Op Time Factor Operating time factor of the component 1 means 100 0 5 means 50 LC Note The following view is displayed in Dialog View in the Mode tab Chapter 6 FMECA 143 t Block Info Mode Info EH Detectabilty E Diagnostic Coverage SFF Selected FMECA 0 Test FD CP Remarks e Failure Modes IFMEC AOA Test o L Causes 35 Contributors 144 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide FMECA Example Builda system following the example below Y Fump Control Computer Standalone Computer f jf 1 1 Processor 1 fl 1 2 RAM 1 jf 1 3 Pawer Supply B 2 RAM 2 B 3 DISK 1 B 4 Di5kK2 FMECA 2 Inthe Dialog tab modify the properties of each component Use the following table as a guide em emo emo 3 The system block and
101. DF 2000 and 299B standards ToolKit automatically calculates the failure rates and MTBFs associated with components as they are added to the system In addition it automatically updates all dependent failure rates in the system as well as the overall project failure rate Mil 217 The most widely known and used reliability prediction handbook is Mil 217 It contains failure rate models for electronic system parts such as ICs transistors diodes resistors capacitors relays switches and connectors Telcordia Bellcore A product of Bell Communications Research the Telcordia handbook is derived from the Mil 217 handbook The Telcordia reliability prediction procedure is applicable to commercial electronic products Many commercial electronic product companies are now using the Telcordia handbook for their reliability predictions NSWC The NSWC Standard is a commonly used model for mechanical components NSWC uses a series of models for various categories of mechanical components to predict failure rates based on temperatures stresses flow rates and various other parameters It provides models for various types of mechanical devices including springs bearings seals motors brakes and clutches NSWC is a relatively new standard and is currently the only one of its kind IEC 62380 RDF 2000 The IEC 62380 Module supports methods of reliability prediction as described in the French standard published by the Union Technique de L Electric
102. Data Check Duplicate Mode Id Abort Duplicate Mode Id check dy Perform Q3 Abort Status Post Analysis Verify Criticality Matrices Chart Menu The Chart menu provides options for creating and customizing charts using the ToolKit graph engine The menu is the same for all modules and offers the following commands Chart Window Help Save Chart As Dib File Save Chart As Jpeg File Zoom Out Edit Graph Wizard Graph Options Set Layout To Default Refresh Save Chart As Dib File This option saves the active chart in dib bmp file format Save Chart As Jpeg File This option saves the active chart in jpeg file format Edit Graph Displays a dialog box that allows you to modify and edit specific areas and each piece of data displayed within the chart It should be noted however that modifications made to the data by using this option do not change the data inside ToolKit e Wizard Launches the Chart Wizard that allows you to change the type of graph displayed title legend and other standard chart formatting items e Graph Options Launches the Graph Options window used to select the data displayed in the graph for the selected system It then generates the actual graph display e Set Layout to Default Returns the graph style and display to the ToolKit default style 96 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Window Menu The Window menu offers the following standard Windows viewing options Cascade Ti
103. Derating uusumuuanuuauu HAVSEA TED D AB I TP UTU t MIL STD 375M t MIL STO 1547 t AS46173 Class A t 454613 Class B t 454613 Class C Please use File Derating Files menu for user defined derating criteria Cancel 3 Note that once you have chosen a System to be derated the icons change in the System window Meets derating requirements H 0 01 0T 38553 MTBF 381 mr Micro EEPROM 1 2 Mic gemere 815573 component BFz1 238 4 Select a component then Edit Derating to open the Derating window for the component Each component category has a specific graph showing the nominal and worse case values vs temperature This window can remain open as you select other components Note that the voltage stress is 0 8 on this component While not over stressed it is above the nominal value as per the selected derating standard 122 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide IT Electronics Prediction Derating Derating A5 4613 Class A Parametic Curve r usse r 3 points Nominal 73 Worst Case I V Stress Ratio q 4 00 Roll Off Temperature Max Temperature 075 Selected Worse Case Baa component wv Stress Ratio e u m forse Case Nominal Selected Ambient Temperature Cancel 5 Lower the stress value to 0 41 on the Application tab of the component and you will see the blue dot reloca
104. Dialog OD File Add Edit Layout Settings Chart Window Help DSA DEX gt SPH Xxxx42409424c9h x ov Project Title Mew Project Mame MTProjeeb 0 Part Number PO LCM Circuit Ref Analyst EE Compiled By 5 Enter your project information by placing the cursor or clicking in the appropriate fields Title Maintain Tutorial Description Stand Alone Computer A Mame ABC Computer System o o Project Part Number Function Description LCN fo Circuit Ref nica Analyst Failure Aate o Compiled By Redundancy H Approved By Life Time hrs 24 Target Rate MTBF hrs Ho Unavailability 6 The information entered for a project is only for the project level The table below displays each field that is available for a project and what each field pertains to 228 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Circuit Ref Circuit Reference Description What the project is The following fields will display results only if a prediction system is part of the project This box will display the Project unavailability once the analysis has been run 7 From the Add Menu select Maintain System The Maintain system and project headers are added Add Edit Layout Settings Al MIL 217 System AU Bellcore System AL RDF System Ae 2998 System a Mechanical System I MainTain System oh Sparec ast System Y FMECA System fo RED System A Fault
105. ECCASATDTJGE Capacitor 100pF 1000 VDC 596 SLIGP High Voltage Ceramic Disk Kir Category ECCA3A Z1JGE Capacitor 120pF 10DDVDC 5 SLIGP High Voltage Ceramic Disk Kir Capacitor fa 4 ECCASATSTJGE Capacitor 150pF 1000VDC 4 595 SLIGP High Voltage Ceramic Disk Kir ECCA3A1 BS1JGE Capacitor 180pF 1000VDC 4 595 SL GP High Voltage Ceramic Disk Kir Search Strings B ECCA3AZZIJGE Capacitor 220pF 10DDVDC 4 596 SLIGP High Voltage Ceramic Disk Kir Fart 7 ECCASA21JGE Capacitor 270pF 1000VDC 4 595 SLIGP High voltage Ceramic Disk Kir 8 ECCA3A33 JGE Capacitor 33 pF 1000 DC 536 SLIGP High Woltage Ceramic Disk Kir L iescuintioni HEX DeC Capacitor 39pF 1000VDC 06 SLIGP High Woltage Ceramic Disk Kir Capacitor igh Voltage Ceramic Disk Kir igh Voltage Ceramic Disk Kir igh Voltage Ceramic Bick Kir igh Voltage Ceramic Disk Kir bh Voltage Ceramic Disk Kint gh voltage Ceramic Disk Kint Starts with 18 EccasAta0 B JGE Capacitor 18pF 1000vDC 4 58 SLIGP High Voltage Ceramic Disk Kint Contains Update Search i cm ECCASA220JGE Capacitor 22pF 1000VDC 596 SLIGP High Voltage Ceramic Disk Kin 18 ECCASAIO1KGE Capacitor 10DpF 100DVDC 4 1055 SL GP High Voltage Ceramic Disk Total count 163 49 ECCASA4TTKGE Capacitor 470pF 1000VDC 4 1096 SL GP High voltage Ceramic Disk Total count fitere 40 20 ECCN3A120JGE Capacitor 12pF 1000VDC 5 SLIGP High
106. ED POLYESTER 10nF Capacitor MOR FIXED CERAMIC CHIP Transformer TRANSFORMER Capacitor CAPACITOR FIXED AL ELECT 4700 Capacitor CAPACITOR FIXED SOLID TANT 4 7 Diode Low Frequency DIODE GLASS PACKAGE RBD FMECA Microprocessor Digi rami ire rg fT Window to MIL 217 Fault Tree For Help press F1 Blocks 5 Keon 5 4 NUM The Project Window Located in the upper left corner default location the project window shows the project hierarchy with systems listed by the type of analysis Cross tabs located on the edge of the project window allow you to select an active project when multiple projects are open The following items and their icons are shown in the Project window hierarchy tree Project File Header Shown with a filing cabinet icon Listing includes project information and sum of reliability data for all reliability prediction modules only mme Analysis Type Header Shown with a file cabinet drawer icon Systems are grouped by analysis type this zz header identifies the analysis type NEW System Files Shown with multiple pockets file folder icon Listing includes system information and sum Val ee of reliability data for the total system Chapter 3 ToolKit Basics 85 The System Window Located in the lower left corner default location the system windows shows the hierarchy of the system components included in the system selected in the Project window Cross ta
107. EM ToolKit s SpareCost Module calculates the requirements for replacement spares for operational systems and equipments It generates spares holding requirements and models the repair of defective items as defined in the Repstock and Optcost algorithms derived for the British Ministry of Defense The main driving forces behind the calculations are the failure rate and cost of replaceable items in a system together with an acceptable stock out risk Spares holdings for Sites first and second line maintenance by replacement are calculated using the Optcost method Base spares requirements third line maintenance supporting Sites and repair are handled by Repstock The SpareCost Module makes the following assumptions e The system is assumed to be serial in nature i e if any one item fails then the whole system ceases to function and a spare will be required e Detection and replacement of items at site is always possible provided a spare is available e The time to detect and replace a faulty item is assumed as insignificant The SpareCost Module provides e Optimization scale of spares at sites for minimum cost e Base supported period and repair lead time Site and Base Stock Out Risk Site and Base spare results and cost 240 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide 2 ITEM ToolKit amp SpareCost The SpareCost Analysis Module offers a diverse graphical user interface GUI in which all project and system data is entered This area is
108. F is a basic measure of reliability for repairable items It can be described as the passed time before a component assembly or system fails It is a commonly used variable in reliability and maintainability analyses MTBF can be calculated as the inverse of the failure rate for constant failure rate systems For example for a component with a failure rate of 2 failures per million hours the MTBF would be the inverse of that failure rate or MTBF 1 000 000 hours 2 failures 500 000 hours Although MTBF was designed for use with repairable items it is commonly used for both repairable and non repairable items 108 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Mean Time To Failure MTTF MTTF is a basic measure of reliability for non repairable systems It is the mean time expected to the first failure of a piece of equipment MTTF is a statistical value and is meant to be the mean over a long period of time and large number of units For constant failure rate systems MTTF is the inverse of the failure rate If failure rate is in failures million hours MTTF 1 000 000 Failure Rate for components with exponential distributions Mean Time To Repair MTTR Mean Time to Repair is defined as the total amount of time spent performing all corrective maintenance repairs divided by the total number of those repairs 2 Using ToolKit for Reliability Predictions ToolKit allows you to build reliability predictions based on Bellcore Mil 217 NSWC R
109. IES FMECA MIL STD 16294 IEC 61508 150 9000 Failure Mode Effects and Full version Reliability Black Diagram Reliability Black Diagram Demo Version Fault Tree Analysis FT Demo Version Event Tree Analysis ET Demo Version Markov Modelling MEY Demo Version RDF 2000 IEC 62380 TR 1 LITE C 80 810 French Telecom Standard Electror Full version 2996 China 2996 Electronics Demo Version Spares Scaling and Rangin Spares Scaling and Ranging Demo Version MainTain Maintainability MIL HDBE 472 Procedure v Demo Version e Click OK when finished 72 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide To Check How Manv Licenses Are Available e Click on Network Info A in the About ITEM ToolKit Dialog Box About ITEM ToolKit eo F N y i il ITEM ToolKit Version 8 0 01 Copyright 7 2011 ITEM Software Reliability analysis tools include MIL HDBK 217F Notice 2 Electronics Full version Bellcore Telcordia 5R 332 Issue 2 SR 332 Issue 1 TR 332 Issue 6 Electronics Dema Version NSS NSWwC DS LETO NSWwC 9B8 LE1 Mechanical Demo version FMEA FMECA MIL STD 16294 IEC 61508 150 9000 Failure Mode Effects and Full version Reliability Block Diagram Reliability Block Diagram Demo Version Fault Tree Analysis FTA Demo version Event Tree Analysis ET Demo version Markov Modelling MEY Demo Version RDF 2000 IEC 62380 TR 1 LITE C 80 810 French Telecom Standard E
110. It can aid in locating areas for potential reliability improvement Telcordia Bellcore The Telcordia module is based on the internationally recognized Telcordia Standard that calculates the reliability of electronic equipment The latest version of this document is the Reliability Prediction Procedure for Electronic Equipment SR 332 Telcordia reliability prediction has only one focus electronic equipment It can provide predictions at the component level system level or project level for COTS Commercial Off The Shelf Parts Telcordia utilizes three methods for predicting product reliability These are Method I Parts Count Method II Combines Method I predictions with laboratory data Method III Predictions based on field data NSWC The NSWC module uses a series of models for various categories of mechanical components to predict failure rates based on temperature stresses flow rates and various other parameters It provides models for various types of mechanical devices including springs bearings seals motors brakes and clutches NSWC is a relatively new standard and is currently the only one of its kind The NSWC Standard is a commonly used model for mechanical components Standard procedures for predicting the reliability of mechanical components sub systems and systems are defined in the Naval Surface Warfare Center Handbook of Reliability Prediction Procedures for Mechanical Equipment NSWC EC 62380 RDF 2000
111. Item Software W ITEM Toolkit m Audio Related Programs L RecordPad Sound Recorder 4 Demo Notification This is an evaluation version of ITEM Toolkit For technical or sales enquiries please contact ITEM Software in USA 714 935 2900 or ITEM Software in Europe 44 0 1489 885085 30 days left in the evaluation period Unlock by Email Unlock Online Unlock by Phone Continue e Selecting Unlock by Email opens the following dialog Unlock By Email Mama Email Phone Number Company Mane Customer ID User Code 1 239855521 User Code 2 3598961 Message een e Enter the required information and click Send An email will be sent to Item Software with your activation request Once you have received a reply containing your activation codes enter them in the Program Activation Dialog see Unlock by Phone Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit e Selecting Unlock Online opens the following dialog Online Activation License ID Password e Enter the required information and click OK e Selecting Unlock by Phone opens the following dialog Program Activation Dialog ITEM ToolKit User Code 1 281796922 ITEM Software in USA 714 935 2900 User Cade 2 5102663 in Europe 44 0 1489 885085 Company Mame ITEM Software USA Inc License ID Reg Key 1 Password Reg Kev 2 e Your system will generate User Code 1 and User Code 2 numbers The Use
112. Major RANTE Loss of Lie Seg C 4 081760 8 Seg w 9 999 SITE TE cll Lat g SULME Fire ag NOT Detected by the Fire Alarm DOCS NOT start Spinder Sytem DOES Major Damage and Loss of Life Seg Q 0 001 Seg w 9 999 Dites dici oye BOT Adit Once the Event Tree has been constructed the next step is the quantification of the event probabilities Each event representing a system or a function failure can be quantified using basic event quantification directly or linked to the top event or any other gate of a Fault Tree Other probabilistic models such as Predictions RBD or Markov models can also be used Upon evaluation these fault trees or basic events would be linked together to derive the conditional probability of each event or branch and the multiplication of these conditional probabilities for each scenario shall give the probability of occurrence of final consequences or the accident scenarios For further risk analysis each of the end state scenarios can be further investigated for respective cut sets Also scenarios ending in same or similar end states can be joined together to get a joint probabilistic result Weighting of the end scenarios in various categories such as financial environmental etc can help devise a complete category wise risk analysis 258 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Several Types of Analysis can be Conducted Using Event Trees Qualitative Analysis Include e The minimal cut sets of the even
113. Mean Time To Repair Mame Update Children Temperature Increment Base Failure Rate 38 Column Width Fixed Text Only we uer mmn The final step is to confirm the settings and click Finish It will take a moment for the Excel data to be imported into the MIL system within your Project Import Wizard File w Step 4 of 4 Pathname C Program FilesMEemtTaalkitPragramsVT DBYV S00 Example ITP mdb Import Options Look up Part ID In C Overwrite Existing Records Library Generate Log Append to Existing Records Project Adopt components of matched blacks Owenwrite Append to Existing Records Data import in progress Preview O __ ___ desertion Category Keyword 1 BK j 1 000000e 000 Block 1 E 3 If you have a library open during the import and the part numbers match ToolKit will lookup the component parameters in the library and place that information in the system 4 Blocks Components 4 Physical 4 lt lt Back Cancel 298 Item ToolKit Tutorial 10 If you wish to save your settings for future imports of this specific BOM click Yes Otherwise click No on the following dialog box Now you can go to your System in your Project and confirm the blocks components and the parameter values you just imported Alx E Block 1 Block 1 FRi20 26331518 MTBF23713121 5 im Capacitor 1 1 Cap 22 ut FA 0 0051 233671 TBF 1 951 84 4288 im Capacitor
114. New Column on the Event Tree diagram Allows the user to add an image component to the canvas Allows the user to add a text component to the canvas Allows the user to organize the components on the canvas Allows the user to transfer any Event Tree Diagram directly into MS Word Allows the user to perform the necessary calculations of the analysis Allows the user to stop the analysis or calculations currently being performed Displays a summary of the analysis Allows the user to create a header and footer for all Event Tree pages Allows the user to Fit the Event Tree diagram onto one page automatically Allows the user to undo the Fit to page previously carried out The Zoom Toolbar The Zoom Toolbar contains commands for zooming and panning the canvas s ES Q FH EB 4 Chapter 12 Event Tree 279 S EB S E Le 8 Name Ruler Control Properties Zoom Zoom to Fit Zoom to Selection Pan Shortcut Kevs Key Ctrl N Ctrl O Ctrl S Ctrl P Ctrl X Ctrl C Ctrl V Del Fl Function Description Turn the ruler of the canvas on or off Opens the properties window and allows the user to change the component properties Allows zoom in by selecting the area with the left mouse button and zoom out by clicking on the right mouse button Sets the magnification level of the canvas so that all components on the canvas are visible Sets the magnification level of the canvas s
115. O 2995 SpareCost Maint ain 4 Server License Information MII ANI of Network Licenses Available Licenses Maintenance Expiration Oct 23 2011 Oct 23 2011 OcE 23 2011 m j 51 52 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Setting Up the License Manager Once the licenses are activated the license manager needs to be set with the correct types of network connections ITEM ToolKit has two types of network connections available Network File Share Connections LAN WAN Connections NETWORK CLIENT 1 Local or installation path C Program Files tem Toolkit Programs SERVER Server or License Path STEPPEN Server Program Files tem Toolkit Programs IT_Local_License Local or installation path C Program Files tem Toolkit Programs The path is shared and accessible to the users Power user right NETWORK CLIENT 2 minimum Local or installation path C Program Files tem Toolkit Programs Server or License Path Server Program Files Item Toolkit Programs IT_Local_License TCP IP Connections Internet Connections NETWORK CLIENT 1 Local or installation path C Program Files tem Toolkit Programs Server IP Address 127 0 0 1 SERVER Server Port Number Local or installation path 10000 C Program Files tem Toolkit Programs IT_Local_License Port Number 10000 NETWORK CLIENT 2 Local or installation path C Program Files tem Toolkit Programs
116. OAS esne dl 304 Item ToolKit Tutorial Once the command is executed ToolKit will open and display any system in the Library System Window The layout of the workspace will look like as follows IT Item ToolKit C Documents and Settings Gemina Pake My Documents emoShieldDemoshield Version 6 CD ROM 800 Toolkit Defaults Examp mef ea File Add Edit Layout Settings Chart Window Help D amp Ba x amp vzw C Documents and SettingssGemina Documents and Settings Gem la x i A P cateoownotSelected dx x A o m p V Dea 2j o 3M DemLib MIL 217 1 FR 4 5949 ec 1 FR 4 594943 MTBF 21 E 2 1 1 FR 0 39492917 M B General EB Physical Application z E ad 1 2 FR 0 010189597 t E E 1 3 FR 0 34 MTBF 2 niis S 2 GE 1 4 FR 3 7317997e 5 gt 1 5 FR 7 0000002e 5 Description A DemLib BellCore 1 FI E a 1 6 FR 0 0025971753 Part Number a i J NSWC Systems FR 13227 z 1 7 FR 0 0006194397 Name E QN DemLib NSWC 1 FR n 1 8 FR 0 00091 49060 Circuit Ref e FMECA Systems an 3 FR 2 851 6686 MT acht D Notes E I DemLib FMECA 1 3 G8 1 NLFRI 0 009281432 Lin S tetanetus m mm a f RBD Systems ahs i Update Children V LCN M 1 Gm 1 13 FR 010444791 ees ES g DemLib RED 1 114 FR 0 0N 399823 4 j amp Eh Nem ih RAN H a 1 15 FR 0 042 424 ibrary system e Increment 115 FR 00793458 Absolute Replacement
117. Outlines an example FTA system 4 Describes the FTA Editor Screen Toolbars and Shortcut Keys 1 Introduction Item Software s Fault Tree module provides a wide variety of both qualitative and quantitative information about the system reliability and availability Fault Tree Analysis is a well established methodology that relies on solid theories such as Boolean logic and Probability Theory Boolean logic is used to reduce the Fault Tree structure into the combinations of events leading to failure of the system generally referred to as Minimal Cut Sets many of which are typically found Probability Theory is then used to determine probabilities that the system will fail during a particular mission or is unavailable at a particular point in time given the probability of the individual events Additionally probabilities are computed for individual Minimal Cut Sets forming the basis for their ranking by importance with respect to their reliability and safety impact Using this detailed information efforts to improve system safety and reliability can be highly focused and tailored to your individual system Possible design changes and other risk mitigating actions can be evaluated for their impact on safety and reliability allowing for a better informed decision making process and improved system reliability This type of analysis is especially useful when analyzing large and complex systems where manual methods of fault isolation and analysis
118. Overall Utilization 945 100 S No of Equipment per site 1 Beyond Economic Repair 9 10 m 1 2 CPU O0746 P Average Utilization 100 Stock out risk 39 5 mm 1 3 KEY 8021 Ste Ei mm 1 4 MOU 73320 5 T eo 2 a e e j Dialog EQ Grid f Diagram faf Chart Result For Help press F1 Blocks 1 Comps 4 NUM The SpareCost editor can be made visible by selecting the Dialog tab 1 Its main elements are the following Main Menu 2 Quick access to the main functions Default Toolbar 3 Quick access to the more frequently used menu options SpareCost Toolbar 4 Quick access to SpareCost editing functions SpareCost Dialog Window Controls 5 Quick access to Analyze Spelling and Undo Project Window 6 A hierarchical view of the project and systems System Window 7 A hierarchical view of the system blocks and Components Library Window 8 A hierarchical view of the components library Dialog Window 9 The area in which SpareCost can be edited Chapter 11 SpareCost 251 The Default Toolbar Immediately below the pull down options resides a group of buttons that form a Default Toolbar allowing the user to access directly some of the more frequently used menu options Default E3 D d Rl BAe Xo amp TM Name s 5 x 8 i9 se amp amp 8 New Open Save Cut Copy Paste Delete Item Undo Print About Help Description Opens a new project
119. Pausa aree PepueDuetuset Dese Hoe eL udaa a aqes Pere Decl ae ea Qua EHE A E Sean Es db euo EC ree Dun 177 MI EN TRODUCTION NR TET M S 177 22 BW TOOLKIT amp PAULTIBBEJANAEYSISS nen EE N a aren omis ape ae PLE ON II UT CDU PME CUL 178 S CRENXTINGOCPAUETOTREE PROJIECT 4 ote cece tne Saeko tha cda es aud MD ee LA LC A UL eine neat 179 4 FAULT TREE EDITOR SCREEN TOOLBAR AND SHORTCUT KEYS QUICK REFERENCE cce 195 MARKOV eer 203 TEN TRODUCTHON NETT 204 2 ITEM TOOLKIT amp MARKOV ANALY SIS sixties he oe Mu ER LUE T Me ai eT ae eae 205 3 CREATING A MARKOV PROIEC T iecit toit eiae tte e iei ISTIS On BEES EISE EIS auc asGstnaiseoumeatees 206 4 MARKOV EDITOR SCREEN TOOLBAR AND SHORTCUT KEYS QUICK REFERENCE cce 218 NDATNCE AUN 25erece essei oct eevazeseeueeeens seas eceeiuei Cep sues es eeuedu vas eva veces au eb ees auuct ee ee gau eu sa esa Eee uv E ave a euu a e edel ee ssa sea sd ced Yu ELM eov ENS 225 LINTRODU EZ NIC IRR REND NUNC ERECTA 225 2 EMIO Diy SIVE AIG occa o tor ecu r PE EAM LE T PLU 226 J CREATING AUNVAIN TAIN PROJECT uie erectus aceite tette tutes cei cos ee cp ac de ees 224 4 MAINTAIN EDITOR SCREEN TOOLBAR AND SHORTCUT KEYS QUICK REFERENCE eene 235 SPAREBCOST 55 EE A ice sciieodbes E e ood ee suiieoekesCeetos i eilleo
120. Power Output D With this new mode still selected click the Cause button to add a new cause E In the new Cause edit box type Burned Power Supply Fuse F Click the Cause button again to add another cause to the list E In the new Cause edit box type Power Grid Down F Click the Immediate Direct Effects button to add a new effect to the list G In the Immediate Effect edit box type No Output from Motherboard 1 H cause or an effect 147 NOTE To remove a failure mode highlight it in the Mode list and click the button Use the same procedure to remove a Information not accessible Unacceptable performance of Motherboard 1 RAMI Information not transferred Stored Microscopic damage to MM Incorrect processing correctly circuitry I i lfuncti f logi 5 cece ca ok Overheating Unacceptable performance of Motherboard 1 EE 1 EI P 1 1 Processor 1 Bm 1 1 1 Intermittent malfunction af logic process EB 1 2RAM 1 e m 1 2 1 Information nat accessible fil 1 2 2 Information nat transferred Stored correctly ze 1 3 Power Supply EE mj 1 31 No Power Output FMECA 148 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Using the Phrase Library Your system should include accurate descriptions of each object You can save time by adding long or frequently used descriptions to the phrase library then retrieving the descriptions when you define object properties Each project has a unique phrase libr
121. R FOR EXAMPLE C Program Files Mtem Toolkit Programs INSTALLED ON THE NETWORK SERVER MUST BE SHARED BETWEEN THE NETWORK SERVER AND CLIENT WORKSTATION m NETWORK CLIENT MUST HAVE FULL ACCESS RIGHTS TO THE PROGRAMS FOLDER FOR EXAMPLE C Program Files tem Toolkit Programs INSTALLED ON THE NETWORK SERVER Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit 41 Installing the License Manager The Install Wizard will guide you through simple steps for installing ITEM ToolKit Please complete the following steps Insert the ToolKit CD into your CD ROM drive If the Auto Run feature is not activated choose Run from the Start Menu The Run dialog box appears Type the name of a program Folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it For you vj L 9 jJ ewm grows In the Run dialog box type D setup replace the letter D with the correct letter for your CD ROM drive Click OK to activate the installation program If the Auto Run feature is activated the following screen appears Welcome to Item Software s interactive Product Demonstration CD ROM CUSTOMERS ae This disc will also provide you with information r1 about the company its products and services You can also install demonstrations of our SERIES C latest software products for evaluation purposes CONTACT US INSTALL OR UPGRADE Use the menu buttons on the left of the screen to navigate araund the demo CD ROM PDF FILES
122. STOMERS SERVICES CONTACT US PDF FILES INSTALL DEMO Select Install or Upgrade INSTALL OR UPGRADE Welcome to ltem Software s Interactive Product Demonsiration CD ROM This disc will also provide you with information about the company tt products and services You can also install demonstrations of aur latest software products for evaluation purposes Use the mene birttons on the left of the screen io navigate around the demo CD ROM To exit the demo al any time simply press the escape key on your keyboard Thank you for choosing ltem Software and we look forward to being of service to you in the near future litem Software 24 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide INSTALL PRODUCT HOME ITEM ToolKit ABOUT US Ferson 7 07 PRODUCTS for new insiallaious CUSTOMERS c x ToolKit Upgrade SERVICES If you have purchased d software produci Upzrade an existing copy fiom Hem Saftw re of ITEM ToolKit for 7x installations only CONTACT US PDF FILES please click a button an the rishi to install INSTALL DEMO or uparede the prFosmtm QRAS Version 2 0 0 QuantioHve Risk Assessment S sie Install Demo e Select ITEM ToolKit The installation wizard begins NOTE f the following window appears click Yes to allow the process to uninstall the existing installation and then restart the installation process ITEM ToolKit Existing Installation An existing in
123. Server IP Address 127 0 0 1 Server Port Number 10000 Server path IP Address and Server Port Number should be obtained from your Network Administrator Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit Network File Share Connections Setup e From the Start Menu select Programs Item Software ITEM ToolKit License Manager fg Item Software ld m Audio Related Programs L RerardPad Sound Recorder The License Manager Dialog box appears Item ToolKit License Manager IT License Server IT License Client Help Computer Info User Name imwa Ps Computer Name GRAMAMQIT o a a a a a aeaea IP Address mr em oc e Item ToolKit License Manager elie setae IT License Client Help License information License Activation Server configuration SOP aor as IP Address i Cancel e The license setup window opens Verify that Network Server is selected A Select Network file share B Verify the License path C If the path is incorrect click on Browse D and select the folder where the license keys are located 53 54 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Select Service E for execution type and click on Start Server Service F NOTE Selecting Thread for the Server execution type is for troubleshooting purposes only and will stop the service when exiting the license manager TCP IP License setup Item Toolkit license setup d z z circus Workstation License co
124. Status dialog box appears and displays the progress of the installation ITEM ToolKit Version 8 0 0 Setup Status Item Toolkit Setup is performing the requested operations Installing I a tall Yell Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit 29 When the InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box appears click Finish ITEM ToolKit Version 8 0 0 Setup Complete Setup has now finished installing ITEM Toolkit After clicking Finish please wait a Few moments until the blue screen disappears before continuing 30 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Activating the Software Once the software is installed it must be activated If the software is not activated only the demonstration mode features will be available To activate ToolKit From the Start Menu select Programs gt Item Software gt ITEM ToolKit or click on the ITEM ToolKit icon in your desktop Success e The Success dialog box appears Click OK The Demo Notification dialog box appears Select one of the unlock options 4 Demo Notification This is an evaluation version of ITEM Toolkit For technical or sales enquiries please contact ITEM Software in USA 714 935 2900 or ITEM Software in Europe 44 0 1489 885085 visit ITEM Software Website 30 days left in the evaluation period Unlock by Email Unlock Online Unlock by Phone Continue e Selecting Unlock Online opens the following dialog Online Ac
125. TBFz37 13121 5 E 1 1 FE 0 0051233571 MTBF21 38518414848 mm 1 2 FE O 24455507 MTBF24087387 3 mm 1 3 FR20 n8527 5015 MTBFz1 1725 54848 mm 1 4 FRED 01045725 MTBF 235b527344 MIL 247 2 Goto File Export to open the Export Wizard 3 The first step of the Wizard is indicating the source of the exported data which is an internally created Access database containing your data Click Next to continue 300 Item ToolKit Tutorial Export Wizard Step 1 af 4 Pathname C Program FilesiEemtToolkit lPragramsMT DBYv 8O00 Example ITP mdb Export Wizard Show Preview W x Back On this window you select the tables from within ToolKit you wish to have exported If you wish all tables click the triple arrow button If you want only selected tables select the table then click the double arrow button to move it to the right Click Next when finished 4 Export Wizard Step 2 E Input Table Output Table MIL 217 Application Parameters MIL 217 Blocks and Components MIL 217 Physical Parameters MIL 217 Pi Factors MIL 217 System Use this button to select all tables for export Export Wizard Show Preview v zx Back Cancel In this step you select the fields from the tables you selected in the previous step that you want to have exported Select the table and then use either the double or triple arrow buttons to select the fields Click Next when done 5 Chapter 14 Import Export 30
126. Tree System f Event Tree Ta Markow System HJA Maintain Systems Chapter 10 MainTain 229 In the System Window click the Maintain header The system properties appear in the Dialog tab 9 Inthe Dialog tab enter your system information by placing the cursor or clicking in the appropriate fields oo Iain T ain System Title ABE Computer System Description Stand alone Computer Mame Maintain Tutorial Part Number Function Description LEN Circuit Ref Mates Analyst Approved By Compiled By NOE OE F 10 The table below describes what could be entered and what each field and block of fields pertains to Function Description Purpose Description of this system Notes Any other pertinent information about this system 11 Move the mouse to the System Window in the bottom left of the ToolKit screen and click the left mouse button to make this the active window 12 From the Add Menu select Replaceable Item Add Edit Layout Settings E Black WReplaceable Item 230 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide 13 Move the mouse cursor to the System Window The mouse cursor changes to add mode 14 Click the system header The Replaceable Item is added and its properties appear in the Dialog tab 15 Click the system header A three more times to add three more Replaceable Items Your System Window should be similar to the example below 16 Click on the End Add Mode B toolbar ico
127. Use it throughout the project to stay on development schedules and remain in compliance with client requirement Use it consistently to maximize productivity and ensure ongoing success Mission critical operations depend on the continuing function of systems but all systems are affected by time use and obsolescence These factors can seriously affect end users timelines and productivity 226 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide When you design or develop a product Maintain helps you to e Identify areas with potential maintainability problems e Make repair replace and design decisions e Make early assessment of downtime e Make early assessment of personnel numbers e Plan for necessary tools and test equipment e Easily identify Replaceable Items RIs e Save and export essential data for use in other RAMS analyses 2 ITEM ToolKit amp MainTain Maintain provides built in elemental maintenance action maintenance philosophy and fault isolation You can save common maintenance tasks to a library for repetitive use Maintain Calculates the Following for Component or Group of Components e Total Mean Time To Repair Total MTTR e Mean Time To Repair per Replaceable Items MTTR e Mean Man Hour MMH e Mean Man Hour per Repair MMH R e Mean Man Hour per Maintenance Action MMH MA e Mean Man Hour per Operating Hours Action MMH OH e Total Failure Rate of all Replaceable Items in a Group F Rate e Average number of Replace
128. a Spare Cost Spares Scaling and Ranging System Y FMECA Add a Failure Modes Effects and Criticality Analysis FMECA System i RBD Add a Reliability Block Diagram RBD System A Fault Tree Add a Fault Tree Analysis FTA System f Event Tree Add an Event Tree Analysis ETA System EAT Markov Add a Markov Modeling System Ihe Canvas Toolbar The Canvas Toolbar contains commands that affect the appearance and behavior of the canvas Tool Name Description x Undo Undo the last command executed on the canvas ol Redo Redo the last undo that was performed i Toggle Grid Turn display of the grid on and off 23 Snap to Grid Toggle the snap to grid feature on and off Bi Toggle Page Bounds Turn display of page boundaries on and off 278 The Event Tree Toolbar ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide The Event Tree Toolbar is used to create and control Event Tree Analysis through the commands it contains A S G c EE amp Be cB Tool TINTA A gt S Be il Name Select Success Branch Failure Branch Null Branch Insert Column Image Text Auto Arrange Transfer to MS Word Start ETA Analysis Abort ETA Analysis Summary Header Footer Fit to Page Reset Fit to Page Description Cancels add mode Creates a Success Branch symbol on the Event Tree diagram Creates a Failure Branch symbol on the Event Tree diagram Creates a Null Branch symbol on the Event Tree diagram Insert a
129. able Items contained in a fault isolation result S Avg e Average Preparation Time Tp e Average Fault Isolation Time Tfi e Average Disassembly Time Td e Average Interchange Time T1 e Average Reassembly Time Tr e Average Alignment Time Ta e Average Checkout Time Tc e Average Start up Time Tst ITEM ToolKit s graphical user interface uses standard Windows dialogs menus toolbars and controls The Multi Document Interface MDI architecture allows you to simultaneously display multiple projects systems and data views in separate viewing areas in the ToolKit workspace The interface allows you to easily e Transfer data between different systems and projects e Cut copy and paste data e Drag and drop objects within and between projects e Customize the workspace toolbar e Customize Report Generator e Access online help e Import Export from or to Jet Database Excel or Text e Plot and graph Chapter 10 MainTain 227 3 Creating a Maintain Project To demonstrate ToolKit s maintainability features we ll create an example based on a simple desktop computer system Click on the New Project icon A on the default toolbar or select New Project from the File menu Activate your project by clicking on the Project tab B or in the Project window Select the Dialog tab from the bottom of the Viewing Option window The Project Dialog Box will be displayed BR WN eR IT Item ToolKit Project
130. allation Installing the License Manager Software Activating and Verifying the Licenses Setting Up the License Manager 40 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide What Is License Server Installation License Server Installation is designed to provide access to the License Key through a network After installing the License Manager software on the Network Server the Network Client installation must be performed on the client workstation Only the License Manager will be installed on the server ITEM ToolKit will not be installed and cannot be run on the server This option is intended for a single user or multiple users that are required to have the Software Licenses installed on a shared license server The number of users accessing the software will be limited to the number of licenses purchased NETWORK CLIENT 1 Full ITEM ToolKit Installation LICENSE SERVER Path to the Network Licenses License Manager installation only NETWORK CLIENT 2 Network Licenses Full ITEM ToolKit Installation 4 Path to the Network Licenses NOTE The following must be noted when installing the software on a network server THE INSTALLATION MUST BE PHYSICALLY PERFORMED AT THE DESIGNATED NETWORK SERVER AND CANNOT BE DONE FROM A REMOTE WORKSTATION THE LICENSE MANAGER MUST BE INSTALLED ON THE SERVER BEFORE IT CAN BE INSTALLED ON A NETWORK CLIENT SERVER INSTALLATION REQUIRES FULL ADMINISTRATIVE RIGHTS THE PROGRAM INSTALLATION FOLDE
131. alog tab from the viewing window C Select a block from the systems window D The Dialog view will display all parameters for the selected block Edit the required fields The following view is displayed in Dialog View in the Block tab DUUM m E Block Info EB Mode Info E Detectabiliby E Diagnostic Gowerage SFF Block Mame ID fo Description Part Number CA S tN FL Quantity fo Parent Marnie ID fo No of Modes D STINET Circuit Ref NEM Description Op Time Factor 1 Makes Mission Phase Name ID Unique Reference Identifier for the Block Block Part Number 140 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Description of the Mission Phase Any other notes or pertinent information The following view is displayed in Dialog View in the Mode tab Ed Black Info E Mode Info H3 Detectabiliby H3 Diagnostic Coverage SFF Selected EE Erroneous Input Increased FD CP Remarks aj Failure Modes Tuentib Wade i jaca Asgeriioneors i 1 7 m Erroneous Input Increased H N Incorrect Meter Reading Chapter 6 FMECA 141 Adding and Editing Components A FMECA component may represent any mechanical or electronic device FMECA components differ from FMECA blocks in that you may enter a failure rate for components which the program then divides between the components failure modes according to their apportionment percentage Components can be added to the FMECA system hierarchy tree by
132. am Result For Help press F1 Blocks 1 Comps 4 NUM 248 Viewing Results To view the project results ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide 1 Click the system header A in the System Window IT Item ToolKit Project Result a File Add Edit Layout Settings Chart Window Help spo Oe ttexnon amp uYM ixi Eid Summary View N H PROJECT IT Project Prediction Totals FR EE Parameter Value f Maintain Systems Base Total Equipment 1 HA SpareCost Systems Base Util 96 100 Qa SP FR 6432 3 Base Support Period months 24 Base Repair Lead Time Days 5 5 _ Base Beyond Econ Repair Rate 10 5 Base Target S O R 5 Total Number 23 g jPase Spare Results Total Cost x 1000 6 845 9 Site No of Equip Fitted At Site 1 site Unsupported Period Days 162 Site Util 100 op ons Target 5 Stock Out Risk 96 pre 4 8814075 i Number 55 auge Spare Resuts aagi 42 535 z Base Spare Results z Description Qty Cost F Rate fpmh Bkup Stock Repl Stock Total Stock 19 VGA Monitor 5 355 277 8 1 4 5 4 Pentium 4 CPU 1 5Ghz 5 950 198 4 1 3 4 3 m Standard Keyboard 5 25 347 2 1 5 5 4 amp Serial Mouse 5 15 453 1 7 8 2 E g Site Spare Results Description Qty Cost F Rate fpmh Exp No Of Fails No Of Spares Actual amp 19 YGA Monitor 5 355 277 8 6 0671515 12 0 96097 sij Pentium 4 CPU 1 5Ghz 5 950 198 4 4 333056 8 3 30171 Standard Keybo
133. an initiating event such as a component failure increase in temperature pressure or a release of a hazardous substance The consequences of the event are followed through a series of possible paths Each path is assigned a probability of occurrence and the probability of the various possible outcomes can be calculated Event Tree Analysis Characteristics e Models the range of possible accidents resulting from an initiating event or category of initiating events e A risk assessment technique that effectively accounts for timing dependence and domino effects among various accident contributors that are cumbersome to model in fault trees e Performed primarily by an individual working with subject matter experts through interviews and field inspections e Ananalysis technique that generates the following Qualitative descriptions of potential problems as combinations of events producing various types of problems range of outcomes from initiating events 256 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Quantitative estimates of event frequencies or likelihoods and relative importance of various failure sequences and contributing events ists of recommendations for reducing risks Quantitative evaluations of recommendation effectiveness Event Tree Analysis Process e Define the system or area of interest Specify and clearly define the boundaries of the system or area for which event tree analyses will be performed e Identify the initiating
134. analysis has been run MTBF Mean Time Between Failures for the project Chapter 7 RBD 161 5 Select the Add menu from the menu toolbar by clicking on it Add Edit Layout Settings AM MIL 217 System Au Bellcore System AL RDF System AL 2998 System ru Mechanical Systern I Main Tain System IE PROJECT IT Project Prediction Totals FR 0 4 SpareCost System Hie RED Systems Y FMECA System dE HBD U JEREC System a Fault Tree System f Event Tree EA Markov Svstem 6 Select and click on the RBD System option 7 The project will display as a RBD System in the project window and the applicable system data will display in the system window 8 From the Project window select the RBD System by clicking on it The RBD System dialog box will be displayed r RBD System Title Description P Name RBD 1 Part Number zl LEN Pun l m escription Circuit Ref El Analyst Compiled Bv Notes Approved By Unavailability Cut Off Cut Off Value o 0001 Failure Rate o Failure Frequency o r Sort Cut Sets C Ott Bureaus noe cme ee o By Unavailability C By Order Conditional Failure Intensity o Max Sorted Sets 500 Mean Time Between Failures o Total Down Time o r Order Cut Off i Cut Off Value E Mean Time To Repair o m Miscellaneous biam E o Unavailabilty o Use Max Risk Dormant Model dd r Q
135. and nodes Fault Tree Window or canvas 7 The area in which the Fault Tree can be graphically edited 196 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide The Default Toolbar Immediately below the pull down options resides a group of buttons that form a Default Toolbar allowing the user to access directly some of the more frequently used menu options Defaulk aed Bex Oo amp YN Tool Name Description New Opens a new project au Open an existing document The ToolKit displays the Open dialog box in which you can L gt Open MA locate and open the desired file M Save the active document or template with its current name If you have not named the document the ToolKit displays the Save As dialog box Cut Remove selected data from the document and stores it on the clipboard Copy Copy the selection to the clipboard i Paste Paste the contents of the clipboard at the insertion point Ps Delete Item Delete the selection kJ Undo Reverse the last editing Note You cannot undo some actions Print Print the active document 3 About Open the About ITEM ToolKit Window R Help Open the ITEM ToolKit On line Help The Fault Tree Dialog Windows Controls The Fault Tree Dialog Window Contains the following Controls o fm v Tool Name Description Kj Undo Changes Cancels the latest operation mi Analyse Run the Analysis of the system V Check Spelling Check the Spelling of the selected Text Chapter 8 Fault T
136. antity Moo Analyst FO Cost 355 Spareable Item v In Range Failure Rate Source v Site Prediction Jw Base Manual 22 The following table describes what could be entered and what each field and block of fields pertains to Description Component Part Number A Unique Reference Identifier Circuit Reference or Reference designator of the Component LCN Logistic Control Number Internal reference number defined by the user Component failure rate Can be edited only if the block is spareable Number of Component Can be edited only if the Component is spareable Hotes re Cost of the Component Can be edited only if the Component is spareable Spareable or Non Spareable selection Select Site Base or both depending where this item will be used or stocked Additional information to describe the Component Any other pertinent information on the Component Analyst Person performing the Analysis Failure Rate Select the source of the Failure Rate Manually entered or coming from a transferred and linked source prediction Chapter 11 SpareCost 247 23 Enter data for the remaining components as follows Qty MON 90034 19 VGA Monitor rs 277 8 355 CPU 00746 Pentium 4 CPU 1 5Ghz 5 198 4 950 KEY 8021 Standard Keyboard Co o S 347 2 25 MoUmsE Serial Mouse 5 4 ss 24 When all components are edited go back to the system by clicking on the system header A 25 Edit the system parameters as follows
137. ar in the Dialog tab D From the Add Menu B select Component Add Edit Layout Settings E Black Component Click the Block four times C Four Components are added E and their properties appear in the Dialog tab D Click on the End Add Mode F toolbar icon to return the cursor to the normal mode Select the Block under the system header C and fill in the data as shown below Block Part Number Site 1 Description Site 1 Command Post Shelter A Name Circuit Ref Notes A LCN Failure Rate x Quantity Analyst FO Cost Poo Spareable Item T In Range Failure Rate Source v Site C Prediction Base Manual 20 The following table describes what could be entered and what each field and block of fields pertains to 246 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide SS Item Spareable or Non Spareable selection Select Site Base or both depending where this item will be used or stocked Additional information to describe the block Any other pertinent information on the Block Person Performing the Analysis Select the source of the Failure Rate Manually entered or coming from a transferred and linked Failure Rate source pedei Select the First Component under the Block and fill in the data as shown below Component Part Number MON 90034 Description 18 VG Monitor M ame ft 77 Circuit Ref O O LEN 544 Failure Hate Fea zi Qu
138. ard 5 25 347 2 7 5828481 15 0 50961 Serial Mouse 5 15 463 10 11192 20 0 18093 gt Dialog Grid g Diagram Chart Result For Help press F1 Blocks 1 Comps 4 NUM 3 Click on the Go Icon C and the system results will be displayed Component Click on the Result tab B at the bottom of the ITEM ToolKit screen to display the results Click on the Components D in the System Window to display the following detailed results for the selected _ Name 1 1 1 PRET RE PT EET RT ER PEETER PIET PETITIA TEITI TEE ETT TEN RET TERES Base Spare Results Description Qty Cost F Rate fpmh Bkup Stock Repl Stock Total Stock Actual SOR 19 YGA Monitors 355 277 8 1 7 5 4 5459 ETA Ee EEEE CARPE PIEPER TEET OEE ITEE ETET RET SERRE PEE IET PEREP EIE FTT TEE ET CAPITE ERE EET ree I OIE EI TEPIEN een EE Ea EP rE ET TE ree Er TE TET RTT RE PP TET PREP TERE TET ETT TR TERETE TERETE ET PEN D Site Spare Results Description Qty Cost F Rate fpmh Exp No Of Fails No Of Spares Actual SOR 19 VGAMonitar5 355 0 961 Name 1 1 1 PEPER EET PEPPER TE EE ETEA PIE EEE TE AE ETE ET Chapter 11 SpareCost 249 Understanding Analysis Results The following is a brief description of all the fields SUMMARY VIEW Base Total Equipment Number of equipments expected to be in service and supported from base Base Util Base Support Period Months Base Repair Lead Time days Base Beyond Econ Repair 96 B
139. are not viable 178 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide A Fault Tree is a graphical representation of events in a hierarchical tree like structure It is used to determine various combinations of hardware software and human error failures that could result in a specified risk or system failure System failures are often referred to as top events A deductive analysis using a Fault Tree begins with a general conclusion or hazard which is displayed at the top of a hierarchical tree This deductive analysis 1s the final event in a sequence of events for which the Fault Tree is used to determine if a failure will occur or alternatively can be used to stop the failure from occurring The remainder of the Fault Tree represents parallel and sequential events that potentially could cause the conclusion or hazard to occur and the probability of this conclusion This is often described as a top down approach Fault Trees are composed of events and logical event connectors OR gates AND gates etc Each event node s sub events or children are the necessary pre conditions that could cause this event to occur These conditions can be combined in any number of ways using logical gates Events in a Fault Tree are continually expanded until basic events are created for which you can assign a probability The top level event must be described precisely Defining the top event too broadly leads to an open ended tree showing no specific cause or causes for fa
140. area is the foundation on which you build your projects The workspace area consists of menus toolbars and project and system windows The Fault Tree workspace area features a Multiple Document Interface MDI which allows you to e Choose which windows to display and move and resize all open windows e Open and create multiple Fault Tree projects at the same time in order to compare analysis results e Drag and drop gate and event components between projects This feature allows you to quickly create a new project by reusing components from other projects 3 Creating a Fault Tree Project To demonstrate ToolKit s Fault Tree features we ll create an example Fault Tree project based on the following Consider two switches in series as shown bellow The points A and B are points on the wire Wire failures would be ignored gt ele e e A B Creating a Fault tree system consists of Constructing the system Adding Gates Adding Events and editing their Failure models Performing analysis 180 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Constructing the system To construct a Fault Tree System Click on the New Project icon A on the default toolbar or select New Project from the File menu Activate your project by clicking on the Project tab B or in the Project window Select the Dialog tab from the bottom of the Viewing Option window The Project Dialog Box will be displayed BR WN IT Item ToolKit P
141. ary When you begin a new project the phrase library is empty You populate the library by adding phrases or by importing phrases from an external file Adding a Phrase There are two ways to add phrases to the phrase library To enter a phrase and add it to the library 1 Select a Block Component in the System Window Type a description in any field in the Dialog tab 3 Click Save Phrase The description is added to the phrase table Analysis Chart Window Help 2 xl pm TRAIS FMECA ian totals FR Save Phrase E Block Info ES Mode Info E Detectahiliby Selected FMECA 0 34 pp To enter a phrase in the library without adding it to a field Select a Block Component in the System Window 2 From the Edit Menu select Phrase Library 3 The Phrase Library dialog box appears Phrase Library Category Description Chapter 6 FMECA 149 TW Phrase ACCUMULATOR HYDRAULIC ACCUMULATOR HYDRALILTCIPMELIMATIC ACTUATOR SOLENOID SLPHS NUMERIC DISPLAY ALPHA MUPMERTC DISPLAY NOG LOGIC CHIPS ALPHA MUPMERTC DISPLAY WITH LOGIC CHIPS ANTENNA ATTENUATOR GENERAL PURPOSE ATTENUATOR MICROWAVE ALE MECHANICAL Arcing BATTERIES RECHARGEABLE LEAD ACID BATTERY BATTERY LITHIUM BEARING BEARINGS BLOWER BLOWER FAM BLOWER FAN BLOWER FAN AXIAL ere Ee eee aN LT 4 In the text box type the phrase you want to add D 5 Click Spell to
142. ase Target SOR 96 Base Spare Results Site No of Equip Fitted at Site Site Unsupported Period Days Site Util 96 Site Stock Out Risk 46 Site Spare Results Total number of Spare and Total Cost in thousands at the Site Bkup Stock Number of equipments in the Back up Stock Repl Stock Replacement Stock Total Stock Total number of equipments in Stock Actual SOR Actual Stock Out Risk at the Base SITE SPARE RESULTS Name Name of the equipment Description Description of the equipment Actual SOR Actual Stock Out Risk at the Site 250 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide 4 SpareCost Editor Screen Toolbar and Shortcut Keys Quick Reference The SpareCost Editor Screen a File Add Edit Layout Settings art Window Help DH exo Stwv bf wo IT Item Toolkit roject Dialog x 3 7 xl dius Oo Bl EA SpareCost l Maintain Systems SpareCost System SpareCost Systems Eri ot ille SpareCost Tutorial Description Support and Cost For 1 Command Post Shelter 44 sP1 FR 6432 Ie gor ve amp Mame SP 1 z Part Number Function ci Description z LEN F E Circuit Ref Shelter 26 Notes o i nr amp Analyst 9 Approved By Compiled By 9 Base Spares Repair Lead Time Days 5 Site Spares Replenishment Period Months 24 Stock out risk 5 Total Number Fitted 1 Unsupported Period Days 152
143. ated by the editor s ability to hierarchically construct Markov models i e break down a higher level state into lower level states on a separate page similar to the use of transfer gates in Fault Tree modeling Both continuous and discrete transitions can be introduced into the model Continuous transitions are those representing events that can take place at any time within a given time interval whereas discrete transitions take place at a specified point in time For this purpose individual transitions belong to a transition group consisting of all the transitions applicable to a given time interval or taking place at a given point in time Between intervals the rate at which given transitions take place may be changed providing a powerful scheme for phased mission Markov Models Another strong feature of ToolKit s Markov Module is its capability to define state groups State groups are groups of states within the model for which the user wants to obtain combined statistics such as total time spent in any of the states or number of transitions in or our out of the group One group that is defined by default is the Unavailable group Any time spent in a state that is marked by the user as belonging to this group is considered to be system downtime which is taken into account when computing reliability and availability measures Once the definition of the model is complete the user indicates which statistics should be computed beyond the
144. atedly on the screen Click on the state you wish to select on the Markov and then click on this symbol to display the connection line s that is are leaving the selected figure and connecting to the next set of connected states The connection line will flash repeatedly on the screen Click on the state you wish to select on the Markov and then click on this symbol to display all the connection line s to the other figures the selected state is are connected to The connection line will flash repeatedly on the screen Click on this symbol to display the states connected from leaving the selected state The connected states will flash repeatedly on the screen Click on this symbol to display the states connected to entering the selected state The connected states will flash repeatedly on the screen Click on this symbol to display all states that are logically connected within the Markov Only connected State symbols will flash on the screen Function Open a new project Open an existing document Displays the Open dialog box in which you can locate and open the desired file Save the active project with its current name If you have not named the project the Save As dialog box will open Print the Active View Removes selected data from the document and stores it on the clipboard Copy the selection to the clipboard Paste the contents of the clipboard at the insertion point Paste the contents of the clipboar
145. ation Static Maintenance Preparation m Tasks Add Delete al Add To Library Get From Library L elemen pesti rime twin Task eaters Mo 1 e EN P S 3 You have just allocated how you think the failures will be fixed for the selected RI Eighty percent of the time the Power Supply will be fixed by replacing the Computer P S and 20 of the time by replacing the Controller P S 4 To complete the Failure Allocation you should allocate percentages for each maintenance element for each RI in the system Viewing Results To view the project results Chapter 10 MainTain 233 Click the system header I in the System Window IT Item ToolKit Project Result agg File Add Edit Layout Settings Chart Window Help DH X859xo8 W9 hfmw o TE PROJECT T Project Prediction Totals FF Maintain Systems JB wr 1 4 Btyz1 N FRz0 MT For Help press F1 zi Dialog 8 Grid E Diagram ia Chart Result E Summary View Parameter Value Total MTTR Min 21 7099 MMH Hour 0 2778 Lay MMH Repair Hour 0 292 E MainTain Summary Results RiGroup Name Quantity F Rate fpmh Code Savg Tp TA Td Ti Tr Ta Tc A Group 1 1 22 52 B 18 1670995 00 00 00 O0 00 D afi Replacement Items Name Failure Rate Quantity RI MTTR MMH MMH Repair Group Name NxFailure Rz ieii 0 8 1 Y 10 0 0833 0 0833 Group 1 0B A Y B 46 Y 3
146. atons CUSTOMERS ToolKit Upgrade SERVICES If you have purchased a software product Upsrade an existing copy from Item 5aftware of ITEM ToolKit ee Ei m ee E for 7x installations only PDF FILES eS piegse CHICK a Hutto on the mohi to insiall INSTALL DEMO _ or upgrade the program CONTACT US Version 2 0 8 OuanticHve Risk Assessment Spsteni Install Demo e Select ITEM ToolKit The installation wizard begins NOTE f ihe following window appears click Yes to allow the process to uninstall the existing installation and then restart the installation process ITEM ToolKit Existing Installation An existing installation has been detected on your system This must be removed before a new version can be installed Once removed run Setup again to install Ehe new version Remove Ehe existing installation Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit 13 ITEM ToolKit Version 8 0 0 ITEM ToolKit Verzion 8 0 0 The InstallShield Wizard wall install ITEM Toolkit on pour computer Please close all other open applications before continuing and then click next Cancel Click Next and the following Setup Type dialog box appears ITEM ToolKit Version 2 0 0 Setup Type Choose the setup type that best suits pour needs Click the type of installation you require License Server Description Network Client This option installs ITEM Toolkit Network Server on a Standalone computer Standalone
147. ator B1 Fire Starts in the t S Lated Damage Viet People Success B2 Fire is Dete Den ord Leen i ite m Success B5 Fire Ala Siow Mel e Success BS3 Spi Wet SF Failure B10 Spri P Failure BE Fire Alarm Success B11 5 T Failure B1 2 Sp Failure B3 Fire is NOT D 4 2 Failure RA Fire Al fut I ia Dialog iH Grid f Event Tree la For Help press F1 Columns 4 Branches 11 Chapter 12 Event Tree 267 Double Click on the Consequence Column Header B or click on Edit C then on Consequences The Consequences Parameters window appears D Click on Safety E and then on Edit F and select Add Consequences Repeat Add Consequences to have a total of 4 consequences Soe a Consequences Consequence Category Name Safety Description Safety Related Consequences such as risk to injuries or los Notes Minimum Damage Damage No Loss of Life 2 Limited Damage VVet People 7 Major Damage and Loss of Life 90 Core Cooled 1 Slow Melt g Melt 90 Damage No Loss of Life 2 268 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide 4 Consequences Consequence Category Mirirntim Damage Damage No Loss of Life Description Safety Related Consequences such as risk to injuries or lo Limited Damage Wet Pe Major Damage and Loss Mates Li 1 Minimum Damage Damage Mao Loss of Life 2 Limited Damage fwet People T Major Damage and Loss of Lite SU iJe C
148. bar allowing the user to directly access some of the more frequently used and standard windows type menu options Save current project or Undo library file Delete Help P Open an existing project aste About or library file Copy Create a new project or n TY library Yo s ess Sw 2 Both the contents of the menus on the menu bar and the toolbar ea hdi iia according to which analysis application is currently in use The purpose of each button in the toolbar can be displayed in the form of a tool tip that appears alongside the button when the cursor is placed over the button Project Toolbar The Project Toolbar displays all available systems analysis modules and consists of the following icons Ao A AD A dB 9 OL A i S Mil 217 Prediction Module Telcordia Bellcore Prediction Module IEC 62380 RDF 2000 French Prediction Module 299B Chinese Prediction Module NSWC Mechanical Prediction Module Maintain Module SpareCost Module Failure Modes Effect and Criticality Analysis Module Reliability Block Diagram RBD Analysis Module Fault Tree Analysis Module Event Tree Analysis Module Markov Analysis Module This Toolbar is used to create a new analysis system in the Project window 98 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide NOTE The selected module will only be fully functional if you have purchased a license for that module and it is activated If a license has not been purchased ToolKit will revert to the demo version
149. blity Cc Oma i gi Pekre Frequency W 9 55411 e EES neagetegerwe sno a BZ his of Cue Cats i A taln Meo Cun Sets 2 Bid Ligen Ma L Fi E Hem Dom D E E A Even E Vesehr Barber amp reschan Lec 0000 lFweir 5 rb 0 1 FIER Laiya i HE L une son L Wat f H DLE EEP 4 0975 709e 03 ALARM STARTS DUOC wr S THATS OEL ALARM STARTS I DOJN 4 fra Tj L3 SPUWINKLER STARTS i DUOC j THATS 1 3 1 FIRE OOM ERLER SE ARTS GOL eee 3 4975 7098 07 FRE DETECTED D CELER c n 14505144 Erek n 13 alabi Frequency CU IEEE HE mo 1 0 0014919776 8 998 938 ALARM STARTS x FRE FRE DETECTED SPRL LOOT aaa D v ePLER ALARH STARTS JFIRE IRE DETECTED SPRL rae OU Sica AARM STARTS c HE GEILE FRE onl Understanding Analysis Results Unavailability Q Represents the probability that the component or system is unavailable at any given time Q equals the probability that the system is unavailable Failure Frequency W This is the term used by the system to represent the unconditional failure intensity The unconditional failure intensity is the probability that the system or component fails per unit time given that it was working correctly at time zero W is equal to the number of expected system failures No of Cut Sets Represents a group of events that will cause system failure if and when they occur together Chapter 12 Event Tree 273 Importance F Vesely The F Vesely Fussell Vesely im
150. bs located on the edge of this window indicate the type of analysis module that is active in bold A along with other recently used analysis modules The following items and their icons are shown in the System window hierarchy tree when using the prediction and FMECA modules RBD Markov Event Tree and Fault Tree use additional items and icons in the hierarchy tree due to the different nature of the systems i System Header Shown with a multiple pockets file folder icon Listing includes system information and gi sum of reliability data for the total system System Block Shown with a single file folder icon Listing includes sum of reliability data for all blocks ia and components attached to this block Linked Block Shown with a single open file folder icon with a green arrow pointing to it This is a special block that is a mirror image or direct copy of another block and its attached components The Linked Block automatically updates when data is changed for the block to which it is linked The Linked Block displays the same data as standard system Block Used with reliability prediction modules only Component Shown with a blue box icon Listing indicates a single component and its data lowest level of the hierarchy tree in the prediction systems FMECA Component When using a FMECA system the component blue box icon becomes a a blue file folder icon FMECA Failure Mode Shown with a red box icon Indicates a fa
151. ce 194 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide How to Transfer Fault Tree Data to Microsoft Word A powerful export facility is provided with the Fault Tree module that will allow you to transfer data directly to Microsoft Word To access the Microsoft Word transfer facility select the Microsoft Word icon from the Fault Tree Toolbar Window Help i ae ap ee Po le EB Transfer to Microsoft Word pi GA Transfer to Microsoft Word PA Total Pages r Page Range f Include All Linked Trees C Current Tree Only f Pages From n p C Selection Current Page Fit To Page Reference Table Auto Arrange Create Page Reference Table m Header Footer Header Add Header Faaker Add Footer 3 The Fault Tree pages you have selected will be transferred directly into Microsoft Word Microsoft Word does not have to be active on your desktop to perform this transfer it will open automatically Chapter 8 Fault Tree 195 4 Fault Tree Editor Screen Toolbar and Shortcut Keys Quick Reference The Fault Tree Editor Screen RBD 1 IT Item Te Ait C Documents and Settings Gemina Pak My Documents DemoShield Demoshield Version 6 CD ROM 800 Toolkit Defau fe x a File Add Edit Lay6ut Settings Chart Window Help D cy Ba X Str MMMERKMWKFA ABASER h amp amp 545 4 80 4 5 9
152. ch a system is in an operational state at the start of a mission when the mission is called for at an unknown time Reliability Represents the probability that the system will perform without failure during the specified period of time No of Cut Sets Represents a group of events that will cause system failure if and when they occur together CCF Signifies Common Cause Failure This is the occurrence of more than one failure event due to the same cause What is a Critical Path A Critical Path is a group of events that has the highest probability of occurrence among all possible sets of events Depending on the Importance Method selected the Critical Paths in a Fault Tree may differ ToolKit uses three main levels of Importance Methods to measure the critical path 192 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide F Vesely The F Vesely Fussell Vesely importance measure represents an event s contribution to the system unavailability Increasing or decreasing the availability of events with a higher importance value will have the most significant effect on system availability Birnbaum The Birnbaum measure for an event represents the sensitivity of system unavailability with respect to changes in the events unavailability B Proschan The B Proschan Barlow Proschan event importance measure takes into consideration the sequence of event failures within its calculation It is the probability that the system fails because a critical cut set co
153. ck parameters 1 Inthe RBD Canvas right click the desired block and select Block Parameters from the pop up menu The RBD Block Parameters dialog box appears RBD Block Parameters j E General E3 Time Phase Hyperlinks Failure Model Part Wu Type DF vote Number l Quantity DEN Logic Mode Basic Circuit Ref LON F2 Adjustment Factor 1 i 1 Description Description Group Labels v Capacity Block From Library From Library New Madel Spelling ancel F Chapter 7 RBD 165 Select the failure model from the name drop down list A If the desired model does not appear in the list click New Model to define the failure model B Select the model type from Type combo box C Available model types include Fixed Rate MTTF Dormant Standby Weibull LogNormal Normal Gamma Beta BiNomial ChiSquared Poisson Uniform and LogUniform When the type is selected the mathematical model can be displayed by clicking on the help icon D Enter the remaining block information and parameters as necessary E and Time Phase tab data G When you are finished entering block parameters click OK to save the changes and close the dialog box F To edit Nodes parameters L PA In the RBD tab right click the desired node and select Node Parameters from the pop up menu The Node Parameters dialog box appears Edit the node parameters as necessary Nodes to the ri
154. component descriptions should appear in the system window If not select Show Description from the Layout Menu Chapter 6 FMECA 145 Defining FMECA Severity Severity categories are assigned to system failure modes to indicate the severity of the occurrence and the related degree of damage You must create the severity categories before they can be assigned To define severity categories 1 From the Edit Menu A select Severity Categories B Edit Layos ettings Analysis Chart Undo A Copy Ctrl C Find Ctrl F Replace Ctrl R Phrase Library Severity Category Global Parameters Renumber d Allocation Occurrence Matrix 2 The Severity Categories dialog box appears d gt Severity Categories Description LP Category ID f Catastrophic amp Failure w Critical 4 Failure which ro weighting Fii o Marginal 4 Failure 5 oe c Minor Failure not Sera Description Catastrophic 4 Failure whicl Save Phrase Get Phrase Spelling Delete Sev Add Sev o Save Ec Cancel Click Add Sev C A new severity category is added to the table on the left side of the dialog box In the Weighting field enter 100 D In the Description field enter Catastrophic E Click Save The table is updated with your changes Following the above steps create the three other categories that appear in the dialog box above When all severity categories are entered click OK
155. cr da iore E Suit ee er e elo dea po eoe A Soo Od d 239 ION TEODUCTIRUN ode oceano densos Cer Canteen ec LUE ec sed AEN ec LP Co Eo Dd quz nM D Acn cs ICE Co el Reon eed M d 239 Z LPBNTTOOLKIIP SPA REC OST ceexdtt ilta d ceclaidiirtutasd ssa end bela quid ac Saddles tales dude tes dba Dad pon actadeicbhuVet diac de cR aua E 240 3 CREATING A SPARBECOST PROIJIBCT 2i t M ree bh abe Mene e b deni 241 4 SPARECOST EDITOR SCREEN TOOLBAR AND SHORTCUT KEYS QUICK REFERENCE cer 250 EVENITREER ANALYSIS 2 pdscteeteseet cos evedteeetoee eoasDectesie vester ee edbueesdct exo adsusbsebe ei euet de esu a dbe ee eue e dv dbe e Eger EU 255 D sg 8B BIO PION NUR RRRRTRORT X n AA 255 2 ETEMSZEOOLKIT4w EVENT IREE ANAL SIS seit sess roe atone aus anetecacubru eer tones LM MD MEC Lc e D S PIE DI IDA SUUM aUe 256 S CBEATING AN EVENT REE PROSE Wie usiretsscibi nne utri E IM a pp Ru EL LN MA RID LIE 260 4 EVENT TREE EDITOR SCREEN TOOLBAR AND SHORTCUT KEYS QUICK REFERENCE cnn 275 WORKING WITH REPORTS eicicceceescteteud veaucko to eu eo ee aa Ioa c Ov Eee a E vea eed OD ove vu sue ea oc cenae eese eo eode deus 281 1 SELECTING AND PREVIEWING REPORTS sccscsccsceccececcecsccscsccscscescscascscnsesceseecesescssescssescesasescasescasescesecs 281 Z CREATING REPORT TEMPLATES zanin aues pereo debi dE tian eue cat ita East Cup a e dex a on Ves olo ances hes dT eu s 284 SC USTOMIZINGARBPOR
156. ct System Selection Report Selection E Reports 7 ITP IT Project DNE muzis Reports V BDO Example ITP v 8 Example Oe Bellcore Reports E MIL 217 Systems O RDF Reports Bellcore Systems 0O sl allure Rate I Mechanical Systema L Parts List Ir ROF Systems L Parameters 7 ABCSYS ROF 2000 IEC 62380 TR ce Fi Factors 2996 Systems L f Allocation FMECA Systems L REF 2000 Failure Rate Report LIEI MairiTairi Systems J 2098 Reports ep MAE Atel PERSE Use the Group checkbox to create a E RBD Oysters report that is Grouped by the FT Systems indentures of the System Each Block 1 Markov Systems in your system will be a different set AE Event Tree Systems of report pages which you can browse to quickly Chapter 13 Reports 283 Preview Tab After selecting a report click the Preview tab to see the generated report From this tab you can browse through the reports s page by page zoom in out print and export save to other report file formats To view a different report return to the Selection tab select the desired report then return to the Preview tab 4 IT Reports Previous Report Next Report Selection Preview Templates Customize amp B Tfj J yl rsen lige 2 Time n A m Pmt Pareri Mame Cega E a n a zen Fire Hate fate Percent MTEF PI LE AEST AD Bcc Power Spl 15 240 v AC Si i eu ee amply viz DC Guipul Cepacikr Cenascikr Fired
157. ct the Microsoft Word icon from the Event Tree Toolbar ted Fire Alarm Starts Sprinkler Starts Con 2 The Range window appears Check all desired options and click OK Transfer To MS Word Dialog Total Pages A Page Range fe all Pages from IE toro C Selection C Current Page Fit To Page Reference Table Header Footer Header E Footer 3 The Event Tree pages you have selected will be transferred directly into Microsoft Word Microsoft Word does not have to be active on your desktop to perform this transfer it will open automatically Success Minimum Damage W 1 Seq Q 0 00000096 Seq w 5 624 Sprinker System is Success activated Fire Alarm Starts Successfully Failure Damage No Loss of Life W 2 Seq Q 0 000063 Seq w 5 624 Sprinker System Success does not Activate Fire is Detected by the Detection System Success Limited Damage Wet people W 7 Seq Q 0 00000687 Seq w 5 624 Sprinker Systemis Failure activated Initiator Fire Alarm does not Fire Starts inthe Start Failure Major Damage and Loss of Life Seq Q 0 000453 Seq w 5 624 Main Building Sprinker System 90 does not Activate Failure Failure Failure Major Damage and Loss of Life Seq Q 0 000843 Seq w 5 624 Fire is not Detected Fire Alarm does not Sprinker System W 90 by the Detection Start does not Activate Chapter 12 Event Tree 275 4 Event Tree Editor Screen Toolbar and Shortcut Keys Quick
158. d Gate or Event at the insertion point as a Repeat Gate or Repeat Event Delete the selection Open the ITEM ToolKit On line Help 224 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Chapter 10 MainTain 225 CHAPTER 10 Maintain A comprehensive design tool for calculating MTTR Maintain conforms to maintenance standards established in MIL HDBK 472 Procedure V Method A This chapter 1 Introduces Maintain system 2 Describes Toolkit s Maintain features 3 Outlines an example Maintain System 4 Describes the Maintain Editor Screen Toolbars and Shortcut Keys 1 Introduction Maintain is an engineering tool to aid in Maintainability Prediction It provides an integrated environment for prediction of the expected number of hours that a system or device will be in an inoperative or down state while it is undergoing maintenance Maintain utilizes techniques specified in MIL HDBK 472 Procedure V Method A to predict maintainability in quantitative terms The recommended application of this technique is to perform the analysis as early as possible during the design phase This prediction should also be updated continuously as the design progresses to assure a high probability of compliance with specified requirements Maintain facilitates and eases this analysis and iteration of it by implementing this technique in a 32Bit Windows desktop application Using Maintain early in a project design provides a sound basis for development
159. d display and edit Reliability Block Diagrams Fault Tree Diagrams Markov Diagrams and Event Tree Diagrams Selecting any of these analyses in the Project or System Window will display the appropriate Diagram Window PNOO0215 l 004001231 Valve1 PNOO1632 1 00 001231 Valve2 RBD Diagram 88 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Primary Failed i Minton Damage W t Damage ro Loss of LraWwz2 Lmmiced DONATA ar paopre W F Mayor Camage ard Loss of Lire Ww 90 Major Damage ard Loss of Lire Ww 90 Seg Q INXXXXQ98 S8Q W 5 824 Sey QD NANA 504w 5 824 Seq QD DOOR Sag w 5 824 Sey Q 0 INXMS3 Sag w 5 824 Seg Q0 00843 Seq w 5 824 E Event Tree Event Tree Diagram Chapter 3 ToolKit Basics 89 The Chart tab displays computation results in graphic format By default the Chart tab is blank until you specify graph options for the selected system Once you have generated a chart you can copy it to the clipboard save it as a bmp or jpeg file or print it uonoesuuoj ec a d r o s n m a c m 3 Failure Rate Over Temperature Chart Category JeuloJSuEl The Result tab is primarily intended for displaying FMECA Fault Tree Event Tree Markov and RBD analysis results It also displays the failure rates and pi factors for selected Mil 217 Bellcore RDF 2000 299B and Mechanical blocks and components Parameter Value Mean StD 5
160. d to create a new derating file and add a model to it Select the Model tab to define the component you wish to apply a derating model to IT Derating Files File Edit Greate Derate File Derate File Manager IT Derating Files File Info Model Info Derating My Derating Cap tdica NER Model Mame BSM ORE La Model Type User Defined ue New File Description Category Capacitor o o Sub Category Mica NER RE Parameters Ambient Temperature 124 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide 3 Then select the Derating tab to define the curves you wish to have applied IT Derating Files File Edit Create Derate File Derate File Manager IT Derating Files File Info Model Info Derating Derati 3 mrang 3 points curve Cap Mica NER 3 points New File Nominal Worst Case Derating Curve V Stress Ratio Roll Off Temperature Max Temperature Multi point curve Worse Case 2 ti ra A 2 e 2 Adjust add these values to change the shape of the curves Sip g g Soria Ambient Temperature 4 When finished click OK When you add a component to your system that has a user defined derating model the component is derated according to your model As with the included derating standards you can see the effects of derating via the icons in the system window and via the Edit Derating menu selection for the components Chapter 5 Predictions 12
161. d to create and control NSWC Systems Mechanical 1 Tool Name Description End Add Mode Cancels add mode Block Creates a Block in the NSWC System Linked Block Creates a Linked Block in the NSWC System rl Category List Add a Block Component from the list The IEC 62380 Toolbar The IEC 62380 RDF 2000 Toolbar is used to create and control IEC 62380 Systems RDF E3 Tool Name Description be End Add Mode Cancels add mode e Block Creates a Block in the IEC 62380 System Linked Block Creates a Linked Block in the IEC 62380 System PC Board Creates a PC Board Block in the IEC 62380 System Hybrid Block Creates a Hybrid Block in the IEC 62380 System Integrated Circuit rl Category List Add a Block Component from the list 130 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide The 299B Toolbar The 299B Toolbar is used to create and control 299B Systems 2996 E3 Tool Name Description he End Add Mode Cancels add mode B Block Creates a Block in the 299B System Linked Block Creates a Linked Block in the 299B System PCB Creates a PCB Block in the 299B System Hybrid Block Creates a Hybrid Block in the 299B System Connector ss Category List Add a Block Component from the list Shortcut Keys Key Function Ctrl N Open a new project Ctl 0 Open an existing document Displays the Open dialog box in which you can locate and open the desired file Save the active project with its current name If you hav
162. dL Status PROJECT IT Project Pre Summary HA RBD Systems oe i RBD 0 erification completed Errors Found Total Msgs 3 Filter Update Iv Errors v Warnings Show Msgs 100 G RBD 0 m Node 1 Em Block 1 m Node 1 1 fe Block 1 1 m WNodel 2 Blocks 4 Nodes 3 3 Ifthe system contains errors the Verification Results dialog box C displays all relevant error message number and the message text Use the information in the Verification Results dialog box to make corrections before performing system analysis 4 If no errors are present the Verification Complete Without Errors message appears Click OK Advisory Msg RBG Verification completed Without errars 168 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Performing Analysis NOTE Before performing analysis follow the procedure in Verifying Data to identify and correct any errors in the system You cannot perform analysis until all errors are corrected To analyze the system 1 In the System Window click the system header From the Analysis Menu select Perform A A dialog box displaying the progress of the analysis appears 3 When the analysis is complete the Verification Msg dialog box appears Click OK The objects in the System window are updated with the analysis results Advisory Msg RED Verification completed Without errors 4 When the analysis is complete select Summary B from the Analysis menu
163. dated with the changes NOTE The Save Project and Save Project As commands save the active project only If more than one project is open you must save each project individually Chapter 4 Project Basics 105 6 Closing a Project To close the active project select Close Project A from the File Menu ToolKit closes the active project If the project contains unsaved changes ToolKit prompts you to save the project before closing it a File amp dd Edit Layout Settings Chart E Mew Project Ctrl M t Open Project Ctr zl Save Project Cbrl 5 Save Project s Close Project Mew Library Open Library 7 Exiting ToolKit To exit ToolKit select Exit B from the File Menu ToolKit closes all open projects If an open project contains unsaved changes ToolKit prompts you to save the project before closing it D Fie Add Edit Layout Settings Chart 3 New Project Chrl h Open Project Chri o Ll Save Prajeck Chrl 5 Save Project As Close Project New Library Open Library Derating Files Save Diagram Print d Print Preview k Print Setup Page Setup Convert d Import Export 1 Test 2 V 7 8 Example NOTE You can also use the X button in the top right corner of the ToolKit workspace to close the application 106 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Chapter 5 Predictions 107 CHAPTER 5 Predictions ITEM ToolKit contains five prediction modules for use in creating reliabilit
164. de IT Item ToolKit Project Dialog i File Add Edit Layout Settings Chart Window Help Stree X X XE XX AE zl PROJECT IT Project Prediction Totals zl xl c v en Project FR 0 G 0 M Title New Project Mame IT Project 0 Part Mumber PO LOM Circuit Ref Analyst PO Compiled By 5 J Enter your project information by placing the cursor or clicking in the appropriate fields Project Title Name Part Number UCNE Circuit Ref Analyst Compiled By Target Rate Life Time hrs 24 Redundancy s pareCost Tutorial T Project 001 Applies to failure prediction systems contained in this project EN l gt Description pe and Cost for 1 computer site Function Description r Notes Approved By Totals Failure Rate 0 Unavailability o MTBF hrs 1 6 The information entered for a project is only for the project level and its entry is optional 7 The table below displays each field that is available for a project and what each field pertains to Target Rate Life Time Redundancy Failure Rate Unavailability MTBF 8 From the Add Menu select SpareCost System The SpareCost system and project headers are added Chapter 11 SpareCost The following fields will display results only if a prediction system is part of the project 243 Project li
165. del and edit the parameters Click OK in the Event Parameters window in the Project Events List window and in the Column Parameters window when finished 10 Edit the rest of the columns according to the following table 266 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Sprinkler Starts Failure Rate 0 00048 11 The column headings should looks like the following Fire Starts Fire Detected Fire Alarm Starts Sprinkler Starts Editing the Consequences 1 Click on the Event Tree Tab to open the Event Tree Canvas A Event Tree 1 IT Item ToolKit C Documents and Settings Gemina Pake My Documents DemoShield Wemoshield Version 6 CD ROM 800 Toolk SEE a File Add Edit Layout Settings Analysis Chart Window Help e VN amp i ajx Fire Starti in Main Bullding Rre detotd by Deeoon 8ycem bj arm System is Activate sadghler System 1i Activated r C A SpareCost Systems i A RBD Systems A Fault Tree Systems A Markov Systems Ss O Consequences HA Event Tree Systems Jg cet Fire Protection System P ov Enamgi Consequence Catngey fE Pipe Break uw O 2 Name Safety E Loss of Coolant Acciden DamegeNoloesoKufe Desmriplinn cafery tanked Conseruaences such as rid tn injuries ne koe Largo Damage Wiel P v 800 Example b Major Damage and Loss kr B 1 m e es ES Core Cuad re Ske In Building E Event Tree System Fire Protectio i Cafe E ie Initi
166. dialog Online Activation License ID Password Cancel OK Enter the required information and click OK Selecting Unlock by Phone opens the following dialog Program Activation Dialog ITEM ToolKit User Code 1 281796922 ITEM Software in LISA 714 935 2900 User Code 2 5102663 in Europe 44 0 1489 885085 Company Mame ITEM Software USA Inc License ID Reg Kev 1 Password Reg key 2 ceel Your system will generate User Code 1 and User Code 2 numbers The User Codes are required for activation of your program These numbers must be presented to an Item Software representative by telephone or email Item Software will then supply the License ID Password and Registration Keys Enter these details in the boxes and then click Unlock The About Item ToolKit dialog box appears Verify that the correct modules are activated Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit 19 About ITEM ToolKit ITEM Toolkit version 8 0 0 Copyright C 2011 Licensed To ITEM SOFTWARE LISA INC Copyright e p Eres CUT ens Bienes A ad i Network Info ITEM Software i Reliability analysis tools include MIL HDBE 217F Notice 2 Electronics Bellcore Telcordia 5R 332 Issue 2 5R 332 Issue 1 TR 332 Issue 6 Electronics Demo Version NSA NSWC DB8JLE10 NS WwcC S8 LE1 Mechanical Demo Version FMEA FMECA MIL STD 16294 IEC 61508 1
167. e Failure Frequency W This is the term used by the system to represent the unconditional failure intensity The unconditional failure intensity is the probability that the system or component fails per unit time given that it was working correctly at time zero W is equal to the number of expected system failures CFI Signifies the Conditional Failure Intensity This is the probability of failure per unit time given that the component was working as designed at time zero and is working at time t Expected Failure This is the number of times the system is expected to fail over a specified period of time lifetime Unreliability Represents the probability of one or more system failures over a specified period of time The number of expected system failures W provides a good approximation for system unreliability for cases where W lt lt 1 TDT Represents total down time This is the total time that the component or system is expected to be unavailable for the specified system lifetime TUT Represents total up time This is the total time that the component or system is expected to be available for the specified system lifetime Failure Rate The Failure rate of the component or system MTBF Mean Time Before Failure of the component or system MTTF Mean Time To Failure of the Non repairable component or system MTTR Mean Time To Repair of the component or system Availability Represents a measure of the degree to whi
168. e Library Lookup Manager 4 IT Library Manager Delete Load Selected Libraries Mi r Program Filesttem TooktExanples DemLib ITL rre i3 Libraries se this button to load the Use this button to browse for libraries into memory library files ITL 3 Locate the library file s you wish to load into memory via the Path field 4 Click Load Selected Libraries then OK 5 Now the selected libraries are in memory and available for browsing via the following locations on the workspace e Right click a Component in the System window 308 Item ToolKit Tutorial EA E yu ABCSY S MIL 217 1 FA 15 3426F fl 10 FR 0 13071 765 MTBF 76 m E Enron ntm t 13015 9 au i X Cut Ctrl ie mm 1C Copy Chrl c m i E 2X Delete Del hr m 107 i 10 Browse Library T am iC 1C Start Transfer To m 1U rucrmeuuznseszeoses mua mE G9 cm e Click the spyglass icon next to the Part Number field on the General tab of a Block or Component E3 General EA Physical E Applicaton Capacitor Part Number Description CAPACITOR FIXED CK 33PF Mame 10 1 w Search System 5 h Project Circuit Ref NEN earc ee Search Library Analyst Browse Library Category Capacitor 7 LON Fit e Either method opens the Library Browse window Library Browse nino ofi patmumber category Description All loaded library files zu TN eee 3r cm
169. e If you click No the setup program closes 62 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide e The Customer Information dialog box appears Type the user name and the company name in the appropriate boxes and then click Next ITEM ToolKit Version 8 0 0 Customer Information Please enter your information Please enter your name and the name of the company for whom vau work User Mame Company Marne ITEM Software USA Inc Back Cancel e The Choose Destination Location dialog box appears To choose a destination folder that the program files should be installed into click Next to accept the default destination folder or click Browse select an alternate folder then click Next ITEM ToolKit Version 8 0 0 Choose Destination Location Select folder where Setup will install files Setup will install Item Toolkit in the following folder Ta install ta this folder click Next To install to a different folder click Browse and select another folder Destination Folder C Program Files Browse Cancel Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit 63 The Choose Network Destination Path dialog box appears ITEM ToolKit Version 8 0 0 Chent Installation Connection Type Please select Client connection type for the Server The License Path should be to the main directory of the program on the Server e g L Pragram Files and WOT the full path Full Head write access to this directory is also required f Networ
170. e Click this box to modularize independent sub blocks CCF Click this box if you wish to perform a Common Cause Failure Analysis Click this box if you wish to perform an Uncertainty Analysis If you select this box you must Total Down Time Uncertainty then enter the Sample Size and the Percentile 184 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide What is a Gate A gate is used to describe the relationship between the input and output events in a Fault Tree For example a specific output can occur if and only if specific input events occur These specific inputs and outputs define each gate A Fault Tree can have several different kinds of gates The gate type defines the appearance of the gate symbol when drawn in the Fault Tree In addition the gate type determines how the inputs to the gate are logically connected for the minimal cut set analysis process Adding a Gate Fault trees are created by adding gates and events directly into the Fault Tree diagram edit area As you add gates and events to a fault tree diagram the system will automatically position the diagram symbols in the diagram edit area Once a new Fault Tree System is added into a Project the TOP gate is automatically created You can enter and add gates to the Fault Tree by using the Select and Click method from the Fault Tree Toolbar or by using the Add pull down menu and selecting a Gate You can continue to add gates by simply clicking on any gate Click on the Faul
171. e Markov System Allows the user to add a text component to the canvas Allows the user to add an image component to the canvas Allows the user to transfer any Markov data directly into MS Word Allows the user to perform the necessary calculations of the analysis Allows the user to stop the analysis currently being performed Displays a summary of the analysis Allows the user to create a header and footer for all Markov pages Phase List Selection Pull Down Menu 222 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Fit to Page Allows the user to fit the Markov diagram in one page automatically Reset Fit to Page Allows the user to undo the fit to page previously carried out The Zoom Toolbar The Zoom Toolbar contains commands for zooming and panning the canvas Zoom options can also be accessed by right clicking in the white space on the Markov diagram OY Ed Ed O5 Tool Name Description b Ruler Control Turn the ruler of the canvas on or off Properes Open the properties window and allows the user to change the selected component properties Changes the cursor to a magnifying glass and allows the user to zoom in by selecting the CA Zoom area to be zoomed in with the left mouse button and zoom out by clicking on the right mouse button Sets the magnification level of the canvas so that all components on the canvas are visible E Zoom to Fit in the view port e Sets the magnification level of the canvas so that the selected components ar
172. e Range window appears Check all desired option and click OK Chapter 9 Markov 217 Transfer To MS Word Dialog Tatal Pages Page Range fe All Pages from nh 4 r a f Selection Current Page Fit To Page Reference Table Create Page Reference Table Header Footer Header Add Header Footer Add Footer mor Meme Cancel 3 The Markov pages you have selected will be transferred directly into Microsoft Word Microsoft Word does not have to be active on your desktop to perform this transfer it will open automatically i gt Primary Failed lt Pi 0 0 mm b Stanby Failed N b ume P 0 0605 R 0 Both Failed J Pi 0 0 P 0 0001 Primary Repaired V T 1 y piz0 0 P 0 0001 MS Word Output 218 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide 4 Markov Editor Screen Toolbar and Shortcut Keys Quick Reference The Markov Editor Screen D ur 4 S8 X e NT koto An mw GO si x Both Available e Maintain Systems A SpareCost Systems RBD Systems e Fault Tree Systems Primary Failed 4 Q DUAL PROCESSOR Q 0 t ius ge s Event Tree Systems 1E Fire Protection System Pipe Break f Loss of Coolant Accident pfe Both Failed O ZW System MK STANDBY 1 State 1 Both Available Pi 0 State 2 Standby Failed Pi 0 State 3 Primary Repaired
173. e not named the document the ToolKit displays the Save As dialog box Remove selected data from the document and stores it on the clipboard Copy the selection to the clipboard Paste the contents of the clipboard at the insertion point Delete the selection Reverse the last editing Note You cannot undo some actions Print the active document Open the About ITEM ToolKit Window Open the ITEM ToolKit On line Help The Predictions System Dialog Windows Controls All Predictions Dialog Window Contains the following Controls lt gt ml DRV Description Tool Name Undo Changes izi Analyze ID Set Default Values J Check Spelling Cancels the latest operation Run the Analysis of the system Set the selected Component to the default values Check the Spelling of the selected Text The Project Toolbar The Project Toolbar displays the available analysis options for the ToolKit application A A A A A PSEA uS Tool Name Chapter 5 Predictions 127 Description MIL217 Add a MIL HDBK 217 Electronic System Add a SR 332 Telcordia Electronic System Telcordia Bellcore Add an IEC 62380 French Telecom Standard Electronic System IEC 62380 RDF 299B Add a 299B Chinese Military Standard Electronic System NSWC Mechanical Maintain Add a NSWC Mechanical System Add a Maintain MIL HDBK 472 Procedure V System SpareCost FMECA Add a Spare Cost Spares Sca
174. e not named the project the Save As dialog box pacis will open Ctr P Print the Active View Ctrl X Remove selected data from the document and stores it on the clipboard Ctrl C Copy the selection to the clipboard Ctrl V Paste the contents of the clipboard at the insertion point Ctrl W Paste the contents of the clipboard Gate or Event at the insertion point as a Repeat Gate or Repeat Event Del Delete the selection Fl Open the ITEM ToolKit On line Help Chapter 6 FMECA 131 CHAPTER 6 FMECA The FMECA program is documented by the standard originally developed by the United States Military MIL STD 1629 Procedures for Performing a Failure Mode Effects and Criticality Analysis dated November 9 1949 This procedure was developed as a reliability technique to determine the effect of system and equipment failures The FMECA module also now covers and conforms fully to the standards IEC 61508 and ISO 26262 This enables ITEM ToolKit to provide a full top down modeling from Hazard Analysis to FMECA in compliance with these standards This chapter 1 Introduces FMECA systems 2 Describes ToolKit s FMECA features 3 Outlines an example FMECA system 4 Describes the FMECA Editor Screen Toolbars and Shortcut Keys 1 Introduction A Failure Mode Effects and Criticality Analysis FMECA uses an inductive approach to system design and reliability It identifies each potential failure within a system or manufacturi
175. e representing the number of failures and repairs Markov models provide great flexibility in modeling the timing of events They can be applied when simple parametric time based models such as Exponential or Weibull Time to Failure models are not sufficient to describe the dynamic aspects of a system s reliability or availability behavior as may be the case for systems incorporating standby redundancy Computing the solution of a Markov model is equivalent to computing the solution of a large system of ordinary differential equations which is done by integration For this purpose the Markov Analysis module relies on a state of the art computational engine that has seen many academic and commercial applications The engine is started by a simple click of a button within the ITEM ToolKit Highlights of the module s features are e Phased mission models Powerful graphical Markov model editor e Discrete and continuous time transition models Flexible definition of states and groups of states Markov Module provides the following measures and results e Expected up and down time e Number of expected failures and repairs e Failure and repair frequencies at given point in time e Availability Reliability at given point in time average over mission time interval e Probability of being in a particular state at given point in time average over mission time interval e Customizable Report Generator e Extensive Import Export facili
176. e software is installed it should open normally and read the License Key located on the Server NOTE TEM ToolKit will display error messages if 1 The software cannot read the License Key because the Network Server is down the connection is lost the client is logged off or the Network Path is incorrect 2 You have more users than licenses available Failed to connect to the server Please check network settings and try again User Limit Exceeded Fl e purchaze additional licences WARNING EIL 217 Systems vill not be sawed User Limit Exceeded Warning Box 68 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Setting Up the Network Client Once the Network Client version of ToolKit is installed the Client license manager needs to be set with the correct types of network connections ITEM ToolKit has two types of network connections available Network File Share Connections LAN WAN Connections NETWORK CLIENT 7 1 Local or installation path C Program Files Item Toolkit Programs SERVER Server or License Path Server Program Files Item Toolkit Programs IT_Local_License Local or installation path C Program Files Item Toolkit Programs The path is shared and accessible to the users Power user right NETWORK CLIENT 2 minimum Local or installation path C Program Files Item Toolkit Programs Server or License Path Server Program Files Item Toolkit Programs IT_Local_License TCP IP Connections Inter
177. e visible in rd Zoom to Selection the view port ej Pan Changes the pointer to a hand and allows the user to grab the canvas with the left mouse button and pan in any direction The Rotate Toolbar The Rotate Toolbar contains commands for rotating the selected components Gad ha S e Tool Name Description Rotate Sets the canvas to Rotate mode Allows grabbing a component and rotating it A Rotate Left Rotates the selected components by 90 degrees to the left s Rotate Right Rotates the selected components by 90 degrees to the right A Flip Vertical Flips the selected components 180 degrees about the Y axis dk Flip Horizontal Flips the selected components 180 degrees about the X axis The Graph Toolbar Chapter 9 Markov 223 The Graph Toolbar contains commands that affect the appearance and behavior of the Markov diagram Each selection highlights the way that States are connected through the Markov System f qp gm ws Tool T F a Name Edges Entering Edges Leaving All Nodes Connected From Nodes Connected To Nodes Connected Shortcut Keys Key Ctrl N Ctrl O Ctrl S Ctrl P Ctrl X Ctrl C Ctrl V Ctrl W Del Fl Description Click on the state you wish to select on the Markov and then click on this symbol to display the connection line s that the selected state is are entering from the state close to it The connection line s will flash repe
178. ears Read the license agreement carefully and click Yes to accept or No to decline If you click No the setup program closes 78 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide e The Customer Information dialog box appears Type the user name and the company name in the appropriate boxes and then click Next MEM ToolKit Version 0 0 Customer Information Please enter your information Please enter your name and the name of the company For whom you work User Mame Sales amp Admin Company Mame ITEM Software USA Inc Back Cancel e The Choose Destination Location dialog box appears To choose a destination folder that the program files should be installed into click Next to accept the default destination folder or click Browse select an alternate folder then click Next ITEM ToolKit Version 0 0 Choose Destination Location Select folder where Setup will install files Setup will install Item Toolkit in the following folder To install ta this folder click Next To install to a different folder click Browse and select another folder Destination Folder C Program Files Browse Cancel Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit 79 The Choose Network Destination Path dialog box appears ITEM ToolKit Version 8 0 0 Client Installation Connection Type Please select Client connection type For the Server The License Path should be to the main directory of the program on the Server e g L sPre
179. ecisions about whether to perform additional analysis on a selected subset of accident scenarios 2 ITEM ToolKit amp Event Tree Analysis ITEM ToolKit Event Tree is an inductive or forward logic method to identify various sequences or set of events started by an initiating event that can lead to certain end consequences or accident scenarios The idea is based upon the discretization of the real accident evolution in terms of few macroscopic events These events are usually characterized in terms of e The intervention or not of protection systems which are supposed to take action for the mitigation of the accident system event tree e The fulfillment or not of safety functions functional event tree e The occurrence or not of physical phenomena phenomenological event tree An event tree begins with a defined accident initiating event which could be a component or an external failure It follows that there is one event tree for each different accident initiating event considered Thereby all possible responses to the initiating event are listed from left to right across the page The branch points on the tree structure usually represent the success failure or partial failure of different systems and subsystems which can respond to the initiating event These event branches can have their own probability models or can have models derived from attached Fault Trees gates and events Theoretically any probabilistic quantification model
180. ed operation from the pop up menu A If you select Cut a confirmation message appears Click OK 3 To paste the cut or copied system right click the header of the target project B and select Paste from the pop up menu The system is pasted under the corresponding module header C IT Item ToolKit C Program Files Item Toolkit Examples Test ITP Dialog a File Add Edit Layout Settings Chart Window Help De m H m x e 9 R ls i y a 2 E Category Not Selected x HE PROJECT IT Project Prediction Totals FR 22 525928 A MIL 217 Systems FR 22 525928 AM MIL 0 FR 22 525928 Oy LULA MIL 217 System Title MIL 217 Example Nam MLO 8 Part Number LCN F Al xl CircuitRef Analyst fe Quantity 1 Capacitor 10 1 FR 0 0075993976 No On Standby fo i Capacitor 10 2 FR 0 040561542 a Capacitor 10 3 FR 0 018210663 MTTR w Transformer 10 4 FR 0 010479688 a File Add Edit Layout Settings Chart Window Help Dag e s Sexo Sew A P A A A Caco No Selecter A la a 5 MIL 217 Systems FR 45 051857 Project 2M MIL 0 FR 22 525928 RM MIL 1 FR 22 525928 Title New Project Name IT Project Part Number O LCN Circuit Ref j Analyst Block 10 FR 0 79764068 Compiled By adi ag Capacitor 10 1 FR 0 0075993976 ag Capacitor 10 2 FR 0 040561542 Applies to Failure prediction
181. ent or template with its current name Remove selected data from the document and stores it on the clipboard Copy the selection to the clipboard Paste the contents of the clipboard at the insertion point Delete the selection Reverse the last editing Note You cannot undo some actions Print the active document Open the About ITEM ToolKit Window Open the ITEM ToolKit On line Help The Markov Dialog Window Contains the following Controls gt ff v Tool Name KJ Undo Changes E Analyse d Check Spelling Description Cancels the latest operation Run the Analysis of the system Check the Spelling of the selected Text 220 Tool Add an IEC 62380 French Telecom Standard Electronic System ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide The Project Toolbar The Project Toolbar displays the available analysis options for the ToolKit application A A A A A PSEA uS Name MIL217 Telcordia Bellcore IEC 62380 RDF 209B NSWC Mechanical Maintain SpareCost FMECA RBD Fault Tree Event Tree Markov The Nudge Toolbar The Nudge Toolbar contains commands for moving the selected components by one logical unit in any direction Name Nudge Up Nudge Down Nudge Left Nudge Right Description Add a MIL HDBK 217 Electronic System Add a SR 332 Telcordia Electronic System Add a 299B Chinese Military Standard Electronic System Add a NSWC Mechanical System Add a Maintain MIL HDBK
182. epeated use Fault Tree Analysis Fault Tree Analysis is a systems reliability assessment tool which focuses on failure path representation The Fault Tree module provides a wide variety of both qualitative and quantitative information about the system reliability and availability Fault Trees are used during Reliability and Safety Risk Assessments to graphically represent the logical interaction and probabilities of occurrence of component failures and other events in a system The interactions are captured using a tree structure of Boolean operation gates which decomposes system level failures to combinations of lower level events The analysis of such Fault Trees identifies and ranks combinations of events leading to system failure and provides estimates of the system s failure probability Fault Tree Analysis is a well established methodology that relies on solid theories such as Boolean Logic and Probability Theory Boolean logic is used to reduce the Fault Tree structure into Minimal Cut Sets which are the combinations of events leading to failure of the system Probability Theory is then used to determine probabilities that the system will fail during a particular mission or is unavailable at a particular point in time given the probability of the individual events Additionally probabilities are computed for individual Minimal Cut Sets forming the basis for their ranking by importance with respect to their reliability and safety impact
183. er PO LON 4 Enter your project information by placing the cursor or clicking in the appropriate fields 134 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Project Title FMECA Tutorial Description Pump Control System Name Pump Control Project Part Number Function Description LCN Circuit Ref Notes Analyst Compiled By Approved By Applies to failure prediction systems contained in this project Totals Target Rate fo Failure Rate fo Life Time hrs 24 Unavailability fo Redundancy MTBF hrs 1 is bells The information entered for a project is only for the project level and its entry is optional The table below displays each field that is available for a project and what each field pertains to Description What the project is Function Description What the project system does Notes Any other pertinent information on the project Approved By Person required to sign off on the project Acceptable number of failures for the project Failures Per Million Hours Life Time Project life time or mission time given in hours Redundancy Redundancy Flag Will display total Project failure rate once analysis is complete Unavailability This box will display the Project unavailability once the analysis has been run MTBF Mean Time Between Failures for the project description Adding a System A FMECA system may represent a s
184. er 13 247 Note how these two columns of data are compressed to fit on the page You will 0 039 need to go into the Fields tab and make adjustments to make these fit nicely 0 0 290 Item ToolKit Tutorial Footer Tab The Footer tab similar to the Header tab controls the information that is displayed in the footer of the report Group Header and Footer Tabs If you have checked the Group box the report will group the results by component categories parent names and other aspects of the system You can control the header footer for the Groups in the same manner as you do with the report header footer Paper Size Tab The Paper Size tab is used to define the dimensions of the paper you want the report to fit on as well as the margins Be sure your printer supports the paper dimensions you wish to use IT Reports s mA Selection Prewieuy Templates Customize A m Template Selections r Paper Save As EJ e MIL217 Reports Failure Rake SER ci Group Parts List Source lower ew Parameters FI Fates Orientation Allocation NonOnp Failure C Portrait Landscape Mon Op Pi Fach NonOp Pi Paral Margins MIL 217 Failure MIL 217 Parts LE MIL 217 Pi Fac sed Bellcore Reports RDF Reports 2996 Reports NSwC Reports FMECA Reports RBD Reports FT Reports Event Tree Report Markov Reports Sparecast Reports wr Report Font Type selection EP 333993999
185. es not Activate Fire is Detected by Pom dM ox the Detection Svstem EN z m Sprinkler System is silure activated MEAM ee pire Alarm doce nal _ ca dt Fire Starts inthe i i i x x 7 Start f Faj P lain Buildina ao ek ee M Xl Sprinkler System does nat Activate Fire is not Detected lt 3 Fire Alarm does not TUN Sprinkler System c bythe Detection gt ES E e iat c 9 s f does not Activate Performing Analysis Event Tree Module provides a method to e Calculate Importance values e Calculate Event Sequence Unavailability and Frequency NOTE Before performing analysis follow the procedure in Verifying Data to identify and correct any errors in the system You cannot perform the analysis until all errors are corrected To Verify the Data L Select Verify Data from the Analysis Option in the Menu Toolbar Analysis Chart Window verify Data dy Perform Status Summary If no errors are detected the following windows will be displayed Advisory Msg To Analyze the System L 2 3 In the System Window click the system header From the Analysis Menu select Perform A dialog box displaying the progress of the analysis appears Analysis Chart Window Verify Data Mem m Sbatus Summary Chapter 12 Event Tree Total Msgs m Filter Update Iv Errors W Warnings Show Msgs a 100 When the analys
186. es serialization files to store data This means that all pertinent data from one analysis can be carried over into other analyses For example you may choose to begin your groundwork by performing one of the prediction analyses The failure rates data obtained can then be directly used to perform a RBD analysis or a FMECA analysis to determine the possible failure modes and their severity The ToolKit s flexibility allows you to begin at any level and proceed to what is needed in order to meet requirements The RBD Analysis application uses a RBD workspace area where all project system and RBD data and graphics are entered This area is the foundation on which you build your projects The workspace area consists of menus toolbars and project and system windows The RBD workspace area features a Multiple Document Interface MDI which allows you to Choose which windows to display and move and resize all open windows Openandcreate multiple RBD projects at the same time in order to compare analysis results Drag and drop gate and event components between projects This feature allows you to quickly create a new project by reusing components from other projects Chapter 7 RBD 159 3 Creating an RBD Project Creating a RBD Project consists of Constructing the Project System Adding Blocks Nodes and Connections Adding and editing Failure Models Constructing Sub System Setting the RBD View Verifying Data Performing ana
187. esscecscncscscscsceecscsecscetsecersssecsscesscesescesesceceesecesaecs 310 3 SWITCHING TO A DIFFERENT GRID TEMPLATE ccscoccscaccsceccsceccsceccsceccscscescscescecseecasesceseecesescssescssascssess 311 d EXPORTING AND PRINTING THE GRID VIEW ond aie e YE te an ec bt inea Neh ee had a lel a a 311 iv ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Preface Preface 1 ITEM ToolKit is a suite of comprehensive Reliability Availability Maintainability and Safety modules It uses globally recognized standards and methodologies to analyze components systems and projects 1 Purpose of this Guide This guide contains information to help you start using ITEM ToolKit The guide presents information in a tutorial format and is intended to explain the basic functions of the software Advanced concepts are included in the online help system which can be accessed from the Help menu within the ITEM ToolKit software 2 Structure This guide contains the following chapters Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Chapter 16 Introduces ToolKit Installation of the software Provides an overview of the ToolKit interface Explains basic project operations such as creating a new project opening a project adding libraries selecting workspace options importing and exporting project data saving and closing a project
188. events of interest Conduct a screening level risk assessment to identify the events of interest or categories of events that the analysis will address Categories include such things as groundings collisions fires explosions and toxic releases e Identify lines of assurance and physical phenomena Identify the various safeguards lines of assurance that will help mitigate the consequences of the initiating event These lines of assurance include both engineered systems and human actions Also identify physical phenomena such as ignition or meteorological conditions that will affect the outcome of the initiating event e Define accident scenarios For each initiating event define the various accident scenarios that can occur e Analyze accident sequence outcomes For each outcome of the event tree determine the appropriate frequency and consequence that characterize the specific outcome e Summarize results Event tree analysis can generate numerous accident sequences that must be evaluated in the overall analysis Summarizing the results in a separate table or chart will help organize the data for evaluation e Use the results in decision making Evaluate the recommendations from the analysis and the benefits they are intended to achieve Benefits can include improved safety and environmental performance cost savings or additional output Determine implementation criteria and plans The results of the event tree may also provide the basis for d
189. failure consequence ranked and categorized by a consequence Once the minimal cut sets are obtained probability evaluations can be performed if quantitative results are desired Quantitative analysis can be done for both point estimate as well as uncertainty values If the failure probabilities are treated as random variables these can be propagated to the failure sequence to determine the failure probability variations By failure we mean any basic primary event shown on the fault tree event tree For a failure we might have a time based probability or a demand based probability For time based failure models there can be a constant failure rate model exponential model or more sophisticated models with repair standby or distributions such as Weibull and Gamma For Demand based failure models there can be either a fixed probability probability distributions such as Beta and truncated Lognormal or models such as Poisson and Binomial Apart from mean unavailability calculated from the component failure models other reliability characteristics are unreliability failure rate assuming constant failure rate MTBF failure frequency Conditional Failure Intensity CFI and Number of failures in the lifetime of the system 9 Project Events List show All Add Global Event Event Parameters Shaw Global Events Only Show Non Global Events Only Delete Global Event t Iv Make selection globally visible Delete All Global Events Expo
190. fault printer you have associated with ITEM ToolKit be functional and configured to support the printing of Reports Be sure to check that the printer defined in File Print Setup is online and is configured to support the page format of the reports you wish Additionally it is important that your Analysis results are complete and current The Report Generator will advise you if the results are out of date but you will have to determine if the Analysis is complete enough for reporting purposes Locating the Reports Reports are located under File Print Reports or File Print Preview Reports The window that appears has four main tabs to perform work on The following sections cover the tasks that you can perform on each of these tabs Selection Tab On the Selection tab you can select one or more reports to have the Report Generator create for you On the left is a list of the currently open Projects Systems in ToolKit On the right is a list of the available Reports pre built and any custom reports you have made Choose the Project System you wish a report for check the box next to the specific report and then click the Preview tab You can always click the Print button if you want to go directly to printing the checked report s 282 Item ToolKit Tutorial The Report you selected will appear in the Preview tab for further actions 4 IT Reports Prink Cancel Selection Frewiem Templates Customize Proje
191. fe time given in hours Redundancy Flag Acceptable number of failures for the project Failures Per Million Hours Will display total Project failure rate once analysis is complete This box will display the Project unavailability once the analysis has been run Mean Time Between Failures for the project description Add Edit Layout Settings A3 MIL 217 System AL Bellcore System AL RDF System AL 2998 System ny Mechanical System I MainTain System Sparec ast System Y FMECA System fo RED System A Fault Tree System Event Tree Ta Markov System 9 Inthe System Window click the SpareCost header The system properties appear in the Dialog tab 10 Inthe Dialog tab enter your system information by placing the cursor or clicking in the appropriate fields Description Support and Cost for 1 Command Post shelter zl 11 The table below describes what could be entered and what each field and block of fields pertains to Part Number Approved By Site Spares SpareLCost System Title SpareCost Tutorial Mame 5 P1 f Du1 LCN Circuit Ref Shelter zb Analyst Stock out risk A Unsupported Period D aps Mo of Equipment per site Average Utilization 3 Ble lo EM Function m Description El Notes E L ompiled Bv Base Spares Repair Lead Time D avs Replenishment Period Months Total Number Fitted Overall Utilization 3 Beyond Ec
192. fier Project Part Number Logistic Control Number Circuit Ref Circuit Reference Person Performing FT Analysis Redundancy Flag Project life time given in hours What the project is What the project system does Any other pertinent information on the project Person who gathered data for analysis Person required to sign off on the project The following fields will display results only if a prediction system is part of the project Target Rate Acceptable number of failures for the project Failures Per Million Hours Project life time given in hours Redundancy Flag Will display total Project failure rate once analysis is complete This box will display the Project unavailability once the analysis has been run 262 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide MTBF Hrs Mean Time Between Failures for the project description 6 Select the Add menu from the menu toolbar by clicking on it Add Edit Layout Settings off MIL 217 System al Bellcore System AX RDF System QE 299B System pU Mechanical System i MainTain System Sparecost System Y FMECA System ilb RED System A Fault Tree System Ditra Ta Markov System 7 Select and click on the ET Event Tree System option 8 The project will display as an Event Tree in the project window and the applicable system data will display in the system window 9 From the Project window select the Event Tree System by clicking on it 10 The Event Tree System dialog box will be
193. for that module Analysis Toolbar A unique Analysis toolbar will appear in the top right side of the ToolKit application by default when an analysis module and system is opened and or is made active This toolbar is different and unique to each type of analysis being used The Mil 217 analysis toolbar is shown below for example CB B caccwnoseeced The icons shown on the Analysis Toolbar are used for adding various types of Blocks to a System The drop down dialog box in the Toolbar includes a list of Component types in addition to the Blocks that are available to be added to a System Drawing Toolbars A series of seven small drawing toolbars are made active by default when the RBD Markov or Fault Tree window is made active These toolbars will appear along the bottom of ToolKit s workspace and consist of Align Nudge Rotate Layout Canvas Graph and Zoom They contain drawing tools to aid in the creation of professional layouts of reliability system drawings and diagrams T 0 ess E Bg Ht LED z i a E EO Customizing Toolbars ToolKit allows you to add and delete or customize the workspace toolbars You can also create your own custom toolbars that contain the functions you use most frequently Information on custom toolbars is detailed later in this document under the Settings heading Customize Toolbars Command Toolbars Show Tooltips Mew v Cool Look Large Buttons meti Cancel amni Help
194. formation by placing the cursor or clicking in the appropriate fields 208 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Markov System Title Markov Tutorial Description Two identical components that are operated in a warm standby mode Mame Two component standby Part Number Ei LEN Function Description Circuit Ref Analyst M m Compiled By Approved By rl Miscellaneous Mission Time 1 Failure Fate Failure Frequency Ma of Intermediate Time Points 100 Ma of Expected Failures Conditional Failure Intensity Total Down Time LInreliability Unavailability 10 The table below describes what could be entered and what each field and block of fields pertains to Chapter 9 Markov 209 11 The next step is to insert 5 states into the model corresponding to the following system states both components available prime failed standby failed both prime and standby failed and prime repaired 12 From the Markov toolbar click the State button A This button is used to start the insertion of new states into the model 13 Move the mouse pointer into the Markov canvas and click the left mouse button once A green circle representing a newly created state appears 14 Move the mouse pointer to an empty part of the Markov canvas and left click again A second state appears in the diagram 15 Repeat the last step three more times A total of five states s
195. g must be noted when installing the software on a network server THE INSTALLATION MUST BE PHYSICALLY PERFORMED AT THE DESIGNATED NETWORK SERVER AND CANNOT BE DONE FROM A REMOTE WORKSTATION TOOLKIT MUST BE INSTALLED ON THE SERVER BEFORE IT CAN BE INSTALLED ON A NETWORK CLIENT SERVER INSTALLATION REQUIRES FULL ADMINISTRATIVE RIGHTS THE PROGRAM INSTALLATION FOLDER FOR EXAMPLE C Program Files Mtem Toolkit Programs INSTALLED ON THE NETWORK SERVER MUST BE SHARED BETWEEN THE NETWORK SERVER AND CLIENT WORKSTATION NETWORK CLIENT MUST HAVE FULL ACCESS RIGHTS TO THE PROGRAMS FOLDER FOR EXAMPLE C Program Files tem Toolkit Programs INSTALLED ON THE NETWORK SERVER Installing the Network Server Version of the Software The Install Wizard will guide you through simple steps for installing ITEM ToolKit Please complete the following steps e Insert the ToolKit CD into your CD ROM drive e If the Auto Run feature is not activated choose Run from the Start Menu The Run dialog box appears Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit 23 Type the name of a program Folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open iE For you hd o Cancel Browse In the Run dialog box type D setup replace the letter D with the correct letter for your CD ROM drive Click OK to activate the installation program If the Auto Run feature is activated the following screen appears PRODUCTS CU
196. ght of a parallel arrangement may be given a vote number H to indicate how many success paths must be available through the parallel arrangement if a vote number is not specified only one path is available When you are finished entering node parameters click OK I to save the changes and close the dialog box Mode Parameters Description Mame Part Number Circuit Ret Yoke Number Group Labels v Spelling Cancel Constructing Sub Systems To construct a sub system L 2 3 In the RBD tab click the block for which you want to create a sub system On the RBD toolbar click the Page Down icon A An empty RBD diagram appears Add the nodes blocks and connections for the sub system B 166 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide p RBD 1 IT Item ToolKit Project RBD a File Add Edit Layout Settings Analysis Chart Window Help tf jm x Duk 8 xo8 M S PROJECT IT Project Predi T RBD Systems Node 1 1 wm Node 1 Em Block 1 wm Mode 1 1 fm Block 1 1 m Node 1 2 Ta Ta Bw Block 1 2 i Result For Help press F1 Blocks 4 Modes 4 4 When the sub system is complete click the Page Up icon on the RBD toolbar C to return to the upper level The block icon changes to indicate the presence of a sub system D Block 1 Setting the RBD View ToolKit s RBD module contains features that make it easy to create and customize an RBD system In the diagram tab you can Use Au
197. gn you determine that if that capacitor was open one failure mode the display would appear with wavy lines the failure effect If the capacitor was shorted a second failure mode the monitor would go blank The second failure would be ranked as more critical than the first because the monitor becomes completely unusable Once FMECA has identified failures you can explore ways to prevent the failure or to lessen their criticality 2 ITEM ToolKit amp FMECA Analysis The ITEM ToolKit FMECA Module provides the full framework for performing a FMECA with the MIL STD 1629A IEC 61508 ISO 9000 and ISO 26262 standards Its interactive graphical facilities allow you to construct a block hierarchy representing the logical connection between the sub systems and components constituting the overall plant or system This hierarchy may be extended to represent failure modes at various hierarchical levels One of the most powerful features of the FMECA module is its ability to automatically trace failure effects severity values and failure causes through the system hierarchy The program automatically calculates failure rates and criticality values The FMECA module also filters detectable and non detectable failures in reports and determines the ratio between the frequency of detectable failures and total failures Creating a well documented FMECA system requires a large amount of text entry The FMECA Module provides a phrase table facility which contain
198. gram Files and NOT the full path Full ReadWrite access to this director is also required ie Network File Share License Path L Program Files Browse TEP AP If vou are unsure of these settings contact your Network Administrator Fart Number Server IP Address Cancel For Network File Share connection type click Browse to select the path from the client workstation to the directory containing the program on the Network Server The Path dialog box appears Choose Folder Please choose the installation Folder My Documents a 4 My Computer E Get Graham iT Ei DYD RAM Drive D Shared Documents Graham Coe s Documents m d Nera Scout So My Network Places 80 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Select the folder on the Network Server where the ITEM ToolKit program files have been installed click OK and click Next to continue For TCP IP connection type enter the Port Number and Server IP Address If you are unsure of these settings please contact your Network Administrator Click Next to continue The Select Program Folder dialog box appears To accept the Item Software folder click Next To create a new folder type the name of the new folder in the Program Folder box and then click Next To select an existing folder locate the desired folder in the Existing Folders list select it and then click Next ITEM ToolKit Version 2 0 0 Select Program Folder Please select a
199. h Telecom Standard Electronic System Add a 299B Chinese Military Standard Electronic System Add a NSWC Mechanical System Add a Maintain MIL HDBK 472 Procedure V System Add a Spare Cost Spares Scaling and Ranging System Add a Failure Modes Effects and Criticality Analysis FMECA System Add a Reliability Block Diagram RBD System Add a Fault Tree Analysis FTA System Add an Event Tree Analysis ETA System Add a Markov Modeling System The SpareCost Toolbar is used to create and control SpareCost Analysis through the commands it contains IM Tool Name ty Select B Block e Replaceable Item D Start Maintain Analysis Description Cancels add mode Creates a Block into the Maintain System Creates a Replaceable Item into the Maintains System Allows the user to perform the necessary calculations of the analysis Chapter 11 SpareCost 253 Shortcut Keys Key Ctr N Ctrl O Ctrl S Ctrl P Ctrl X Ctrl C Ctrl V Ctrl W Del Fl Function Open a new project Open an existing document Displays the Open dialog box in which you can locate and open the desired file Save the active project with its current name If you have not named the project the Save As dialog box will open Print the Active View Remove selected data from the document and stores it on the clipboard Copy the selection to the clipboard Paste the contents of the clipboard at the insertion point
200. hat was performed Toggle Grid Turn display of the grid on and off snap to Grid Toggle the snap to grid feature on and off Toggle Page Bounds Turn display of page boundaries on and off Shortcut Kevs Key Function Ctrl N Open a new project Open an existing document Displays the Open dialog box in which you can locate and open the Ctrl O i desired file Ctrl S Save the active project with its current name If you have not named the project the Save As dialog box will open Ctr P Print the Active View Ctrl X Removes selected data from the document and stores it on the clipboard Ctrl C Copy the selection to the clipboard Ctrl V Paste the contents of the clipboard at the insertion point Del Delete the selection Fl Open the ITEM ToolKit On line Help Chapter 8 Fault Tree 177 CHAPTER 8 Fault Tree Analysis Fault Tree Analysis FT A is used during Reliability and Safety assessments to graphically represent the logical interaction and probabilities of occurrence of component failures and other events in a system The interactions are captured using a tree structure of Boolean operator gates which decomposes system level failures to combinations of lower level events The analysis of such Fault Trees identifies and ranks combinations of events leading to system failure and provides estimates of the system s failure probability This chapter 1 Introduces FTA systems 2 Describes Toolkit s FTA features 3
201. hould now be visible in the Markov canvas 16 Weconsider that at time 0 both the primary and standby components are available and that the system therefore is in the first state In other words this state is the initial state 17 Right click the state S1 corresponding to the both components available state A popup menu appears 210 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide db Cut ig Copy 3 Paste Order d Properties Set Property 45 Default w AutoFit Text Select Phase Skate Parameters 18 From the popup menu select the State Parameters option A dialog box will appear 19 In the dialog box enter both available for the Name and check the Initial State option and click OK 4 Markov State j Hi Groups Mame STATE Initial State Probability Unavailability State Initial state Description Group Labels Spelling Sa Cancel State parameters include the following e Name a label used to identify the state The names of each state must be unique among all the states in a Markov model e Initial state probability a value between O and 1 representing the probability that the system is in the specific state at t 0 The initial probabilities of all states in a model must add up to 1 e Unavailability state a flag indicating whether the state represents a system state in which the system is unavailable The Markov model diagram indicates states for
202. i Analyse Run the Analysis of the system w Check Spelling Check the Spelling of the selected Text The Project Toolbar The Project Toolbar displays the available analysis options for the ToolKit application A A A A A PSEA uS Tool Name A4 MIL217 AL Telcordia Bellcore A IEC 62380 RDF JL 299B at NSWC Mechanical JI Maintain oh SpareCost Y FMECA E RBD A Fault Tree Event Tree Tia Markov The Maintain Toolbar Chapter 10 MainTain 237 Description Add a MIL HDBK 217 Electronic System Add a SR 332 Telcordia Electronic System Add an IEC 62380 French Telecom Standard Electronic System Add a 299B Chinese Military Standard Electronic System Add a NSWC Mechanical System Add a Maintain MIL HDBK 472 Procedure V System Add a Spare Cost Spares Scaling and Ranging System Add a Failure Modes Effects and Criticality Analysis FMECA System Add a Reliability Block Diagram RBD System Add a Fault Tree Analysis FTA System Add an Event Tree Analysis ETA System Add a Markov Modeling System The Maintain Toolbar is used to create and control Maintain Analysis through the commands it contains beera h e e e Name Select Block Replaceable Item Start Maintain Analysis Description Cancels add mode Creates a Block in the Maintain System Creates a Replaceable Item in the Maintain System Allows the user to perform the necessary calculations of the analysis 238
203. ications before continuing and then click rest Cancel e Click Next and the following Setup Type dialog box appears ITEM ToolKit Version 4 0 0 Setup Type Choose the setup type that best suits pour needs Click the type of installation you require License Sever we Description Network Client For Server Installations which da Network Server not require the Full program on the Standalone Server Miew Only Client Cancel e Choose License Server and click Next The License Agreement dialog box appears Read the license agreement carefully and click Yes to accept or No to decline If you click No the setup program closes 44 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide e The Customer Information dialog box appears Type the user name and the company name in the appropriate boxes and then click Next ITEM ToolKit Version 0 0 Customer Information Please enter your information Please enter your name and the name of the company For whom you work User Mame Company Name ITEM Software USA Inc Back Cancel e The Choose Destination Location dialog box appears To choose a destination folder that the programs file should be installed into click Next to accept the default destination folder or click Browse select an alternate folder then click Next NOTE 77e destination folder must be shared on the network to provide access to all network clients ITEM ToolKit Ver
204. icrocomputer S A Maintain Systems Name ABCSYS FMECA MIL STD 1 S nie Systems Part Number I GER HHE RBD Systems 8 ISSN TL E EN A ETA F LCN F ab LE um be f Analyst Function Life Time Hours 1 Description Compiled By Approved By Use Weighted Criticality Method T Normalize Apportionments M C Documents and Settings Gemina Pa Of ABESYS FMECA MIL STD 16294 f 1 POWER SUPPLY amp f 2 CPU BOARD Bl 3 MEMDRY UNIT c fl 31 RO0M BOARD f 3 1 1 SPLIT FIBRILAT f 3 1 2 1 C DIGITAL Notes IT Item ToolKit C Documents and Settings Gemina PakeWy Documents DemoS SD MAN LocalMext Le BUPPLY 5RD MEMORY UNIT MiL217 Faut Tree FMECA a 3 1 7 CAPACITOR Fb ff 32 RAM BOARD m Intermittent Operation a 3 2 1 UNDULATOR 5 m 0 2 Negligible Effect for small changes E m p mp fl 323 CAPACITOR FI moa Veterum f 3 24 RESISTOR FIXE E i fl 325 C DIGITAL se Nj No operation f 3 2 6 CONNECTOR F F Dialog TH Grid For Help press F1 Comps 114 NUM 154 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide The FMECA editor can be made visible by selecting the Dialog Tab 1 or the Grid Tab 2 Its main elements are the following e Main Menu 3 Quick access to the main functions FMECA Toolbar 4 Quick access to editing functions Project Window 5 A hierarchical view of the project and systems
205. ified and controlled Parts and materials must be selected which can withstand these stresses Derating is the selection and application of parts and materials so that the applied stress is less than rated for a specific application For example derating is the negative slope of a power versus temperature graph It shows that as the operating ambient temperature increases the output power of a particular component drops to ensure reliable system operation Derating curves provide a quick way to estimate the maximum output power of a device at a given temperature Following are several derating standards that are included within ToolKit NAVSEA TE000 AB GTP 010 Parts Derating Requirements and Application Manual for Navy Electronic Equipment MIL HDBK 1547 Electronic parts materials and processes for space and launch vehicles MIL STD 975M NASA Part selection for electrical electronic and electromechanical parts used in the design and construction of space flight hardware in space missions as well as essential ground support equipment GSE NAVAIR AS 4613 Class A B C Application and Derating requirements for electronic components General specification F For all ToolKit prediction modules you can choose a derating standard to use for the components in the system Once a standard has been chosen each component indicates if its current stress levels are within the derating standard or not Graphical displays of the situation are availab
206. ilability Analyze Uncertainty and Sensitivity Analysis Common Cause Failure CCF Produce minimal cut set Fault Tree Sequencing Initiator and Enabler Initiator Only Enabler Only Determine the importance of elements in a system NOTE Before performing analysis follow the procedure in Verifying Data to identify and correct any errors in the system You cannot perform analysis until all errors are corrected To Verify the Data 1 Select Verify Data from the Analysis Option in the menu Toolbar Analysis Chart Window Help Verify Data dU Perform Perform All Faulk Trees Ctrl F Status Summary Critical Path Retain Results For d Exclude Failed Logic Events p 3 Chapter 8 Fault Tree 189 If no errors are detected the following windows will be displayed Advisory Msg FT Analvsis completed Without errors If the following window appears correct the detected errors and repeat the step 1 ITEM ToolKit Verification Results Warning Failure model nat defined For event EVEMT1 Fault Tree Verification completed with warnings Total Msgs 2 m Filter Update iv Errors iv Warnings Show Msgs 100 OK Cancel To Analyze the System L 2 In the System Window click the system header From the Analysis Menu select Perform A dialog box displaying the progress of the analysis appears Analysis Chart Window Help verify Data GO Perform Perfo
207. ilure Similarly defining the top event too narrowly leads to possible cause omissions An FTA needs to include all possible weaknesses faults or failures present in the system that could cause safety hazards or reliability problems Hardware software and human components of the system must be included in the Fault Tree Analysis All interactions between the system components and elements must be fully described in the FTA An FTA provides a method to e Calculate unreliability and unavailability Analyze Uncertainty and Sensitivity Analysis Common Cause Failure CCF Produce minimal cut sets Fault Tree Sequencing Initiator and Enabler Initiator Only Enabler Only Define event failure models Determine the importance of elements in a system 2 ITEM ToolKit amp Fault Tree Analysis Fault Tree Analysis is one of the many modules within the ITEM ToolKit application Item Software s Fault Tree module can provide useful failure probability and system reliability data concerning the likelihood of a failure and the means by which such a failure could occur With the detailed output of each Fault Tree Analysis efforts to improve system safety and reliability can be highly focused and tailored to your system by using the quantifying results from the data you input Additionally a Fault Tree Analysis can help prevent a failure from occurring beforehand by the analysis of the system data you input Binary Decision Diagram BDD The ITEM To
208. ilure mode only used with the FMECA systems Library System Window The Library System window is located in the middle of the workspace default location This system window stores a library of frequently used systems blocks and components that helps save time and effort in constructing future systems The user can create their own custom libraries of components blocks and even entire systems for later use in future projects Item Software also has several application specific libraries available that contain thousands of components and their reliability data The convention for icons and line items listed in the Library System window are the same as the regular System window discussed above E ca E Block 1 FR24 534843 MTBF221 7630 55 Bubble memory 1 1 FA 0 3949291 7 MTBF 225 E Capacitor 1 2 FHz0 0101888537 MTBF238148 of Circuit Breaker 1 3 FR 0 34 MTBF 29411 76 5 Cai 1 4 FR23 7317387e 5 MTBF22 5735722e Connector 1 5 FRz 7 0000002e 5 MTBF 1 42 Connector General 1 5 FHzD 0025371763 MT Connector Socket 1 7 FR zB 0006194339375 M Detector lsolator Emit 1 8 FR 0 00091 490604 Diode High Frequency 1 9 FR 2 851 GSE MT Diode Low Frequency 1 10 FR 0 009281 4323 Micro Digital 1 11 FR20 034358135 MTBF 225 Micro EEPROM 1 12 FRiz 081567302 MTBF Micro Ga amp s Digital 1 1 3 FRH20 010444781 MT 17 Fault Tree 86 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide The Data View Window
209. ingle board sub assembly or an entire system The system can then be broken down into sub blocks components and or functions l Select the Add menu from the menu toolbar by clicking on it A Chapter 6 FMECA 135 ae A pee al MIL 217 Syscen PU Bellcore System AL RDF System JL 2998 System ru Mechanical System ps MainT ain System oh Sparecast System M aIFMECA System iE RED System I Fault Tree System Event Tree Ta Markow System Select and click on the FM FMECA System B The project will display as a FMECA in the project window C and the applicable system data will display in the system window From the Project window select the FMECA System by clicking on it The System dialog box will be displayed The System level has two windows in which data can be entered Block Info and Mode Info Enter your system information by placing the cursor or clicking in the appropriate fields The table below describes what could be entered and what each field and block of fields pertains to goa R B3 Block Info E3 Mode Info E Detectahility B3 Diagnostic Coverage SFF FMECA System Info Title Description Namei FMECRO Part Number n B NF Analyst um j Life Time Hours HN oo ved Compiled By Approved By a 4 Use Weighted Criticality Method Normalize Apportionments D Standard IEC 61508 Y Calc Engine Mode Basic Mode v Mission Phase z
210. ins of events i e transitions within systems which in the case of reliability and availability analysis correspond to sequences of failures and repair Maintain The Maintain module provides an integrated environment for predicting the expected number of hours that a system or a device will be inoperative or down while it undergoes maintenance A comprehensive design tool for calculating MTTR Maintain conforms to maintenance standards established in MIL HDBK 472 Procedure V Method A SpareCost The SpareCost module Calculates spares required for equipment supported at Sites First and Second line maintenance by replacement and Bases Third line maintenance to support Sites and the repair of returned defective spares It optimizes scale of spares at Sites for minimum cost SpareCost produces full information of spares holding by replaceable item at both Site and Base Expected number of failures for each component over a defined period is also output SpareCost generates spares holding required at sites against a stock out risk at the Site This scale of spares is optimized against the cost of the spares held Event Tree Analysis Event tree analysis is based on binary logic in which an event either has or has not happened or a component has or has not failed It is valuable in analyzing the consequences arising from a failure or undesired event Event tree analysis is generally applicable for almost any type of risk assessment
211. ion Circuit Reference Quantity Total F Rate Con 1 Block Block 1 0 15442412 34 13 7 Block 1 Block FR 0 15442412 MTBF 2 Block Block 1 0 29798281 65 86 Capacitor 1 1 Capacitor FR 0 010 Micro EEPROM 1 2 Micro EEPRC Transistor LF FET 1 3 Transistor L Block 2 Block FR 0 29798281 MTBF Pi Fa Capacitor 2 1 Capacitor FR 0 010 Name Category Part Number Description Circuit Reference aig Micro VHSIC VLSI CMOS 2 2 Mici am Diode Low Frequency 2 3 Diode L lt gt EX Dialog 88 Grid 8 Diagram Lat Chart Resul For Help press F1 Blocks 2 Comps 6 3 Click on the Block header C in the System Window to display the detailed results for the selected block IT Item ToolKit Project Result File Add Edit Layout Settings Chart Window Help x D W amp amp Xn 9 N amp C C B Category Not Selected alx as Pi Rate Block B PROJECT IT Project Prediction 1 _ l Parameter Value MIL 217 Systems FR 0 4524 Failure Rate 0 15442412 gm MIL 0 FR 0 45240694 0 Ss Failure Rate a Name Category Part Number Description Circuit Reference Quantity Total F Rate Cc E Block Block 1 0 15442412 34 1 1 Capacitor Capacitor 1 0 010188597 6 5 1 2 Micro EEPROM Micro EEPROM 1 0 081567302 521 4 13 Transistor LF FET Transistor LF FET 1 0 061219212 391 i gt Si Pi Factors Lai Name Category Par
212. ion number and system configuration information available so that the ITEM Software technical support staff can process your support requests as efficiently as possible Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit 9 CHAPTER 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit ITEM ToolKit is designed to install quickly from the CD included in the software package The default product directory for ToolKit is C Program Files Item Toolkit ToolKit is compatible with the uninstall utility included in 32 bit Windows operating systems ToolKit is copy protected using a Software Key Licensing System A license ID and password are required for activation of the ToolKit modules The software will run in the Demo Mode as part of the default setting until the activation numbers license ID password or software keys have been entered After completing the installation process visit the Customer Area of our website or contact one of our offices to obtain the Activation Keys Although the specific steps for installing ToolKit vary depending on the type of Software License purchased and the installation you perform all installations follow the same general steps These steps include Installing the software Activating the software Verifying the software Loading the reliability analysis libraries 1 Standalone Installation ITEM ToolKit supports five types of installations Standalone Network Server Network License Server Network Client and View Only Client This chapter will
213. is is complete the Verification Msg dialog box appears Click OK 271 272 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Advisory Msg 4 The Event Tree canvas is also updated with the analysis results in the Result column uv Fire Detected Fire Alarm Starts Sprinkler Starts eee p ee d p Minimum Damage W 1 Seg Q 0 00000096 Seq w 5 624 Sprinkler System is i p activated F Fire Alarm Starts i Successfully ailure Damage No Loss of Life W 2 Seq Q 0 000063 Seq w 5 624 Sprinkler System i p does not Activate Fire is Detected by i H i the Detection System p Limited Damage Wet people W 7 Seq Q 0 00000687 Seq w 5 624 Sprinkler System is gt i i ajlure activated hiliato Fire Alarm does not p Fire Starts in the Start ailure Major Damage and Loss ofLife Seq Q 0 000453 Seq w 5 624 Main Building Sprinkler System W 90 i i does not Activate i ailure i ailure i ailure Major Damage and Loss of Life Sey Q 0 000843 Sey w 5 624 Fire is not Detected Fire Alarm does not Sprinkler System W 90 bv the Detection i Start does not Activate 5 Select Summary from the Analysis menu to view the results The Event Tree Results dialog box appears O mE O ET Results diras Ex cl Make Dosage aral Los of Lie Comequerce d rain Suatentry Fre Pretec Spit nun Ek ORE e Fira Proteckion Saher ie 4 mW Lirusha Cr fpa d i Pa 6 amp afeky Unareaka
214. it a few moments until the blue screen disappears before continuing Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit 17 Activating the Software Once the software is installed it must be activated If the software is not activated only the demonstration mode features will be available To activate ToolKit From the Start Menu select Programs gt Item Software gt ITEM ToolKit or click on the ITEM ToolKit icon in your desktop Success e The Success dialog box appears Click OK e The Demo Notification dialog box appears Select one of the unlock options 4 Demo Notification This is an evaluation version of ITEM Toolkit For technical or sales enquiries please contact ITEM Software in USA 714 935 2900 or ITEM Software in Europe 44 0 1489 885085 Visit ITEM Software Website 30 days left in the evaluation period Unlock by Email Unlock Online Unlock by PRone Continue e Selecting Unlock by Email opens the following dialog Unlock By Email Mame Email Phone Murmber Company Mame Customer ID User Code 1 239855821 User Code 3598961 Message cae 18 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Enter the required information and click Send An email will be sent to Item Software with your activation request Once you have received a reply containing your activation codes enter them in the Program Activation Dialog see Unlock by Phone Selecting Unlock Online opens the following
215. it for further analysis Link Facility ToolKit offers dynamic link capabilities and allows information to be linked between SpareCost Module and other modules within ToolKit 3 Creating a SpareCost Project To demonstrate ToolKit s SpareCost features we ll create an example based on the following One Army Regiment will be deployed in the Middle East for 6 months The Command Post shelter is mounted on a HEMTT and is fitted with five computer workstation We will use SpareCost to determine the Site and Base spare results and cost the Site and Base Stock Out Risk and optimized the number of spare at the site for those five computers Repair Lead Time 5 Days Army Technical Depot Replenishment Period 24 Months Base Total Number Fitted 1 Overall Utilization 100 5 Computers including One 19 VGA Monitor MTBF 3600 hrs FR 277 8 FPMH One Pentium 4 PC MTBF 5040 hrs FR 198 4 FPMH Battalion Command Post Shelter One Standard Keyboard MTBF 2880 hrs FR 347 2 FPMH Site One Serial Mouse MTBF 2160 hrs FR 463 FPMH Unsupported Period 6 months Average Utilization 100 Click on the New Project icon A on the default toolbar or select New Project from the File menu Activate your project by clicking on the Project tab B or in the Project window Select the Dialog tab from the bottom of the Viewing Option window The Project Dialog Box will be displayed pope ES 242 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Gui
216. ite UTE July 2000 IEC 62380 is a universal model for reliability prediction of electronics printed circuit boards and equipment which takes directly into account the influence of the environment Environmental factors are no longer used as they are replaced by mission profile undergone by the equipment The module can handle permanent working on off cycling and dormant applications CHINA 299B The 299B module supports methods of reliability prediction as described in Chinese 299B standard 299B is a reliability prediction guide for electronic parts in both commercial and military industries The standard provides the user with the opportunity to take into account the environmental conditions quality levels and stress conditions The module provides procedures to perform Parts Stress Analysis as well as Parts Count Analysis Chapter 5 Predictions 109 3 Creating a Prediction Project To demonstrate ToolKit s Prediction s Modules features we ll create an example MIL 217 project Creating a MIL 217 system consists of Constructing the project system Adding Blocks Components Editing their Information Performing analysis Constructing the Project Click on the New Project icon A on the default toolbar or select New Project from the File menu Activate your project by clicking on the Project tab or in the Project window B Select the Dialog tab from the bottom of the Viewing Option window C The Project Dialog Box will be dis
217. ith ToolKit ToolKit will allow you to create or open multiple projects simultaneously Projects can consist of many different SpareCost systems that can also be analyzed simultaneously Merge all or a portion of each system together to create a master SpareCost project This powerful option will enable you to manage many different projects and systems create a new system by reusing all or a portion of an existing system that has been analyzed plus copy paste blocks and components between projects and or systems User Defined Master Library Analyze your system once and create multiple libraries containing component and block information ToolKit will allow you to create and open multiple libraries This time saving feature will shorten the time for constructing a new SpareCost system The analyzed components can simply be added to a new SpareCost System by using the drag and drop or copy and paste feature Powerful Editing ToolKit offers many different ways for modifying or editing the information pertaining to components blocks and systems Edit information via the dialog view and the grid view Chapter 11 SpareCost 241 Powerful Customizable Reports ToolKit offers standard and preformatted reports and allows you to create and customize new reports Transfer Facility ToolKit s Transfer Facility allows the entire SpareCost system or a selected block or component within the system to be transferred to other analysis modules within ToolK
218. ject System and Library windows include a pop up scroll menu which is activated by clicking the right mouse key while pointing anywhere on the scroll bar This scroll menu is helpful with very large files such as Library files and large system files Menu selections allow the user to easily initiate major moves to new locations within the data such as the top or bottom of the data list E T f 2 3 CAPACITOR FIXED CSA 5 B 24 RESISTOR FIXED ALR Window a fl 2 5 RESISTOR FIXED ACA Scroll Bar 8 J j 3 MEMORY UNIT Scroll Here f 31 RO0M BOARD m E 3 2 RAM BOARD ins f 321 uNDULATOR Bottom Window E f 3 2 2 CAPACITOR FIXED CK ers Scroll Menu Pe fJ 323 CAPACITOR FIKEDCL ep f 324 RESISTOR FIXED ACR 797 70 fl 325 0 DIGITAL Scroll Lip ii T fal oe PCR ai ScolDown J ED Resizing ToolKit Windows Another feature that allows expanding the active window viewing area is the split screen control id f located between the Project Window System Window and the Data Window Passing the mouse pointer through this area will help locate this control The pointer changes from a simple arrow to a double solid line with small arrows pointing up and down or left and right Once the pointer has changed you can press and hold the left mouse button while dragging the mouse which will resize the outer boundaries of the window Moving ToolKit Windows ToolKit windows except for the Data view windows can be m
219. k File Share License Path L Program Files Browse TEPAP If uou are unsure of these settings contact your Network Administrator Port Number Server P Address l For Network File Share connection type click Browse to select the path from the client workstation to the directory containing the program on the Network Server The Path dialog box appears Choose Folder Please choose the installation Folder Directories E Desktop E My Documents Eg My Computer H Get Graham C i DYD RAM Drive D Shared Documents 5 Graham Coe s Documents E d Mera Scaut p So My Network Places L j cae 64 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide e Select the folder on the Network Server where the ITEM ToolKit program files have been installed click OK and click Next to continue e For TCP IP connection type enter the Port Number and Server IP Address If you are unsure of these settings please contact your Network Administrator Click Next to continue e The Select Program Folder dialog box appears To accept the Item Software folder click Next To create a new folder type the name of the new folder in the Program Folder box and then click Next To select an existing folder locate the desired folder in the Existing Folders list select it and then click Next ITEM ToolKit Version 2 0 0 Select Program Folder Please select a program folder Setup will add program icons
220. ke a copy of the B amp C worksheet and paste it into the Physical and Application worksheets Now you have the same data in three different worksheets within the same Excel file 4 Save and Close your Excel file Chapter 14 Import Export 295 2 Importing the Bill of Materials into ToolKit Ready for Import With this properly formed set of worksheets you are ready to begin the import process Open create a new ITK Project file add a MIL 217 System to the Project and be sure it is selected in the System window 1 Click File Import If the Save As dialog appears save your Project file before continuing The Import Wizard dialog now appears Import Wizard File w SEES Step 1 of 4 Import Wizard Pathname Browse Farmat Microsoft Jet Database Refresh Tables Be sure to select Excel If you have saved a successful import template select it here to avoid remapping Cancel 2 Since we are using an Excel file in this example select Excel in the Format field and Browse to locate your Excel file Click Next 3 Inthis step you map the individual worksheets to the MIL 217 output tables for the import processing Start with the Block and then match the Physical and Application to the respective Output tables Only match Input Tables that have a at the end of their name 296 Item ToolKit Tutorial Import Wizard File Import Wizard Input Tables Output Tables Blocks amp C
221. ks with failure rates of zero Failure modes with no assigned effects To verify FMECA data 1 Inthe System Window click the system header 2 Fromthe Analysis Menu select Verify Data 3 Ifthe system contains errors the Verification Results dialog box displays all relevant error message numbers and the message text Use the information in the Verification Results dialog box to make corrections before performing system analysis ITEM ToolKit Verification Results Save Warning Causes not defined For component Failure mode 1 1 2 Warning Causes not defined For component Failure mode 1 1 3 Warning Causes nat defined For component Failure made 1 1 4 Warning Causes not defined For component Failure mode 1 2 1 Warning Causes not defined For component Failure mode 1 2 2 Ta Warning Causes not defined For component Failure mode 1 2 3 Warning Causes not defined For component Failure mode 1 2 4 Filter Warning Causes not defined For component Failure mode 1 3 1 Warning Causes not defined For component Failure mode 1 3 2 Update Warning Causes not defined For component Failure mode 1 3 3 Warning Causes not defined Far component Failure mode 1 3 4 Iv Errors Total Msgs Co cn CH ee a re Warning Causes not defined For component Failure mode 1 4 1 i Warnings Warning Causes not defined For component Failure mode 1 4 2 Warning Causes not defined For component Failure mode 1 5 1 Warning Causes not defined for component
222. l view of the project and systems System Window 5 A hierarchical view of the system blocks and RIs Library Window 6 A hierarchical view of the components library Dialog Window 7 The area in which Maintain can be edited 236 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide The Default Toolbar Immediately below the pull down options resides a group of buttons that form a Default Toolbar allowing the user to access directly some of the more frequently used menu options Default X D cR Xo amp Vv he Name Description New Opens a new project Open Open an existing document The ToolKit displays the Open dialog box in which you can locate and open the desired file save the active document or template with its current name If you have not named the BENE document the ToolKit displays the Save As dialog box Cut Remove selected data from the document and stores it on the clipboard Copy Copy the selection to the clipboard Paste Paste the contents of the clipboard at the insertion point Delete Item Delete the selection s e 5 X 8 8 amp 8 Undo Reverse the last editing Note You cannot undo some actions Print Print the active document About Open the About ITEM ToolKit Window Help Open the ITEM ToolKit On line Help The Maintain Dialog Window Controls The Maintain Dialog Window Contains the following Controls O my Tool Name Description Kj Undo Changes Cancels the latest operation m
223. lability By Order ues E a Max Sorted Sets 500 Unavailability D Quantification Method Miscellaneous Esan Proschan C Rae Use Max Risk Dormant Model bef aidularsg _ Common Cause Failure Life Time ie O Modularize independant sub pages 4 Perform CCF No of Intermediate as Uncertainty Time Points F Perform Sample Size 200 Percentile 28 Hotes 12 Enter your system information by placing the cursor or clicking in the appropriate fields 13 The information entered here is for the system level The table below describes what could be entered and what each field and block of fields pertains to oO Chapter 8 Fault Tree 18 Field Name Cut Off by Probability or by Order can be selected If you select the Probability box enter the Unavailability and the Frequency cut off rate for this project Click the Order box if you wish to have an Order Cut Off If you select this box you must then enter the Cut Off value total for this project Select whether you wish to Sort Cut Sets by Unavailability by Frequency or by Order and enter the maximum amount of sort sets Click Off if you do not wish to use Sort Cut Sets Cut Sets are a group of events that when occurring together will cause system failure Cut Off Sort Cut Sets Click the box to Use Maximum Risk Dormant Model for this analysis then enter the project lifetime given in hours and the total number of immediate time
224. lability by frequency or by order and enter the maximum amount of sort sets Click Off if you do not wish to use Sort Cut Sets Description Enter the description for this System Function Description Enter the purpose Description of this system Notes Enter any other pertinent information about this system Click this box if you wish to perform an Uncertainty Analysis If you select this box you must then enter the Sample Size and the Percentile Miscellaneous Select the option you wish to use Editing the Event Tree Diagram Creating an Event Tree system automatically generates a default Diagram starting at the left side with an initiating event Sort Cut Sets Uncertainty column A followed by 3 events column B C D the consequence column E and the result column F Click on the Event Tree Diagram view G to see the diagram 264 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Fire Starts Fire Detected Fire Alarm Starts Sprinkler System Starts CONSEQUENCE RESULT Fire Starts in Maln Bullding Are detoted by De eoton sycem barry System is Activated Sprinkler System I1 Activated i xd A Maintain Systems A SpareCost Systems E RED Systems A Fault Tree Systems HHA Markov Systems HA Event Tree Systems ids il ee 1E Fire Protection System oT me f Pipe Break 1E Loss of Coolant Acciden Efi OLA v soo Example hilak B1 TE e in PI Bulding Failure zB 12 Fallure
225. larm DOES NOT Start Sprinkler System DOES NOT D B6 Fire Alarm Detection System Activate i cess B11 Spi i i i a ure B12 Sprin Failure B3 Fire is NOT De i Failure B8 Fire Alarm i i i JT Failure B16 Sprin i Dilog 8H Gid E EventTee h Chat Result Hi LE n la 57 H For Help press F1 Columns 4 Branches 11 NUM The Event Tree editor can be made visible by selecting the Dialog Tab 1 or the Event Tree Tab 2 Its main elements are the following Main Menu 3 Quick access to the main functions Default Toolbar 4 Quick access to the more frequently used menu options Event Tree Toolbars 5 Quick access to Event Tree editing functions Diagram Editing Toolbar 6 Quick access to Diagram editing functions Project Window 7 A hierarchical view of the project and systems System Window 8 A hierarchical view of the system blocks connections and nodes Event Tree Window or canvas 9 The area in which the Event Tree can be graphically edited 276 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide The Default Toolbar Immediately below the pull down options resides a group of buttons that form a Default Toolbar allowing the user to access directly some of the more frequently used menu options Tool Name Description amp New Opens a new project au Open an existing document The ToolKit displays the Open dialog box in which you can L Open Mot locate and open the desired file
226. le and Arrange windows These selections apply only to the Data View window This menu also allows you to reopen the following TooIKit windows that may have been closed during your analysis such as Project window System window Library System window plus the Dialog Grid RBD Fault Tree Event Tree Markov Chart and Results Data View windows Window Help Cascade Tile Arrange Icons Project Window System Window Library Window Chart Window Dialog Window Grid Window Diagram Window Result Window Help Menu The Help menu provides access to the online help system and information about the Item software installation Help Help Topics Edit License Kev TCPIIP Client Setup Item Software an the Web P About Item Toolkit You access ToolKit s online Help system the same way that you access Help in a Microsoft document simply click Help Topics on the Help pull down menu Chapter 3 ToolKit Basics 97 4 The ToolKit Toolbars Toolbars provide quick access to ToolKit functions Initially only the Default and Project toolbars are displayed An analysis module toolbar unique to that analysis type will also appear when an analysis module is opened and or is made active Drawing toolbars are also made active by default when analysis modules that include a drawing RBD Markov and Fault Tree are made active Default Toolbar Immediately below the pull down options resides a group of buttons that form a Default Main Tool
227. le for ease in identifying problem areas Parametric displays are also available to show the temperature vs stress situation of the component User defined derating standards can also be created They are saved as itd files and are associated with the project file When a project is opened if the components are being derated the associated derating file is applied If the derating file is not available the project will still open normally but you are presented with a warning window and can search for the derating file if desired A derating file manager is also included to help manage the different derating files whether included with ToolKit or user defined 120 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Configuring a System to be Derated Derating is configured at the System level of your project It only impacts component categories that are considered in the various derating standards Optionally you can create your own derating standard to accommodate those components not considered in the standards 1 For a selected system turn on Derating via the Edit menu Edit Layout Settings Chart Window de Cut Ctrl Copy Core E Chri v J Delete Del Find Ctrl F Replace Ctrl F Global Parameters Custom Connections Set To Default Save As Default Mon Operational Derating Renumber LEM Chapter 5 Predictions 121 2 Select the desired Derating standard from the list IT Electronics Prediction
228. lectror Full version 2996 China 2996 Electronics Demo Version Spares Scaling and Rangin Spares Scaling and Ranging Demo version MainTain Maintainability MIL HDBE 472 Procedure w Demo version Check how many Licenses are available If no licenses are available for the module you want to open wait until another client closes their application or purchase additional licenses Server License Information of Network Licenses p Available Licenses Maintenance Expiration Oct 23 2011 Oct 23 2011 Module Mame AIM Mil217 Bellcore Aout FMECA RBD FaultTree EventTree Markor ROFZOO0 2996 Oct 23 2011 pE Sparec ost IainT ain ANI e Click OK when finished Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit 73 5 View Only Client Installation ITEM ToolKit supports five types of installation Standalone Network Server Network License Server Network Client and View Only Client This chapter will provide you the required instruction for installing the software as a View Only Client It contains the following sections What is View Only Client Installation Installing the Software 74 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide What Is View Only Client Installation The view only client mode is an installation type that allows organizations with license servers to install copies of the software that d
229. liance with these standards FMECA addresses reliability and quality problems associated with design manufacturing process safety and environment The FMECA module provides an intuitive graphical interface with multiple options for constructing and performing an analysis With an enhanced hierarchy tree and tabular views designed for user friendly navigation data entry and modification have never been easier The FMECA module provides a coherent comprehensive method for entering data During a FMECA procedure identifying the failure modes and their effects Failure Mode Effect Analysis is often only the beginning Criticality Analysis is where the failure modes are ranked according to a combination of severity and the probability of that failure mode actually occurring ITEM ToolKit provides total flexibility for applying FMECA to the full analysis RBD The RBD module is a systems analysis tool As part of the ITEM ToolKit integrated program the Reliability Block Diagram RBD offers a wide range of capabilities Boolean Algebra expressions are used to determine minimal cut sets or the minimum combination of failures required to cause a system failure Three types of Importance Analysis are included Markov analysis models standby systems with respect to maintenance arrangements RBD calculates system failure frequency values and unavailability In addition to component libraries commonly used failure models can be stored and retrieved for r
230. ling and Ranging System Add a Failure Modes Effects and Criticality Analysis FMECA System RBD Add a Reliability Block Diagram RBD System Fault Tree Event Tree Add a Fault Tree Analysis FTA System Add an Event Tree Analysis ETA System Markov Add a Markov Modeling System 128 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide The MIL 217 Toolbar The MIL 217 Toolbar is used to create and control MIL 217 Systems Milz17 E Ie a P E 8 Category Not Selected Tool Name be End Add Mode C Block Linked Block Hybrid Block Plated Through Block Surface Mount Block INI 4 Resistor Category List The Telcordia Toolbar Description Cancels add mode Creates a Block in MIL 217 Creates a Linked Block in MIL 217 Creates a Hybrid Block in MIL 217 Creates a Plated Through Block in MIL 217 Creates a Surface Mount Block in MIL 217 Add a Block Component from the list The Telcordia Bellcore Toolbar is used to create and control Telcordia Systems Bellcore E PD CacsoyNosekced 7 Tool Name Al End Add Mode al Block Linked Block Hybrid Block Capacitor Y Category List Description Cancels add mode Creates a Block in the Telcordia System Creates a Linked Block in the Telcordia System Creates a Hybrid Block in the Telcordia System Add a Block Component from the list Chapter 5 Predictions 129 The NSWC Mechanical Toolbar The NSWC Toolbar is use
231. lkit C Program Piles item Toolkit VE xamp las MW 700 Crampa TE aloe f gie ki pi and Galtier Guri Wukir Hel eu REX STH NEVERSSTSKES na o PROJECT V 707 xemole Prediction Tola BE MILI Systeme FAZ S511 Qe PECSYS MILT NT FAZE UAA BP ARCAYA MIL 217 EX FRet daimi RS Beera Telesia Systeme FR19 3262 XT aDCSVS DeXCoee 1 302 iue GA E SWC Systems FR 18106654 D H 3 aor iioc Rs E a ih Fl r Einck TI CEU Bond MEE Eroenssc isiBloci 12 Display Menon Una Disp HD plina T Memor Booed ER fF Diock 122 Display Procezser Mb UE of Mien Cig 122 1 40 Dil B Micro Dies 1222 0 DO BE i Mer Dep T5 3 EE pu an Hiero Nor EEPROM 122 4 WE lgie 17 APATI F 5 E 3 MIL 217 EE MIL ZL System Tile mo 217 Ecample Descnpti n ABC Compuber System Model S amp CIXT Waie uxscmuzia MILITE Perla liem Mer cuore es Part Number 101 102 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide 3 Cutting Copying and Pasting Systems To save time and avoid repetitive work you can reuse previously created systems You use the cut copy and paste functions to move systems within or between any projects displayed in the Project window 1 Ensure the projects you want to work with appear in the Project window 2 Inthe Project window right click the header of the system you want to cut or copy A and select the desir
232. lows the user to zoom in by selecting the area to be zoomed in with the left mouse button and zoom out by right clicking Sets the magnification level of the canvas so that all components on the canvas are visible in the view port Sets the magnification level of the canvas so that the selected components are visible in the view port Changes the pointer to a hand and allows the user to grab the canvas with the left mouse button and pan in any direction The Graph Toolbar The Graph Toolbar contains commands that affect the appearance and behavior of the RBD diagram Each selection highlights the way that Blocks and Nodes are connected through the diagram f gg FTT Tool Name Chapter 7 RBD 175 Description Click on the Block Nodes you wish to select on the RBD Diagram and then click on E Edges Entering this symbol to display the Links to the other figures the selected Block Nodes is connected to The Links will flash repeatedly on the screen Click on the Block Nodes you wish to select on the RBD Diagram and then click on la Edges Leaving this symbol to display the Links that is leaving the selected figure and connecting to the next set of connected Block Nodes The Links will flash repeatedly on the screen le All Edges Click on the selected Block Nodes and then click on this symbol to display the connection line that the selected Block Nodes is entering from and going to the Block Nodes close to it
233. lysis Constructing the Project System Click on the New Project icon A on the default toolbar or select New Project from the File menu A Activate your project by clicking on the Project tab B or in the Project window 3 The Project Dialog Box will be displayed IT Item ToolKit Project Dialog i File Add Edit Lavout Settings Chart Window Help a SIM XXEXXXS45S064 9 o v eR Project Title New Project Mame IT Project 00 Part Number PO LEM Circuit Ref Analyst PO Compiled By 4 Enter your project information by placing the cursor or clicking in the appropriate fields 160 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Project Title New Project Description Mame IT Project Part Number Function Description LEM Circuit Ref kotes Analyst Compiled By Approved By Applies to Failure prediction systems contained in this project Totals Target Hate E Failure Rate n Life Time hrs 24 LI niavailability lo Redundancy MTBF hrs E The information entered for a project is only for the project level and its entry is optional The table below displays each field that 1s available for a project and what each field pertains to Function Description Note VUE Life Time mem Failure Rate Will display total Project failure rate once analysis is complete Unavailability The Project unavailability once the
234. med Displays a summary of the analysis Allows the user to create a header and footer for all Fault Tree pages Allows the user to paginate a Fault Tree automatically Allows the user to undo the Auto paginate previously done Allows the user to Fit the Fault Tree diagram in one page automatically Allows the user to undo the Fit in one page previously done The Alien Toolbar Chapter 8 Fault Tree 199 The Align Toolbar contains commands for aligning components with respect to a given anchor component Toupig Tool The Nudge Toolbar Name Align Top Align Middle Align Bottom Align Left Align Center Align Right Description Horizontally aligns the selected components with the top of the anchor component Horizontally aligns the selected components with the center of the anchor component Horizontally aligns the selected components with the bottom of the anchor component Vertically aligns the selected components with the left edge of the anchor component Vertically aligns the selected components with the center of the anchor component Vertically aligns the selected components with the right edge of the anchor component The Nudge Toolbar contains commands for moving the selected components by one logical unit in any direction Name Nudge Up Nudge Down Nudge Left Nudge Right Description Move the selected components one logical unit up Move the selected components one logical unit down Move the
235. mmunication method t Network Client t Network Server License path Browse Service Thread Start Server Service Stop Server Service Install as Service Click OK when finished Cancel Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit Network TCP IP Connections Setup e From the Start Menu select Programs Item Software ITEM ToolKit License Manager ITEM Toolkit Additianal Help Files gt ITEM Toolkit 4 ITEM Toolkit License Manager few Item Software tm Audio Related Programs k ITEM Software Website LJ RecordPad Sound Recorder e The License Manager Dialog box appears Item ToolKit License Manager IT License Server IT License Client Help Computer Info User Name o gt Computer Name nM S PAdkes nc m 2 Item ToolKit License Manager Eiman IT License Client Help License information License Activation H Server configuration SSP aS aX Zz IP Address i Cancel 55 56 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide e The license setup window opens Verify that Network Server is selected A Select TCP IP B Verify the License path C If the path is incorrect click on Browse D and select the folder where the license keys are located Enter the Port Number E Select Service F for execution type and click on Start Server Service G NOTE Selecting Thread for the Server execution type is for
236. mns displayed on the Grid that are being used as filters have an added to the column name Filtering is case sensitive Ordering the rows of data displayed in the Grid can be ordered by key fields in ascending or descending order User Defined Fields you can define additional fields to enter display data on the Grid Additionally these fields can be imported exported from ToolKit along with all other parameter fields for the specific module Row heights the display heights of the header and field rows can be adjusted Styles the style of the column header and fields can also be customized Grid Templates File Grid Template Selection Templates st E 2 2 dE System Templates Fault ree Template Fmeca Templates REC Templates MEX Templates EventTree Templat SpareCost Templat ADF 2000 Template Milz17 Templates Men Default NSWE Templates Bellcore Templates China 29968 Templa Main T ain Template Template Hame Default Filtering 0 Set up filter or criteria to look for components ioe matching specific criteria Hrderina t Select the fields used ta sort components if Set selected template as active grid template for selected syster User Defined Fields 0 Create delete modify user defined fields Available Fields selected Fields 2 Ballast Val Increase P S Symbol 3 COZ Overfil SEEE ae ypa Categor Description Part Number Applicatio
237. n Construct M Quantity Application AM q Failure Rate Application CM Ambient Temperature degC Application GA Environment Application HB 1 Analyst Application HD Motes Application LE LCN Application LD Application LF Application LF Application ME Application OO Application OE Application OL Applied Current fe oe bo Header Row et Fields Row Height 18 4 Column Style Calumn idth Apply following setting to all grid columns Header Style EN Sample Field Style Need d Chapter 16 Grid View Customization 311 3 Switching to a Different Grid Template 1 While in the Grid View use the Settings Grid Templates menu option to select a different Grid template and Set selected template as active grid template for selected system Click OK when ready to return to the Grid View 2 The Grid View is changed to match the Grid template you just selected 4 Exporting and Printing the Grid View Any Grid View can be exported to several different file formats via the File Save Grid menu option Additionally the Grid View can be printed directly via the File Print Print Active View or File Print Preview Print Preview Active View menu options 312 Item ToolKit Tutorial ITEM Software USA 34 Executive Park Suite 210 Irvine California 92614 U S A Telephone 1 714 935 2900 Facsimile 1 714 935 2911 Email sales items
238. n Totals FR 0 A MIL 217 Systems FR 0 pamore NN MIL 217 System Sitp2 scription Title Name Park Number Function Description LON F Circuit Ref Notes Analyst 0 J MIL 217 System MIL 0 FR 0 Quantity 1 Compiled By No On Standby 0 Heer tee MTTR 0 Target Rate 10 Failure Rate 0 Life Time Hours 24 MTEF None Redundancy True Unavailability 0 Ej Dialog Result For Help press F1 Blocks 0 Comps 0 NUM The table below describes what could be entered and what each field pertains to Analyst Unavailability This box will display the System unavailability once the analysis has been run 112 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Adding and Editing Blocks A block may be used to represent a system a sub system or a device board To add blocks into the MIL 217 system hierarchy tree 1 Click on the system in the system Windows A and select the block from the toolbar menu B 2 Place the block cursor on the system in the system window and click once C The new block appears 3 Multiple blocks can be added by repeating step 2 To disable the add block mode select the Release button D IT Item ToolKit C Documents and Settings Gemina Pake uments DemoShield Demoshield Version 6 CD ROM 800 Toolkit efaults Exam SEE la x a File Add Edit Layout Settings Chart Window Help Dg amp K ls 4 y A amp 3 Category
239. n the software RETURN Words in bold capital letters indicate names of keys and key sequences ALT P A hyphen between key names indicates a key combination For example pressing ALT P means to hold down the ALT key while also pressing the P key Chapter 1 Introducing ITEM ToolKit 3 CHAPTER 1 Introducing ITEM ToolKit Welcome to ITEM ToolKit This chapter introduces ITEM ToolKit and provides basic requirement and instructions It contains the following sections 1 What is ITEM ToolKit 2 Hardware and Software Requirements 3 Getting Technical Support The remaining chapters of this guide describe ITEM ToolKit and how you can use it to analyze components systems and projects 1 What is ITEM ToolKit ITEM ToolKit is a suite of comprehensive Reliability Availability Maintainability and Safety modules in a single integrated environment It uses globally recognized standards and methodologies to analyze components systems and projects ITEM ToolKit allows you to take a total system approach while dealing with individual systems and components This enables the user to optimize design targets with respect to component selection increase safety and reduce liability The user can analyze reliability and availability at the component or system level and view the entire project ITEM ToolKit standardizes many critical functions shortcuts and other features that operate identically in each module to save time effort and inc
240. n to return the cursor to the normal mode 17 Select the first blue replaceable item under the system header C and making sure the Dialog tab D is selected fill in the data as shown below IT Item ToolKit Project Dialog M O File Add Edit Layout Settings Chart Window Help Duk 587 Xo amp vw had six a g eee EJ PROJECT IT Project Predi HA Maintain Systems Hi General l Maintenance Element amp Failure Rate Allocation Static Part Number Ps1l Description Power Supply 110 240 VAC Supply Svii2 DC Output Mame 1 1 Circuit Ref Notes LCN Fil Failure Rate o J9 MT f Oty oes Analyst f 1 Power Supply 110 24 Replaceable Item Iv am 1 1 Powe_ Supply T am 1 2 Qty 1 am 1 3 Qty 1 am 1 4 Qty 1 ED Sy Dialog Grid Diagram faf Chart Result For Help press F1 Blocks 1 Comps 4 Main Tain Fault Isolation to a single RI Fault Isolation to a Group of RIs 18 Enter data for the remaining Replaceable Items as follows CPUI CPU Board 8086 Processor on board logic 8 46 MM1 Memory Board 256K RAM 16K ROM 11 41 DPI Display Processor Mk2 Monochrome Display board 1 85 Chapter 10 MainTain 231 Defining the Maintenance Philosophy amp Fault Isolation Resolution for Each Ri Set Select the first RI Replaceable Item in the system and click the Fault Isolation to a Group of RI s in the General dialog tab The Maintenance Philosophy
241. ndo Undo the last command executed on the canvas Redo Redo the last undo that was performed Toggle Grid Turn display of the grid on and off Snap to Grid Toggle the snap to grid feature on and off if Toggle Page Bounds Turn display of page boundaries on and off The Graph Toolbar The Graph Toolbar contains commands that affect the appearance and behavior of the Fault Tree diagram Each selection highlights the way that gates and events are connected through the Fault Tree f qp gms Tool Name Description Click on the gate you wish to select on the Fault Tree and then click on this symbol to E Edges display the connection line to the other figures the selected gate is connected to The connection line will flash repeatedly on the screen Click on the gate you wish to select on the Fault Tree and then click on this symbol to Edges Leaving display the connection line that is leaving the selected figure and connecting to the next set of connected gates and events The connection line will flash repeatedly on the screen kil Click on the gate you wish to select on the Fault Tree and then click on this symbol to display the connection line that the selected gate is entering from the gate above it The P ss iL connection line from the gate on the next level up on the Fault Tree will flash repeatedly on the screen Nodes Click on this symbol to display the connection line from the first node to the second node a The co
242. ndow Help Dae i s mexo Sew RAsesearean xf C Documents and SettingssGemina Y DemLib FMECA 1 DemLib Fault Tree 1 z i ar eph Bab Y JA OR Gate be Cut Ctri x g DemLib RBD 2 n E D M g Fault Tree Systems BASIC rH I dh DemLibFaul Tree tl BASIC X Delete Del BASIC Collapse All Ci AND Eecevren Ux TRANSFER PROT F MIL 217 Event Tree Fault Tree ers a aineina Pa DA DR LEAK Leak IE BASIC PIPE SI AND EXPLOSION ABC EXPLC BASIC CORRC TRANSFER PROTECTION OR LEAK Leak lE BASIC PIPE SPLIT Pir BASIC CORROSION BASIC SPARK Spark Q 1 BASIC SPARK Sp nt Tree Fault Tree 2 Selecta target element in the System Hierarchy and use the right mouse menu Paste command IT Item ToolKit C Documents and Settings Gemina Pake My Document a File Add Edit Layout Settings Analysis Chart Window Help D a bel a xo amp B vNM h Aaaa 2d xl C Documents and SettingssGemina uments and SettingssGem DemLib Fault Tree 1 QL DemLib FMECA 1 HE RED Systems f OR Top Gate TOP GATE Desc i DemLib RED 1 OR Gate 1 GATE 1 Descri BASIC Event 1 EVENT DemLib RBD 2 o 2m ice Sortim BASIC Event 2 EVENT i joi BASIC Event 3 EVENT d DemLibFault Tree 1 BASIC Event 4 EVENT BASIC Event 5 EVENT 2 9 ND EXPLOSION AB TRANSFER PROT OR LEAK Leak IE Ov De
243. net Connections NETWORK CLIENT 1 Local or installation path C Program Files Item Toolkit Programs Server IP Address 127 0 0 I Server Port Number 10000 NETWORK CLIENT 2 Local or installation path C Program Files Item Toolkit Programs Server IP Address 1270 0 1 Server Port Number 10000 SERVER Local or installation path C Program Files Item Toolkit Programs IT_Local_License Port Number 10000 Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit 69 Server path IP Address and Server Port Number should be obtained from your Network Administrator Network File Share Connections Setup e Select Help From the Standard Toolbar and Select TCP IP Client Setup Help Help Topics TCP IP Client Setup Item Software an the Web P About Item Toolkit e The License setup window opens Verify that Network Client is selected A Select Network file share B Verify the License path C If the path is incorrect click on Browse D and select the folder where the license keys are located TCP IP License setup Item Toolkit license setup D Standalone Workstation License communication method Network Server a Network File share License path C Program Files Ikem Toolkit Programs Browse Pork Number Server IP Address Click OK when finished 70 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Network TCP IP Connections Setup e Select Help From the Standard Toolbar and Select TCP IP Client Se
244. ng process and uses severity classifications to show the potential hazards associated with these failures There are two approaches to performing a FMECA The functional approach is applied in projects containing hardware components that cannot be uniquely identified In this scenario the sub system functions are weighed in terms of their function within the system The hardware approach is applied in projects containing hardware components that can be uniquely identified A FMECA is usually applied in two steps Identifying failure modes and their effects FMEA Ranking failure modes according to the combination of severity and the probability of that failure mode occurring Criticality Analysis 132 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide FMECA can be performed at any stage of system design The results from a FMECA are maximized if the analysis is implemented during the early development stages and updated throughout the development This approach also helps to educate system engineers about the system Performing FMECA analysis near the end of the design process minimizes the influence on the system design FMECAs can take many forms but at the core these analyses are used to study a particular system and determine how that system can be modified to improve overall reliability and to avoid failures For example consider a simple FMECA that contains a computer monitor which has a capacitor as its only component By analyzing the desi
245. ngs Window Help Help Topics he Edit License Kev Update License Online TCPJIP Client Setup Check For Undabes ITEM Software on the Web IA bout ITEM Toolkit Iil The About ITEM ToolKit Dialog Box appears and you can check the Version of the software and which modules are in full version or Demo Version About ITEM ToolKit P E Ts Pa EUN ie f l ITEM ToolKit Version 6 0 0 se ee er i M pii d To ITEM SOFTWARE USA INC Knpyright a ee E a Metwork Inka ITEM Software Reliability analysis tools include MIL HDBK 2 1 7F Notice 2 Electronics Full version Bellcore Telcordia SR 332 Issue 2 5R 332 Issue 1 TR 332 Issue 6 Electronics Demo version NEW NSWC OBS LE10 NS WwcC aalLE1 Mechanical Demo version FMEA FMECA MIL STD 16294 IEC 61508 150 9000 Failure Mode Effects and amp Full version Reliability Block Diagram Reliability Block Diagram Demo Version Fault Tree Analysis FTA Demo version Event Tree Analysis ETA Demo Version Markov Modelling MEY Demo Version ROF 2000 IEC 62380 TR 1 LITE c 80 810 French Telecom Standard Electror Full version 2996 China 2996 Electronics Demo version Spares Scaling and Rangin Spares Scaling and Ranging Demo version MainTain Maintainability MIL HDBE 472 Procedure v Demo version e
246. nnection line from the first figure to the second figure will flash repeatedly on the screen Connected From Click on this symbol to display the gate that all nodes are connected to The gate will flash repeatedly on the screen This gate is usually the gate directly below the Top Gate in the Fault Tree Nodes Connected To a Click on this symbol to display all nodes that are logically connected within the Fault Tree Node gate symbols will flash on the screen in order for you to discern which nodes are connected Nodes Connected a 202 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide The Zoom Toolbar The Zoom Toolbar contains commands for zooming and panning the canvas CA Fd Ea 97 Name Description Ruler Control Turn the ruler of the canvas on or off Properties Opens the properties window and allows the user to change the component properties Zoom Allows zoom in by selecting the area with the left mouse button and zoom out by clicking on the right mouse button Sets the magnification level of the canvas so that all components on the canvas are Zoom to Fit e visible Tool b al Ej a Zoom to Selection Sets the magnification level of the canvas so that the selected components are visible Changes the pointer to a hand and allows grabbing the canvas with the mouse and ej Pan anning Shortcut Keys Key Function Ctrl N Open a new project Open an existing document Displays the Open dialog box in which
247. ntaining the event fails taking into consideration that the event fails last How to Display a Critical Path 1 Select the Analysis pull down menu and click on Critical Path The Critical Path window displays Analysis Chart Window Help verify Data GD Perform Perform All Fault Trees Ctrl F2 Status Summary Critical Path Retain Results For d v Exclude Failed Logic Events 2 From this window you can select the Critical Path importance level you wish to use add and delete levels check all levels uncheck all levels and use the color palette to assign a color to a specific level Critical Path Importance i F Vesely t Birnbaum B Praschan m s C fe Line Width 0 Point Y Add Delete Check All Uncheck All Cancel Chapter 8 Fault Tree 193 3 Select F Vesely and the 1 Level choose the path color and click OK The Fault Tree canvas will be updated with the Critical Path TOP GATE No current tn nnint A io point A 4 Select the Analysis pull down menu and click on Clear Critical Path The Fault Tree canvas will return to his original state Verify Data d Perform Perform All Fault Trees Ckri F Gig Abort k y Status ave Summary Critical Path Clear Critical Path Retain Results For wv Exclude Failed Logic Events 5 Repeat step 1 to 4 to display the Critical Path for Birnbaum or B Proschan Importan
248. o not allow models to be saved or exported This client type can be used by reviewers and managers that have no need to modify models Network server installation must be present and activated within your network prior to installing the Network Client VIEW ONLY CLIENT 1 Full ITEM ToolKit Installation NETWORK SERVER Path to the Network Licenses or LICENSE SERVER VIEW ONLY CLIENT 2 with installation and activation Full ITEM ToolKit completed Installation Path to the Network Licenses NOTE The following must be noted when installing the software on a View Only Client VIEW ONLY CLIENT INSTALLATION MUST BE PHYSICALLY PERFORMED AT THE DESIGNATED CLIENT WORKSTATION AND CANNOT BE PERFORMED FROM REMOTE WORKSTATION OR SERVER TOOLKIT OR THE LICENSE MANAGER MUST BE INSTALLED ON THE NETWORK SERVER BEFORE DOING A VIEW ONLY CLIENT INSTALLATION VIEW ONLY CLIENT INSTALLATION REQUIRES FULL ADMINISTRATIVE RIGHTS THE PROGRAMS FOLDER FOR EXAMPLE C PROGRAM FILES ITEM TOOLKIT PROGRAMS INSTALLED ON THE NETWORK SERVER MUST BE SHARED BETWEEN THE NETWORK SERVER AND CLIENT WORKSTATION VIEW ONLY CLIENT MUST HAVE FULL ACCESS RIGHTS TO THE PROGRAMS FOLDER FOR EXAMPLE C PROGRAM FILES VTEMN TOOLKIT PROGRAMS INSTALLED ON THE NETWORK SERVER Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit 75 Installing the Software The Install Wizard will guide you through simple steps for installing ITEM ToolKit Please complete the following
249. o set a facility on or off and edit controls allowing the user to enter text The controls for each application behave in the same manner to similar controls in other Windows applications Add Analysis Menu Menu IT ftem Toolkit C Program Files tem Tc alkit ExamplesW 708 Example ITP Dialog i File Add Edit Layout Settings Analysis Chart Window Help E Category Mot Selected Ty Setting M v B P FMECA ES Block Info E Mode Info ES Detectat MIL 217 Systems FR 23 951031 Q 0 0005746595 Bellcore Telcordia Systems FR213 326342 O 0 00 E NSW Systeme FR 1810 6654 G 0 042525288 k E RDF Systems FR 3 7195492 G 8 9265195e 5 MT EE 2998 Systems FR 6 9023067 O 0 00016324203 E FMECA Systeme Y ABCSY S FMECA MIL STD 15234 fe Maintain Systems A SpareCost Systems A REL Systems fe Fault Tree Systems fe Markov Systems fe Event Tree Systems Black T Mame ID a2 Part Number LON F32 Quantity EI Parent Hames ID E Ma of Modes IEEE Circuit Ref oo T 92 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide File Menu Project file options may be accessed via the File pull down menu or the equivalent toolbar options Project file options allow the users to save and retrieve project data from different projects or create open and save Library files The normal Print functions plus the Import
250. o that the selected components are visible Changes the pointer to a hand and allows grabbing the canvas with the mouse and panning Open a new project Open an existing document Displays the Open dialog box in which you can locate and open the desired file Save the active project with its current name If you have not named the project the Save As dialog box will open Print the Active View Removes selected data from the document and stores it on the clipboard Copy the selection to the clipboard Paste the contents of the clipboard at the insertion point Delete the selection Open the ITEM ToolKit On line Help 280 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Chapter 13 Reports 281 CHAPTER 13 Working with Reports ITEM ToolKit has a long list of pre built reports that you can choose from or use as a foundation for customized reports Each module within Toolkit MIL FMECA RBD etc contains many reports specific to the type of information you would expect to see in a report from the module Report templates pre built and customized are stored under the Reports folder within the Toolkit installation on your PC The template files have a trt extension and can be sent to other Toolkit users for their use as needed This chapter covers 1 Selecting and Previewing Reports 2 Creating Report Templates 3 Customizing Reports 4 Problem solving 1 Selecting and Previewing Reports It is important that the de
251. obability that the system or component fails per unit time given that it was working correctly at time zero W is equal to the number of expected system failures CFI Conditional Failure Intensity This is the probability of failure per unit time given that the component was working as designed at time zero and is working at time t Expected Failure Expected Failure is the number of times the system is expected to fail over a specified period of time lifetime Unreliability Unreliability represents the probability of one or more system failures over a specified period of time The number of expected system failures W provides a good approximation for system unreliability for cases where W lt lt 1 Total Down Time TDT This is the total time that the component or system is expected to be unavailable for the specified system lifetime Total Up Time TUT This is the total time that the component or system is expected to be available for the specified system lifetime MTBF Mean Time Before Failure of the component or system MTTF Mean Time To Failure of the Non repairable component or system MTTR Mean Time To Repair of the component or system Availability Availability represents a measure of the degree to which a system is in an operational state at the start of a mission when the mission is called for at an unknown time Reliability Reliability represents the probability that the system will perform
252. odel H Time Phase Type BASIC v Mame Switch 1 I CDF Name EVENTI Q ype CDF Rate Failure Rate 1 5e 006 Park Number Logic Mode Basic Circuit Ref LCN F111 Use CCF Model T Failure Model CCF Model Adjustment Factor Q 1 Wi mm Fault Tree Sequencing Initiator and Enabler C Initiator Only C Enabler Only Description Group Labels v Description Switch 1 is open From Library Change to Gate Spelling x Cancel Change to Gate Spelling Kee Cancel Input the Description of the Event Switch 1 is open into the general window A Input the Name Switch 1 B select the Type Rate C and input the Failure Rate 1 5e 006 D of the Failure Model into the Failure Model window Available model types include Fixed Rate MTTF Dormant Standby Weibull LogNormal Normal Gamma Beta BiNomial ChiSquared Poisson Uniform and LogUniform When completed click OK E Repeat to 6 for the second Event with Switch 1 is open as Description Switch 2 as Name 2e 006 as Failure Rate and select Rate for the Type Repeat 1 to 6 for the third Event with No current to point A as Description No Current as Name 3e 006 as Failure Rate and select Rate for the Type 188 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Performing Analysis Fault Tree Module provides a method to Calculate unreliability and unava
253. of the System Window Library Hierarchy The Library Hierarchy is identical in operations and capabilities to the System Hierarchy This hierarchy 1s embedded in the Library System Window The Library Hierarchy is identified by the hierarchy header which has Library appended to the project name Chapter 15 Library Facilities 305 2 Adding and Extracting from Library Project Systems blocks components gates and events can be added to a library in the same way as a project In addition since the Library Hierarchy is an independent facility from the System Hierarchy Copy Paste and Drag Drop operations can be carried out between the two hierarchies Select an element from the System Hierarchy and use the right mouse menu copy command IT Item ToolKit C Documents and Settings Gemina PakeW y Document D File Add Edit Layout Settings Analysis Chart Window Help D um Bm X YN s A A A AAT C Documents and Settingsslemina C Documents and Settings em Y DemLib FMECA 1t1 DemLib Fault Tree 1 HA RED Systems OR TopGate TOP GAT i DemLib ABD 1 OR Gate 1 GATE 1 NV a i DemLib RBD 2 BASIC Event 1 e BASIL Event Z 6o HA Fault Tree Systems BASIC Event 3 S d DemLibFaul Tree tt BASIC Event 4 ab BASIC Event 5 L 17 Event Tree Faut Tree TOP GATE 1E t e fl 7X Delete Del Event Tree Fault Tree Collapse All 2 Selecta targe
254. oft com Url http www itemsoft com ITEM Software UK 4 Belfry House 4400 Parkway Whiteley Fareham Hampshire PO15 7FJ U K Telephone 44 0 1489 885085 Facsimile 44 0 1489 885065 Email sales itemsoft com Url http www itemsoft com ITEM Software
255. olKit Fault Tree Module also incorporates Binary Decision Diagram analysis The BDD analysis method is an alternative to the Rare Event and Esary Proschan quantification options It uses the Binary Decision Diagram algorithm to obtain cut sets and quantification results BDD algorithms distinguish themselves from conventional quantification methods by returning results that do not involve approximations Instead BDD algorithms produce results that are in accordance with the basic rules of probability theory Chapter 8 Fault Tree 179 Furthermore BDD based algorithms are generally more efficient than other quantification methods Depending on the model these algorithms can identify millions or even billions of cut sets within seconds The BDD algorithms embedded in ITEM products identify all cut sets for a given model and then filter out the significant cut sets based on probability and or order BDD algorithms do not allow for truncation of probabilistically insignificant elements in the logic Conventional methods allow models to be solved by considering only the high probability cut sets Studies have shown however that the numerical results produced by conventional methods must be treated with care due to the truncations and approximations involved in their calculations Using the Fault Tree Module The Fault Tree Analysis application uses a Fault Tree workspace area where all project system and Fault Tree data and graphics are entered This
256. ompiled By previewing again Lb Event Tree Report L el Approved By Markov Reports A amp Failure Rate J ele zoll Border MEI Sparecost Reports a FREE SUAE j Os Unavailability Insert m V Target Rate w Report Font Tvpe selection a L crus a Justification Inserting a graphic in the header is done here Chapter 13 Reports 287 Inserting a Graphic One aspect of customizing a report would be to add your company logo or other graphic to the header of the report This is easily done but there are positioning and size limitations Use the Insert Remove and Justification buttons at the bottom of the Header tab to work with graphics Use the Insert button to locate the graphic Typically used file formats are available in the drop down list Be sure that the graphic you are intending on using is small enough to fit within the bounds of the Header area on the report Use the Justification button to move the graphic left center or right within the header and top center bottom of the header area Caution If you have other information already in the header it may be covered up by the graphic if they occupy the same space You can make small adjustments to the graphic position by using the numeric fields provided IT Report Image Justification Horizontal Justification _ Left Left Vertical Justification Top Centered Bottom Top 1
257. omponents MIL 217 Application Parameters Clear Physical MIL 217 Blacks and Components Cem MIL 217 Physical Parameters MIL 217 System Clear All If the table and fields names match exactly you can use the Auto Match button lt lt Back Cancel Click Next This step matches the Tables to the Input Output fields For each Table click the Auto Match button to match the Input and Output fields Warning If your column names do not match the MIL 217 parameter names exactly the Auto Match will not work completely You will have to manually associate the fields together After using the Auto Match click each Input field to see the Output field it has been mapped to Verify that the mapping is correct Additionally for each Table you need to be sure the ID and System ID fields are matched These fields identify each component in the list and the System they are a part of Import Wizard import Chapter 14 Import Export 297 Wizard Table Association Trpo Fiske Output Fields Click Next Blacks amp Components s ID ID A Clear Physicalf gt MIL 217 Physical Para Systern ID System ID x Application gt MIL 217 Applicatior Parent ID Parent ID Clear All Mame Category Keyword Category Keyword Part Number Auto Match Description Reference ID Capacitance LCM Match All Rated Voltage Analyst Rated Power Description Applied Voltage Notes Applied Power Muantity Number On Standby Adjustment Factor
258. onomic Repair 7 Stock out risk 7 100 9 244 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Field Title System Title Name Unique Reference Identifier for the System Part Number System Part Number Logistic Control Number Circuit Ref Circuit Reference Number Analyst Name of the person performing the SpareCost Analysis Approved by Name of the person who was required to sign off on the SpareCost project Description Description for this System Function Description Purpose Description of this system Notes Any other pertinent information about this system Compiled by Name of the person who gathered the data for the SpareCost Analysis Site Spares Risk a Site bears that its spares will be insufficient during the unsupported period to meet Stock out Risk 76 demands due to equipment failure Unsupported Period days Operational period for a site during which no replenishment of spares takes place No of Equipment per Site Number of equipments being supported at the site Average utilization 96 Average percentage of time for which the equipments on a site operate Base Spares Repair Lead Time Average time that it takes to repair or replace line items Replenishment Period Month Early in service life for which the base stock is to be purchased Number of line items expected to be in service and supported from base at the end of the Total Number Fitted replenishment period Overall Utilization
259. onsequences a 7 Click OK when finished Editing Branches A branch is a graphical representation of an accident sequence The following table lists branch types supported in ITEM ToolKit s Event Tree Module and how they are symbolized Symbol on System Hierarchy Pe a Indicates a Failure Indicates a Success Success cL Branch Indicates a Initiator Branch Indicates a Null Symbol on Symbol on Event Tree Symbol on Event Grid view Canvas Tree Tool Bar Description Initiator Chapter 12 Event Tree 269 1 Click on the Event Tree Tab to open the Event Tree Canvas A Event Tree 1 IT Item ToolKit C Documents and Settings Gemina Pake My Documents DemoShield Demoshield Version 6 CD ROM 800 Tookk Sele a File Add Edit Layout Settings Analysis Chart Window Help x Duk Bsl X b 9 NW kir 3 A ww G BE 5 Fire Starts Fire Detected Fire Alarm Starts Sprinkler System Starts CONSEQUENCE RESULT C Documents and Settings Gemina P Fire Starts in Main Bullding Rre detoted by Detoton 3ycm b rr System is Activated Sprinkler System I Activated E SpareCost Systems g RBD Systems Success B9 piner Sys lem Ts acivaled Aulomalically Success B5 re Alam Seri Success Tully Mi Event Tree Systeme pem ee Damage No Loss af Lo Wez fE Fire Protection System f Pipe Break E Loss of Coolant Acciden m Type ste Description Fire Starts in the Main Building EI
260. orkspace features a Multiple Document Interface MDI which allows you to Choose which windows to display close minimize move and resize You can drag and drop ToolKit windows and toolbars anywhere within the MDI workspace Open multiple project files so you can build several projects at the same time and compare analysis results Drag and drop components between projects This feature allows you to create a new project quickly by reusing components from other projects 84 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide 2 The ToolKit Workspace 9 V 800 Example ITP 1 Bile Add Edit Layout Settings Chart Window Help DdBEH smex eer ff Block 1 FR 4 594943 Bubble memory 1 1 Capacitor 1 2 FR I Circuit Breaker 1 3 Coil 1 4 FR23 731 Connection 1 5 FR Connector General Connector Socket Detector Isolator Er Diode High Frequer Diode Low Frequen Micro Digital 1 11 a NN q EOR E AN aBcsvs Mech N Gas Turbine Er fe ADF Systems FR21 Y rf Fault Tree RBD FMECA T Q emu v soo Exa a8 tent Toolkit c acumen and miL 217 a ix Library C Documents and SettingssGem dt 7d Window J MIL 217 System ABCSYS v E gt Block 10 Power St Capacitor 10 1 gt Capacitor 10 2 Capacitor 10 3 Transformer 10 gt Capacitor 10 5 D Capacitor 10 6 Name Categor Description zc MA Capacitor OR FIX
261. oved around anywhere within ToolKit s workspace and resized as mentioned above To move a ToolKit window simply click and hold down the left mouse key on any outside border area of the window except in the window s tab area While holding down the mouse left key you will be able to drag the window to any location within the work area 11 xl C Program Filesslter T aaa amp ampleh l TP mii Su stem BC Explosion Ahi FO I 0 TaM oc AT Tree Chapter 3 ToolKit Basics 91 3 The ToolKit Menus ITEM ToolKit menus appear along the top of the workspace Most of the menu functions are also available on a toolbar or in the pop up menu that appears when you right click an object The principal pull down menu options for the applications menu are positioned along the top of the program window Pull down menus and their options may be selected using the left mouse button Menu options may alternatively be selected using the keyboard This is achieved by holding down the Alt key and pressing the underlined character in the required visible menu option Accelerator keys are also provided for selected menu options Selection of many of the menu options will result in standard Windows dialog boxes being displayed such as those for file or font selection These dialog boxes contain standard Windows controls such as buttons combo boxes allowing users to choose one option from a selection in a pull down list check boxes allowing users t
262. pacitor Micro EEPROM 2 2 Mic Diode Low Frequenc Diode Low Frequency Hybrid Layer Hybrid Layer Micro PLAJPAL Micro PLAJPAL Connection Connection Diog FA Grid Comps 7 NUM For Help press F1 The Prediction editor can be made visible by selecting the Dialog Tab 1 or the Grid Tab 2 Its main elements are the following Main Menu 3 Quick access to the main functions Prediction Toolbar 4 Quick access to editing functions Project Window 5 A hierarchical view of the project and systems System Window 6 A hierarchical view of the system blocks and components Library Window 7 A hierarchical view of the components library Dialog Window 8 The area in which the Prediction can be edited Grid Window 9 In this area the Prediction can be edited in a tabular style 126 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide The Default Toolbar Immediately below the pull down options resides a group of buttons that form a Default Toolbar allowing the user to access directly some of the more frequently used menu options Defaulk D cmd ot mm Tool Name k New re Open Save Cut Copy Lie Paste X Delete Item Undo g Print P About K Hep Xo amp YN Description Opens a new project Open an existing document The ToolKit displays the Open dialog box in which you can locate and open the desired file save the active document or template with its current name If you hav
263. played BR WN Re IT Item ToolKit Project Dialog File Add Edit Layout Settings Chart Window Help Ow SIINO NMXXXXSZS 0 3 t tS9 x o y EQN Sen ISl PROJECT IT Project Prediction Totals FR 0 Q 0 Project Title New Project Description Name IT Project Part Number 0 Function Description LCN Circuit Ref Ness Analyst es Compiled By Approved By o OS Applies to Failure prediction systems contained in this project Totals Target Rate 0 Failure Rate o Life Time hrs 24 Unavailability 0 Redundancy MTBF hrs S Diagram fg Chart Result For Help press F1 Blocks 5 Comps 47 5 Enter your project information by placing the cursor or clicking in the appropriate fields D 6 The information entered for a project is only for the project level and its entry is optional The table below displays each field that is available for a project and what each field pertains to Logistic Control Number Person Performing the Analysis 110 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Life Time Project life time given in hours Redundancy Redundancy Flag Failure Rate Will display total Project failure rate once analysis is complete Unavailability This box will display the Project unavailability once the analysis has been run MTBF Mean Time Between Failures for the project Adding a System A MIL 217 system may represent a single board a sub assembly or an entire sys
264. portance measure represents an event contribution to the system unavailability Increasing or decreasing the availability of events with a higher importance value will have the most significant effect on system availability Birnbaum The Birnbaum measure for an event represents the sensitivity of system unavailability with respect to changes in the event s unavailability B Proschan The B Proschan Barlow Proschan event importance measure takes into consideration the sequence of event failures within its calculation It is the probability that the system fails because a critical cut set containing the event fails taking into consideration that the event fails last ET Results End Branch Consequence Summary 7 Fire Protection Syster Parameter Unavailability Q 0 0014 Failure Frequency w 9 9991 Ma of Cut Sets 1 Importance Birnbaum B Praschan FIRE 0 99997836 1 FIRE DETECTED 0 001493991854 4 897571596 13 ALARM STARTS 0 001499918684 4 899757 096e 13 SPRINKLER STARTS D 00143339184 4 89757198e 13 LUE Sets i Unavailability Events D0 00149987 76 3 9991535 ALARM STARTS FIRE FIRE DETECTED 5PRI 274 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide How to Transfer Event Tree Data to Microsoft Word A powerful export facility 1s provided with the Event Tree module that will allow you to transfer data directly to Microsoft Word To access the Microsoft Word transfer facility sele
265. program folder Setup will add program icons to the Program Folder listed below You may type a new folder name or select one from the existing folders list Click Nest to continue Administrative Tools Adobe Acrobat 4 0 amp tomPark Audio Related Programs Corel AA 3 DemoShield 6 0 DD Shrink JEPSON Printers Select the optional Components to be installed and then click Next ITEM ToolKit Version 8 0 0 Optional Components Example Files 9135 E Description These components install a range of templates settings and samples It iz highly recommended that vou Include these in your installation Space Required on C 212068 K Space Available on C 193920412 K Back Hest gt Cancel Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit 81 The option to add icons to the desktop is the next window to appear ITEM ToolKit Version 8 0 0 Select Shortcuts Select from the shortcut options below Iw Add Shortcut ta Start Menu Setup Status Item Toolkit Setup iz performing the requested operations Installing When the InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box appears click Finish 82 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide ITEM ToolKit Version 8 0 0 Setup Complete Setup has now finished installing ITEM Toolkit After clicking Finish please wait a Few moments until the Glue screen disappears before continuing Chapter 3 ToolKit Basics 83 CHAPTER 3 ToolKit Basics
266. r Codes are required for activation of your program These numbers must be presented to an Item Software 49 representative by telephone or email Item Software will then supply the License ID Password and Registration Keys e Enter these details in the boxes and then click Unlock The Success dialog box appears Click OK and the License Manager opens Click Cancel to exit the License Manager 50 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Item ToolKit License Manager IT License Server IT License Client Help Computer Into UserName n Computer Mame IP Address E rm NOTE 7f you have more than one module to be activated the following should be applied e Click on IT License Server and select License Activation Item ToolKit License Manager Olen ey a8 IT License Client Help License information License Activation Server configuration Sop oer s I IP Address Follow the previous activation procedure NOTE f you click Continue from the Demo Notification Dialog Box the License Manager opens and you can unlock modules from here by selecting IT License Server and then License Activation Verifying the Licenses Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit Click on IT License Server and select License Information Item ToolKit License Manager eee IT License Client Help License information Module Mame Milz 17 Bellcore PSW FMETA RBD FaultTree EventTree Markov RDFZOO
267. r example if the gate has four inputs and a vote of three was specified this indicates that at least three of the gate s four inputs would have to occur to cause the gate failure to occur XOR Gate The XOR gate indicates that an event will occur if one but not both of the input events occur NOT Gate 4 ie The NOT gate indicates that the output event occurs if the input event does not occur NULL Gate mu The NULL gate indicates a single input only These gates are used to allow additional descriptions to be added to the fault tree for system events TRANSFER Subsystem Gate P The TRANSFER Subsystem gate indicates that this part of the fault tree is developed in a different part of the diagram or on a different page INHIBIT Gate a a The INHIBIT gate indicates that the output event occurs if both input events occur One of the inputs represents a conditional event 186 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide What is an Event Events appear in both Fault and Event trees and may represent components unavailability human errors system failures initiating events etc Adding an vent Select a Basic Event symbol from the Fault Tree Toolbar with the left mouse button A Move the mouse cursor to the 1 1 OR Gate within the Fault Tree canvas B Once the Gate has been reached click the left mouse button to add Repeat the same operation until 3 Basic Event are added below the OR Gate Click on the Selec
268. r select New Project from the File menu Activate your project by clicking on the Project tab B or in the Project window Select the Dialog tab from the bottom of the Viewing Option window The Project Dialog Box will be displayed BR U Ne IT Item ToolKit Project Dialog i File Add Edit Layout Settings Chart Window Help Ste X X XE XS Au zl xd c v ene Project Title Mew Project Mame IT Project 00 Part Mumber oo LOM Circuit Ref Analyst PO Compiled By Chapter 12 Event Tree 261 5 Enter your project information by placing the cursor or clicking in the appropriate fields Project Title Fire example Description Case study of a fire risk in a warehouse Mame FTA ETA Example 2 Part Number Example 02 Function Fault Tree and Event Tree Analysis af the fire T Description isl Circuit Ref pies Analyst Janna Liste Compiled By Mike Krospauft Approved By Ja P Rouve Apples to Failure prediction systems contained in this project Is p I Hil bp Totals Target Rate E Failure Rate E Life Time hra 24 Unavailability E Redundancy MTBF hra E The information entered for a project is only for the project level and its entry is optional The table below displays each field that is available for a project and what each field pertains to Field Description A Unique Reference Identi
269. r sian 1 v Group Replacement C Single Access ee E Iterative Replacement Multiple Access Isolation ta a Group of Als Reassembly Required for Checkout 8 You have now said that 20 of the time the operator maintenance technician will be able to isolate the fault to 1 RI and for the rest of the time 100 the operator maintenance technician will be able to isolate the fault to 2 RI s 232 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide 9 Select each of the remaining 3 RT s in the system click Fault Isolation to a group of RI s in the General tab and make sure Group 1 is selected in the The Maintenance Philosophy amp Fault Isolation dialog tab Failure Rate Allocation 1 Select the first RI item in the system click the Maintenance Element amp Failure Rate Allocation dialog tab and select Preparation in the Maintenance combo box G The following screen is displayed E3 General E hljaintenance Philosophy amp Fault Isolation E Maintenance Element Failure Rate Allocation Static Maintenance Preparatian Tasks G Add Delete Add To Library Get From Library e Bemene nessripton Time Tm min Task Nos allocation 2 Inthe Allocation column H enter 80 against Computer P S and 20 against Controller P S The screen should now look like the example below EB General EH Maintenance Philosophy amp Fault Isalatian E Maintenance Element amp Failure Rate Alloc
270. ransitions as listed in the following Table 0 001 0 0001 0 5 0 001 0 001 0 5 0 5 0 001 25 Inthe Markov toolbar click the Arrow Link Button B This button is used to start the creation of new transitions 26 Left click on the Both Available state A line originating from the state becomes visible as the mouse is moved around the Markov canvas 27 Click on the Primary Failed state An arrow appears between the two states The arrow s label indicates a rate of occurrence R of 0 C 28 Right click on the label A popup menu appears 212 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide 29 Select the Transition Parameters option A dialog appears 30 In the field labeled Transition D enter the value 0 001 corresponding to the rate of occurrence of this transition and then click OK The diagram indicates the updated rate of occurrence for the transition llllilld ete 05110l111ll Markov Transition Mame Ib ee Transition Rate i A as oe ep Sea gsi oss R Phase Mame P1 Description Group Labels m Failure of Primary Component 3 32 Now that both the states and transitions have been defined the simple model is complete 33 Along with states it is possible to define state groups You can create state groups in case you want to obtain the aggregated results such as the combined state probability for two or more states combined A state group can contain 34
271. re sus uis del viua saeua da oes su isola E cei esede iei f ese uei LE T D a eoo LUE u 107 LODS TROBEUCTIRUN a giant OO oss err ep eer Se rer ped os C cite scd cp En i Seed c tesi D e d Ses c Te ome 107 2 USING TOOLKIT FOR RELIABILITY PREDICTIONS csceccececcscescececcsceccscecesceccecsceecececscscscesesctsescesescesescs 108 SC PFA NCA PREDICTION PROIBGCT 252 niger e abi e be dE et t pisi 109 a DERATING COMPONENT 3 5 eecupstui t acta ense pere DLDE ccu DS besa LED olds Gosek ums DuC nan t D ue 119 5 PREDICTIONS EDITOR SCREEN TOOLBAR AND SHORTCUT KEYS QUICK REFERENCE ccr 125 ii ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide LP s TES Oy PL No NT PRODIRE E EAA ES ERREUR AAE DR EUREN SEEDS 131 2 EVE TOOLKIT FMECA ANALYS oe se oer Deseo ie Penna UII DUE TIEDIOL LAN P re DER IAE LIADUT ODE ees 132 S CREATING Auk ME CA P tenetis intencit ust elutet etel ee As Ie CASA res tcn D DE DAI SEL Cet E USE 133 4 FMECA EDITOR SCREEN TOOLBAR AND SHORTCUT KEYS QUICK REFERENCE een 153 BRB emer T 2 o 157 LN SHE LO BIBLE LOS BRNO EN ERROR taeke E cee go RERO TORT ERERPTIREN 157 2 ITEM TOOLKIT amp RELIABILITY BLOCK DIAGRAM ccccscecesceccccececcscecescscscscescscuceececesceceececescecesescesesces 158 3 CREA TING AN RED PROTECT iid eH R 159 4 RBD EDITOR SCREEN TOOLBAR AND SHORTCUT KEYS QUICK REFERENCE ccce 170 PAUL TE TREE ANALYSIS dicc tectce e eoe eon EUH
272. rease productivity Whether one starts a new analysis or uses a different module the essential functions remain the same ITEM ToolKit s graphical user interface uses standard Windows dialogs menus toolbars and controls The Multiple Document Interface MDI architecture allows you to simultaneously display multiple projects systems and data views in separate viewing areas in the ToolKit workspace The interface allows you to easily e Transfer and Link data between different systems and projects Cut copy and paste data Drag and drop objects both within and between projects e Customize the workspace toolbar Access online help An integrated environment offers flexibility with convenient features that provide a consistent format for all analyses to optimize the learning curve from one module to another 4 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide ITEM ToolKit Integrated Modules MIL 217 The MIL 217 module supports two methods of reliability prediction as described in MIL HDBK 217F Part Stress Analysis and Parts Count The Part Stress Analysis requires more detailed information and is usually applicable later in the design phase The Parts Count generally requires less information typically part quantities quality levels and the application environment It is most applicable early in the design phase and during proposal formulation MIL 217 calculates the failure rates and MTBF for electronic components sub systems and systems
273. ree 197 The Project Toolbar The Project Toolbar displays the available analysis options for the ToolKit application A ALL A AB 0L A T Tool Name Description A MIL217 Add a MIL HDBK 217 Electronic System AL Telcordia Bellcore Add a SR 332 Telcordia Electronic System AX IEC 62380 RDF Add an IEC 62380 French Telecom Standard Electronic System Ax 299B Add a 299B Chinese Military Standard Electronic System Aj NSWC Mechanical Adda NSWC Mechanical System JI Maintain Add a Maintain MIL HDBK 472 Procedure V System oh SpareCost Add a Spare Cost Spares Scaling and Ranging System Y FMECA Add a Failure Modes Effects and Criticality Analysis FMECA System i RBD Add a Reliability Block Diagram RBD System A Fault Tree Add a Fault Tree Analysis FTA System f Event Tree Add an Event Tree Analysis ETA System EAT Markov Add a Markov Modeling System The Fault Tree Toolbar The Fault Tree Toolbar is used to create and control Fault Tree Analysis through the commands it contains Tool Name Description ty Select Cancels add mode ih OR GATE Creates an OR GATE symbol on the Fault Tree diagram AND GATE Creates an AND GATE symbol on the Fault Tree diagram PRIORITY AND GATE Creates a PRIORITY AND GATE symbol on the Fault Tree diagram C d jen VOTE GATE Creates a VOTE GATE symbol on the Fault Tree diagram 198 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide e L amp e 8 amp i I
274. results produced by conventional methods must be treated with care due to the truncations and approximations involved in their calculations IT Event parameters IT Event parameters EB Failure Model E Time Phase Type BASIC Name Model 6 42 Name ALARM STARTS Type CDF Rate ES Ld Part Number Failure Rate 0 00012 Logic Mode Basic Circuit Ref LCN Failure Model Model 6 Adjustment Factor eh o who Fault Tree Sequencing Initiator and Enabler C Initiator Only C Enabler Only Description Group Labels V Description From Library New Model Spelling Cancel Spelling Cancel 260 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide 3 Creating an Event Tree Project Creating an Event Tree system consists of Constructing the system Adding Branches Editing their parameters Performing analysis To demonstrate ToolKit s Event Tree features we ll create an example Event Tree project based on the following example In the event of a fire in the room the fire protection is provided by a sprinkler system A detector will either detect the rise in temperature or it will not If the detector succeeds the control box will either work correctly or it will not and so on There is only one branch in the tree that indicates that all the subsystems have succeeded Constructing the System To construct an Event Tree System Click on the New Project icon A on the default toolbar o
275. rm All Fault Trees Chril F2 Status Summary Critical Path Retain Results For k w Exclude Failed Logic Events When the analysis is complete the Verification Msg dialog box appears Click OK The objects in the System window are updated with the analysis results The Fault Tree canvas is also updated with the analysis results 190 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide 5 ELEMENT 99 005 f ELEMENT B XXX Ee Fe CRIS GOL Ltn GA LEAK Fai 61587 6 1587 3 2904 6 15987 6 158 6158 6 158 PROTECTION SYE Mean Unavailability 7 2461 PROTECTION SY Mean Availability Am 1 CFI 6 1587 Expected Failures 0 0050 Unreliability D 050 Total Drown Time TOT Birnbaum B Proschan 56 37814378 5 0 0 74009843 1 05943546 7 34216951 0 74809843 1 05943546 34216951 5622394438 4 8n034635e 10 2 0069356e 11 PIPE SPLIT JU 37760552 4 80 34635e 10 2 46446 7808 7 P WIER nm 25190157 1 ga4nr s 5 fi 15 amp 65n75 i Events 2 6231 s e 7 CORROSION SPARE LO35 OF B iLGSS OF A 2 160101 e 10 1 58914753e y PIPE SPLIT SPORE boss OF B boss OF 4 20929747e 10 1 20893747e CORROSION SPARK POWER y 3408928 amp 11 7 34 082565e 8 PIPE SPLIT SPARE POWER Chapter 8 Fault Tree 191 Understanding Analysis Results Unavailability Q Represents the probability that the component or system is unavailable at any given time Q equals the probability that the system is unavailabl
276. roject Dialog i File Add Edit Layout Settings Chart Window Help Dus gl X 83 SI NXXx 49094 lzi oF Project Title New Project Mame IT Project 0 Part Mumber Eoo LOM Circuit Ref Analyst EMI Compiled By 5 Enter your project information by placing the cursor or clicking in the appropriate fields Title Two Switches example Description Fault Tree example for two switches in series a Mame Faut Tree Example LT rl F Project Part Number Example n Function Ho output current if switch 1 is open or switch 2 LEN Description Jisqpen or if no current to point A kl Circuit Ref Motes fwire failures would be ignored Analyst E 5 fo Failure Aate Cantata Redundancy Approved By Life Time hrs 8 762 006 Target Rate MTBF hrs E Unawailability 6 The information entered for a project is only for the project level and its entry is optional The table below displays each field that is available for a project and what each field pertains to Field Title Name Part Number CN Circuit Ref Analyst Redundancy Life Time Description Function Description Notes Compiled By Approved By Chapter 8 Fault Tree 181 The following fields will display results only if a prediction system is part of the project Failure Rate MTBF Target Rate Unavailability Will display total Project failure rate once analysis i
277. rs Renumber LCN Failure Model Library Gates List Events List Remove All Fault Tree Results 94 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Layout Menu The arrangement of how data in the Project and System windows is displayed and the type of information included can be customized with the Layout menu You can specify exactly what type of information is to be displayed You can view as much or as little of the detailed project and system information desired by selecting the information in the Layout menu When a data display option 1s selected the relevant project or system data will be displayed You can also select from this menu to sort the data in numerous ways Layout Settings Analysis Chart Window Help w Show Mame Show Category Sort w Show Gate Event Type Show Part Number Grid View Zoom In Show LCN Grid view Zoom Qut Show Reference ID Grid view Zoom 100 Show Analyst Grid Height v Show Description Auto Arrange Param v Show Initiator Enabler Status Canvas Color Show Failure Rate Output Delimiter Show MTBF Show Units Show Repeat Show Gate d Show Event d Settings Menu The Settings menu provides options for the manner and position in which your project is presented You can adjust and customize the way numerical values are presented customize toolbars customize extended styles set the workspace to default settings set diagram measurements and size customize the automatic backup set
278. rt Events Dependencies V 8 Example System Name Parent Name Mame Description CQ ALARM STARTS 1 ELECTRICS amp ELECTRICS NOSLIPDIS NO SUPPLY FROM DIESEL OR c O Containment Integrity DGEN ECI ECR Electric Power Emergency Cooling FIRE FIRE DETECTED Fission Product Removal v 4 gt Dependent Gates lal Chapter 12 Event Tree 259 Binary Decision Diagram BDD The BDD analysis method is an alternative to the Rare Event and Esary Proschan quantification options It uses the Binary Decision Diagram algorithm to obtain cut sets and quantification results BDD algorithms distinguish themselves from conventional quantification methods by returning results that do not involve approximations Instead BDD algorithms produce results that are in accordance with the basic rules of probability theory Furthermore BDD based algorithms are generally more efficient than other quantification methods Depending on the model these algorithms can identify millions or even billions of cut sets within seconds The BDD algorithms embedded in ITEM products identify all cut sets for a given model and then filter out the significant cut sets based on probability and or order BDD algorithms do not allow for truncation of probabilistically insignificant elements in the logic Conventional methods allow models to be solved by considering only the high probability cut sets Studies have shown however that the numerical
279. rver is selected A e Select Network file share B e Verify the License path C If the path is incorrect click on Browse D and select the folder where the license keys are located e Select Service E for execution type and click on Start Server Service F NOTE Selecting Thread for the Server execution type is for troubleshooting purposes only and will stop the service when exiting the license manager TCP IP License setup Item Toolkit license setup C z standalone Workstation License communication method t Network Client TEPP Network Server MK mi iMetwark file share License path Pregram Filessltem Toalki sPregrams Browse Fart Humber 1 OO00 Service Thread Start Server Service Stop Server Service Install as Service e Click OK when finished Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit Network TCP IP Connections Setup e From the Start Menu select Programs Item Software ITEM ToolKit License Manager ITEM Toolkit Additianal Help Files 4 ITEM Toolkit few Item Software tm Audio Related Programs k ITEM Software Website LJ RecordPad Sound Recorder e The License Manager Dialog box appears Item ToolKit License Manager IT License Server IT License Client Help Computer Info User Name Computer Name nM S PAddkes nc m 2 Item ToolKit License Manager Jaimee IT License Client Help Licen
280. s allow for a detailed representation of failure and repair processes particularly when dependencies are involved and therefore result in more realistic assessments of system reliability measures than simple time to failure and time to repair models Markov Analysis is well suited to handle rare events unlike simulation based analyses and therefore allows such events to be analyzed within a reasonable amount of time When is Markov Model Used Markov Analysis is a technique used to obtain numerical measures related to the reliability and availability of a system or part of a system Markov Analysis is performed when dependencies between the failure of multiple components as well as dependencies between component failures and failure rates cannot be easily represented using a combination of fault trees and standard time to failure and time to repair distributions Specific examples of application areas are standby redundancy configurations as well as common cause failures Markov Construction A Markov Analysis consists of three major steps Specification of the states the system can be in 2 Specification of the rates at which transitions between states take place 3 Computation of the solutions to the model Steps 1 and 2 take place in the graphical Markov model editor In this editor drawing circles and arrows between the circles respectively can create states and transitions between them The construction of larger Markov models 1s facilit
281. s commonly used descriptions of component parts failure modes and effects These phrases can be quickly retrieved and inserted into any text field This saves considerable data entry and ensures consistency ToolKit also provides other features to facilitate the construction of a FMECA project Data may be easily transferred within the same project or between different projects using the cut copy and paste facilities Search and filter facilities allow you to quickly locate data A wide range of layout options allows different data types to be displayed in the hierarchy view Chapter 6 FMECA 133 3 Creating a FMECA Project To demonstrate ToolKit s FMECA features we will create an example FMECA project for a redundant computer system Creating a FMECA system consists of Constructing the project system Adding Blocks Components Adding Failure Modes Causes and Effects and editing their Information Performing analysis Constructing the Project To construct a FMECA Project 1 Click on the New Project icon A on the default toolbar or select New Project from the File menu A Activate your project by clicking on the Project tab B or in the Project window 3 The Project Dialog Box will be displayed 4 IT Item ToolKit Project Dialog i File Add Edit Layout Settings Chart Window Help 0S 3 SI XXXxx44094Ac5 l xl c V PROJECT Project Sitp3 Title New Project Mame IT Project 0 Part Numb
282. s complete Mean Time Between Failures for the project description Acceptable number of failures for the project Failures Per Million Hours This box will display the Project unavailability once the analysis has been run 7 Select the Add menu from the menu toolbar by clicking on it Add Edit Layout Settings 33 MIL 217 System AL Bellcore System AL RDF System AL 2998 System ny Mechanical Svstem pe MainT ain System oh Sparecost System Y FMECA System fo RED System e c zi m zi E HJA Fault Tree Systems A FTA U Event Tree Ta Markov System 8 Select and click on the FT Fault Tree System option 9 The project will display as a Fault Tree in the project window and the applicable system data will display in the system window 10 From the Project window select the Fault Tree System by clicking on it 11 The Fault Tree System dialog box will be displayed 182 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide FaultTree System Title My Fault Tree Description Test Project Mame Faut Tree Test Part Number joo 0001 001 LEN FT 0001 Function Description Circuit Fiet Analyst Janna Lisisse L ompiled By Approved By The Boss Cut Off es rr Probability Failure Hate fo Unavailabiity 000m Frequency en Failure Frequency 0 Bid E Ma ot Expected Failures a rder Conditional Failure Intensity la Sotet Sas Total Down Time i e C pm C By Frequency eee C By Unavai
283. s tab is specific to IEC61508 and can be ignored if you do not wish to us this standard for your FMECA E 5 B FMECA Black Info H3 wode Infa Hi Detectability Diagnostic Goverage SFF Detectahiliby Sate or Dangerous Lambda Safe Lambda Dangerous 0 1 Intermittent s Safe Operation i C Dangerous AHERE TT s Negligible n s ata 0 2 Effect for small T C Dangerous dt Bhengee 3 eben ami s Safe 0 3 No effect T C Dangerous M ras AE ET eee Loco n 0 4 Catastrophic T C Dangerous b ous rc T E E meee rT SST OTN 0 5 No operation F Ci Dangerous 2n i Diagnostic Test The Diagnostic Coverage SFF panel lists the results of the IEC 61508 calculation related to the currently selected System Block or Component It is a view only panel and not editable 138 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide 4 gt P B FMECA E Ei Block Info E3 hlode Info E3 Detectability Diagnostic Coverage SFF liescri ntian DC DC SEE Lamhda Lamhda Lambda Lambda Lambda Lamhda Lambda p Safe Failures Dangerous Failures S S DD DU SD DD su POWER SUPPLY 1 D 1 4162 00 5152 0 0 5152 0 0 D 1 1 CAPACITOR FIXED CK 1 s 3 i2 CAPACITOR FIXED CB 4 13 CAPACITOR FED CK 1 sss 1D BB O11 0B 5 O11 DO 0 5 14 RESISTOR FIXED RCR 1 DD 1 000376 0D 0 00376 0 0 0 00376 0 0 oo Adding and Editing Blocks A block may be used to represent a system sub system board or logical group
284. se information License Activation Server configuration SS eS Ct ee ene E IP Address i Cancel 37 38 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide e The license setup window opens Verify that Network Server is selected A Select TCP IP B Verify the License path C If the path is incorrect click on Browse D and select the folder where the license keys are located Enter the Port Number E Select Service F for execution type and click on Start Server Service G Selecting Thread for the Server execution type is for troubleshooting purposes only and will stop the service when exiting the license manager TCP IP License setup Item Toolkit license setup t Standalone Workstation Network Client A E BJB Network Server 5 Network file share License path C Program Files sltem s T oolkitPragrams Browse Fort Humber 10000 Demer exec f G mice 6 m Stat Server Service tart 5 Stat Server Service Service Stop Server Service ae Install as Service pamm Click OK when finished Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit 39 3 License Server Installation ITEM ToolKit supports five types of installation Standalone Network Server License Server Network Client and View Only Client This chapter will provide you the required instruction for installing the License Server Software It contains the following sections What is License Server Inst
285. sion 8 0 0 Choose Destination Location Select folder where Setup will install files Setup will install tern Toolkit in the following folder Ta install ta this folder click Next Ta install to a different folder click Browse and select another folder Destination Folder C Program Files Browse Cancel e The Server Installation Connection Type dialog appears Select the type of connection you wish for the client machine The choice is either Network File Share or TCP IP With the former option full read write access to the destination folder is required With the latter option you must also enter a port number If you are unsure which option to select please consult your Network Administrator Once your choice has been made click Next Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit 45 ITEM ToolKit Version 8 0 0 Server Installation Connection Type Please select the type of Server Connection you wish Far the Client machines The Network File Share option requires Full Read Write access ta the destination folder w Network File Share C TCP IP Port Humber IH The Select Program Folder dialog box appears To accept the Item Software folder click Next To create a new folder type the name of the new folder in the Program Folder box and then click Next To select an existing folder locate the desired folder in the Existing Folders list select it and then click Next ITEM ToolKit Version 2 0 0
286. stallation has been detected on your system This must be removed before a new version can be installed Once removed run Setup again to install Ehe new version Remove the existing installation Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit 25 ITEM ToolKit Version 8 0 0 ITEM ToolKit Verzion 8 0 0 The InstallShield Wizard will install ITEM ToolKit on your computer Please close all other open applications before continuing and then click rest Cancel Click Next and the following Setup Type dialog box appears ITEM ToolKit Version 8 0 0 Setup Type Choose the setup type that best suits pour needs Click the type of installation you require License Server Description Network Client This option installs ITEM Toolkit Network Server on a Network Server Standalone VWiew Only Client I Eee Choose Network Server and click Next The License Agreement dialog box appears Read the license agreement carefully and click Yes to accept or No to decline If you click No the setup program closes 26 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide e The Customer Information dialog box appears Type the user name and the company name in the appropriate boxes and then click Next ITEM ToolKit Version 2 0 0 Customer Information Please enter your information Please enter your name and the name of the company For whom vau work User Mame Company Mame ITEM Software LISA Inc lt Back Cancel
287. steps e Insert the ToolKit CD into your CD ROM drive e If the Auto Run feature is not activated choose Run from the Start Menu The Run dialog box appears Type the name of a program Folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open iE For you v Cancel Browse In the Run dialog box type D setup replace the letter D with the correct letter for your CD ROM drive Click OK to activate the installation program e If the Auto Run feature is activated the following screen appears Welcome to Item Software s interactive Product Demonstration CD ROM about us PRODUCTS _ CUSTOMERS This disc will also provide you with information about the company tt products and services You can also install demonstrations of aur latest software products lor evaluation purposes SERVICES CONTACT US INSTALL i R UPGRADE Use the menu buttons on the left of the screen PDF FILES E lo navigate around the demo CD ROM INSTALL DEMO To exit the demo at any time simply press the escape key on your keyboard Thank you lar choosing ltem Software and we look forward to being of service to you in the near future litem Software e Select Install or Upgrade 76 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide INSTALL PRODUCT SEMUZ ToolKit ABOUT US J Version 7 07 1 PRODUCTS e for new Insiallatious CUSTOMERS SERVICES If you have purchased ze
288. sue Description 7A NSWC Systems FR 1810 6654 Q 0 LCN A ABCSYS Mechanical NSWC 98 _ Circuit Ref Notes M ur oe Du Tum CEN Analyst No On Standby _ C Documents and SettingsGemina Pake My Doc MTTR Approved By MIL 217 System ABCSYS MIL 217 tt1 ABC C r1 gt Block 10 Power Supply 110 240 V A Block 11 CPU Board 8086 Processo Target Rate 0 Failure Rate 22 525928 gt Block 12 Display Memory Unit Disple n a4 A 44393 2835 Block 121 Memory Board 256K F mg Uer etsi i gt Block 122 Display Processor Mk Redundancy True Unavailability 0 00054056296 Quantity Compiled By OOO i Gid FS Dialog For Help press F1 Blocks 5 Comps 47 2 From the File Menu A select Save Project B 3 Ifthe project is newly created the Save As dialog box appears In the Save As dialog box select the desired folder enter a file name C and then click Save D Save As pem in E v ic he 4M File Add Edit Layout Settings Chart Save in C9 Examples sie Ge C alternate Symbols 1 Mew Project Ctrl M alternate Symbols 2 Open Project Chrl 0 FT_Examplez Test D 708 Example Save Project CEr 5 Save Project s L Close Project File name My Project Save as type iT Project Files ITP Cancel Mew Library Open Library 4 If the project has been previously saved the existing file is up
289. systems contained in th m Capacitor 10 3 FR 0 018210663 Transformer 10 4 FR 0 010479688 Se X J NOTE The paste function always pastes the system under the corresponding module header You cannot paste a system under a different module Chapter 4 Project Basics 103 4 Editing Project and System Properties When you have created a project and added systems use the dialog tab to edit the project and system properties Editing the properties is an important step in creating a well documented project In addition it can help you distinguish systems when you have multiple systems of the same type in a project 1 Click the desired project A or system header B in the Project window 2 Click the Dialog tab C in the Data window if it is not already selected 3 Inthe Dialog Window edit or modify the system data as desired D IT Item ToolKit C Program Files Item Toolkit Examples Test ITP Dialog a File Add Edit Layout Settings Chart Window Help m x D c Bd Exo amp b OO A ategory Not Selected o fd V LULA nA MIL 217 System Title MIL 217 Example Description ABC Computer System Model ABC XT Pentium based Microcomputer Mame MIL 0 Part Number Function Description LCN Fo Circuit Ref Notes Analyst Term 10 FR D 7a764068 Quantity 1 Compiled By Capacitor 10 1 FR 0 0075993976 No On Standby 0 nmm Capacitor 10 2 FR 0 040561542 4 Approved
290. t Number Description Circuit Pi Factor Failure Rate 0 0101685 M Base Failure Rate fpmh BASE 0 0009899 amp Environment pi E 1 Quality pi Q 3 AX Capacitor 1 1 Capacitor 1 1 Capacitor Capacitor Temperature pi T 1 2522193 Micro EEPROM 1 2 Mic Capacitance pi CV 0 8128305 Transistor LF FET 1 3 T1 Stress pi S 3 3703701 6 x d Circuit Resistance pi SR 1 im apacitor 2 1 Capacitor Micro VHSIC VLSI CMOS diti m rade Diode Low Frequency 2 Quality pi Q 10 Learning pi L 1 a Temperature pi_T 0 2617695 Micro Micro Error Correction pi ECC 1 2 1 2 i Die Complexity Rate I C1 D 0017 EEPROM EEPROM Package Rate C2 0 0059219 A1 Factor A1 D 0034080 A2 Factor A2 0 B1 Factor B1 1 3940006 R Fartnr F2 n v gt p Sj Dialog E Grid E Diagram Lat Chart Result For Help press F1 Blocks 2 Comps 6 118 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Understanding Analysis Results The following is a brief description of all the fields IT PROJECT PREDICTIONS ONLY Failure Rate Total Failure Rate of the Project FPH FPMH or FITS MTBF Total MTBF of the Project Hours Unavailability Total Unavailability of the Project MIL 217 Failure Rate Total Failure Rate of the System FPH FPMH or FITS MTBF Total MTBF of the System Hours Unavailability Unavailability of the system Contribution Failure Contribution of the system FAILURE RATE Name Name of the
291. t Symbol to stop adding Events C pue cm ps lp A A B e 9 e AR f d GATE1 GATE2 EVENT2 EVENTS s EVENT1 jl I S Dialog E Grid A Fault Tree la Chart Types of Event The following types of Event are available in the Fault Tree Module Basic Event I A Basic event indicates an event for which failure and repair data is available House Event E A House event indicates whether an event is definitely operating or definitely not operating dormant Undeveloped Event An Undeveloped event indicates a system event which is yet to be developed Chapter 8 Fault Tree 187 Dormant Event A Dormant event indicates a system event with unrevealed failures until maintenance or inspection Conditional Event am A Conditional event is similar to a basic event but represents a conditional probability connected to an inhibit gate How to Create and Add a Failure Model into an Event Failure Models contain failure and repair information for a component or probability of occurrence data for human errors environmental conditions etc A failure model is assigned to an event or events for use in the Quantitative Analysis of the fault tree diagram L Right Click on the first Event Select Event Parameters The Event Parameters Window opens IT Event parameters 1 IT Event parameters 2t General E Failure Model E Time Phase Hi General H Failure M
292. t Tree Tab to open the Fault Tree Canvas A Select an OR gate symbol from the Fault Tree Toolbar with the left mouse button B Move the mouse cursor to a target gate within the Fault Tree canvas Once the target gate has been reached click the left mouse button to add C Click on the Select Symbol to stop adding Gates D weg o INE hl A amp amp amp amp HZ KA e 9lALD 5 EA Description cem me RUM M MIS IRSE Type bbe we ea eae ae cae ee Name GATE1 MEM ee Reference ID Mo te a ees yas Be ae wy a Vote Number Page Ferstnmesulis F7 Group Labels v TEE LON Fi Dialog 38 Grid E RBD D Fault Mee Se Markov fag Chart Result Chapter 8 Fault Tree 185 6 Right Mouse Click on the new Gate and select Gate Parameter Enter No current to point B as Description E 8 Click OK when finished F o Types of Gate The following gates are supported in the Fault Tree module OR Gate as m The OR gate indicates that the output occurs if any one of the input events occurs AND Gate a PRIORITY AND Gate P The PRIORITY AND gate indicates that the output occurs if and only if all of the input events occur in the order from left to right The AND gate indicates that the output occurs if all of the input events occur simultaneously VOTE Gate i The VOTE gate indicates how many of the gate inputs need to occur to cause the gate failure to occur Fo
293. t element in the library hierarchy and use the right mouse menu paste command R File Add Edit Layout Settings Analysis Chart Window Help D a mE X o amp TN h amp amp amp AI zT xl C Documents and SettingssGiemina uments and Settingssh em lt Y DemLib FMECA 1 DemLib Fault Tree 1 eA H RED Systeme OR Top Gate TOP GATE Desc i DemLib RED ttl OR Gate 1 GATE 1 Descri i BASIC Event 1 EVEN DemLib RBD 2 9 S _ E BASIC Event 2 EVENT A VE Faut Tree Systems BASIC E vent 3 EVENT d DemLibFaulTree t BASIC Event 5 EVENT AMNHD ERPLOSION ABI e e BASIC Event 4 EVEMNI e f A TRANSFER PROT OF LEAK Leak 1E C Documents and Settingssliemina Pa MIL 217 Event Tree Fault Tree E PLOSION BASIC PIPE 51 AND EXPLOSION ABC EXPLE BASIC CORRE k TRAMSFER PR TECTIDR BASIC SPARK Sp ORSLEAK Leak lE BASIC PIPE SPLIT Pir e BASIL CORRU SION E a amp BASIL SPARE Spark 71 Ewent Tree Fault Tree 306 Item ToolKit Tutorial Extracting from a Library An element and all its sub branches can be copied from a library project into a regular project 1 With both project and library open in ToolKit select an element in the Library Hierarchy and copy it using the right mouse menu Copy command IT Item ToolKit C Documents and Settings Gemina Pake My Documents DemoSt File Add Edit Layout Settings Analysis Chart Wi
294. t tree Combination of failures contributing to a sequence e Qualitative failure importance Qualitative rankings of contributions to a failure sequence e Minimal cut sets susceptible to Common Cause Failures Cut sets potentially susceptible to a single failure cause For the qualitative evaluations the minimal cut sets are obtained by Boolean reduction of the failure sequence The minimal cut sets obtained are used not only in the qualitative evaluations but in all the quantitative evaluations as well After obtaining the minimal cut sets some idea of failure importance can be obtained by putting the minimal cut sets in order according to their size The single component minimal cut sets being listed first then the double order and so on Since the failure probabilities associated with the minimal cut sets often decrease by orders of magnitude as the cut set increases the ranking according to size gives a gross indication of the importance of the minimal cut set Also the minimal cut sets even without any quantification can be used to validate the design criteria Quantitative Analysis Include e Absolute probabilities Probabilities of system and cut set failures e Quantitative importance of components and minimal cut sets Rankings of contributions to failure sequence e Sensitivity and relative probability evaluations Effects of changes in models and data error determinations e Full consequence analysis Probabilistic risk of each
295. tate y These transition rates concern continuous time transitions P Er t The probability of a transition from state x to state y at time t These probabilities concern discrete time transitions Unavailability Q Availability A The point unavailability is computed as the probability that the system is in any of the states belonging to group X at time f The availability is computed as 1 minus this value U t Pr X t A t 21 U t TDT Total Down Time Total Up Time TUT The Total Down Time and Total Up Time are respectively computed as the expected amount of time spent in any state belonging to group X and in any state not belonging to group X between 0 and t t TDT Pr X r dr t 0 TUT t TDT Mean Unavailability Mean Availability The mean unavailability is computed as the expected amount spent in X divided by the total mission time The mean availability is computed as 1 minus this value xd U Pr X 0 dr t T 1 M gt Expected Failure Expected Repair The expected number of repairs r is computed as the expected number of transitions from X to states outside X The expected number of failures f is computed as the expected number of transitions from states outside X to states inside X 216 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide pe Y Pr 2 4 PLI ix eX Jy eX r 0 fev gt J Pai Ay dr DPOB 0 ix eX fry X 7 0 where tp k 1 n is the set of
296. ted to below the nominal curve as in the next screen shot 125 00 IT Electronics Prediction Derating 3 points 5 Nominal Worst Case Derating Curre M Stress Ratio Hall Off Temperature L LL Max Temperature H na ui ui 2 en gt a m J u r a e e 15J5 a forse Case Meminal Selected Ambient Temperature Cancel Chapter 5 Predictions 123 Creating Your Own Derating Standard ToolKit provides a method for you to create and apply your own derating standard l Use File Derating Files menu option to open the user defined derating window On this window you are able to create derating files that contain the models you wish to create apply to the components in your systems These files are stored as ITD files and should travel with your ToolKit project files A project file without a derating file will still open properly but the derating will not be applied to the project IT Deratine Files File Edit Create Derate File Derate File Manager IT Derating Files File Info Models Derating ipa New File Name NewFile Model Type Category Not Selected Description Apply this derating file to current project Detate according td nominal values Iv Derate according talworse case values Check this box to have the derating file applied to the current project 25 On the Derating window choose File New then Edit Ad
297. tem The system can then be broken down into sub blocks and components 1 Select the Add menu from the menu toolbar by clicking on it A and click on the MS MIL 217 System option B Add Edit Layout Settings all MIL 217 System PII Bellcore System AL RDF System AL 2998 System AN Mechanical System MIL 217 System ps MainTain System Title os Sparelost System Name MIL O Part Number Pp 0 Q ee usen Len F iB RED System Circuit Ref B Fault Tree System IT Item ToolKit Project Dialog O File Add Edit Layout Settings Chart Window Help E PROJECT IT Project Prediction Totals FR 0 fg MIL 217 Systems FR 0 M ITP2 Analyst JY MIL 217 System MIL O FR 0 Quantity 1 Event Tree No On Standby o Ta Markov System eo o Another way to add a MIr z17 System is to click on the MS icon on the system toolbar C The MIL 217 system in the project window and the applicable system data in the system window will display D From the Project window select the MIL 217 System by clicking on it E The System dialog box will be displayed Enter your system information by placing the cursor or clicking in the appropriate fields F ple ue Du Chapter 5 Predictions 111 IT Item ToolKit Project Dialog Sele a File Add Edit Layout Settings Chart Window Help EMI X D a ll Bex e VN XX XX X740 DAE i 4 xi ITP2 B PROJECT IT Project Predictio
298. tem Software assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document ITEM ToolKit is a trademark of ITEM Software USA Inc All company and product names are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies Printed in U K 2011 ITEM Software USA Inc Contents i Contents CONTENT opo m I ludo ee gs Lr NRE 1 LPURPOSE OFTHIS OUID E retirees tasas qucast cedem taniquactasdt t hoses qo cant cado ota n omar faga ecco up cantante cot atate as aga cc co ep onda odsE ILL 1 24 STRUCTURE uicina ebd iidem d nates ace ele ee dena ace sas E E tae 1 DON VENTION NERONI EROR eosneted ba A T AN T A ANS EAA AAN AAA A 2 INTRODUCING TTEM TOOLKIT karaan eaaa a a a Poo aaa aa 3 L WHAT IS ETE Wi TOOLKEI eranen i E E EA E A E E EAA 3 2 HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS cssccsccsccsccsscssccscescesccssesscescescescessesscsscescescessessessesscescescesens 7 GETING FECHNICAL SUPPOR Tane E E ate D E Ru E AM E E 8 ENSTALEING JITENETOOLNKT I eei orc tede cdeesotees a ose ae eee ess 9 Le STANDALONE INSTALEATION eset ies Unetdest en isto Po tn Vu rh SOEUR inte st oa AA od uS Uv tale et ua Ust e repr Ea 9 2 NELIWORKSERVER INSTALIATION 25 0t rehictetivisk One cle to ueeoeh des cal cedat dul a ae to uide th avra o cdolduluk vs al to uide OM RAO ZAT S LICENSE SERVER INSTALLATION uei tectum debui arte te co tbe dere me docu BU Dore a ced Ub Deed Ua docu ene ad 39
299. tem Window labeled Library System Window This allows storage and retrieval of any system block or component including gates events or segments branch of a fault trees and RBD diagrams Libraries of this type can be opened as windows on the workspace or loaded in the background via the Library Lookup Manager The second facility Failure Model Library handles storage and retrieval of distribution models The Failure Model Library also has the capability to store and retrieve from a disk file allowing the content of the library to be shared with other projects This is discussed further in the separate Fault Tree User Manual This chapter covers Creating a new Library Project 2 Adding and Extracting From a Library Project 3 Saving and Closing a Library Project 4 Loading and Browsing a Library 1 Creating a New Library Project Creating a library project is very similar to creating a regular project file Select New Library from the File menu Alternatively to open an existing library select Open Library from the File menu Diagram 1 IT Item ToolKit C Program Files Item To x File amp dd Edit Layout Settings Chart Window Help E Mew Project Ctrl M 9 k Open Project Chrl a x mj Save Project Cbrl 5 zz Save Project 4s 7058 E sample IT P A t zu LE j us Close Project Totals FR 1 964 4646 Mew Library 22 525928 m E Open Librarv 1 4251013 m H213 325342 n lesie A A
300. teps for installing ITEM ToolKit Please complete the following steps e Insert the ToolKit CD into your CD ROM drive If the Auto Run feature is not activated choose Run from the Start Menu The Run dialog box appears Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit 11 Type Ehe name of a program folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open iE For you v e In the Run dialog box type D setup replace the letter D with the correct letter for your CD ROM drive Click OK to activate the installation program If the Auto Run feature is activated the following screen appears ABOUT US C PRODUCTS CUSTOMERS SERVICES CONTACT Us PDF FILES 08 INSTALL DEMO E na bei Sim Select Install or Upgrade INSTALL OR UPGRADE Welcome to Item Software s Interactive Product Demonstration CD ROM This disc will also provide you with information about the company tt products and services You can also install demonstrations of aur latest software products lor evaluation purposes Use the menu buttons on the left of the screen lo navigate around the demo CD ROM To exit the demo at any time simply press the escape key on your keyboard Thank you lar choosing ltem Software and we look forward to being of service to you in the near future lem Software 12 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide INSTALL PRODUCT SET Toolkit Ferson 7 97 1 PRODUCTS e i for new tnsiall
301. the foundation on which you build your project The GUI consists of menus toolbars project and system windows and multiple viewing options The following are samples of features offered by the SpareCost Module e Quickly create multiple systems within each project e Quickly create a new project by reusing data from other projects e Create and open multiple SpareCost projects at the same time and compare analysis results e Copy and Paste components and block between projects and systems e Simultaneously display analysis result and view components and blocks information e Create master libraries of components and blocks e Drag and drop components and blocks between libraries and systems e Display various system and project information in the hierarchy windows e Sort and display various information at system and block level e Display and chart system and block information e Edit project system block and component via Dialog and Grid view SpareCost Construction ToolKit offers flexible powerful and easy ways for constructing SpareCost Analysis You can simply transfer components blocks and systems information from other modules within ToolKit or add different types of components and blocks in the System Window to create a hierarchy of your system and enter the appropriate information by using the dialog view Multiple Projects and Systems The need to create or review multiple projects at the same time has been made effortless w
302. times f t at which discrete transitions take place Note that this definition excludes transitions that take place between states that belong to group X as well as transitions that take place between states that do not belong to group X Unreliability Unreliability represents the probability of one or more system failures over a specified period of time The number of expected system failures W provides a good approximation for system unreliability for cases where W 1 Reliability Reliability represents the probability that the system will perform without failure during the specified period of time Failure Frequency W Failure Frequency W is the term used by the system to represent the unconditional failure intensity The unconditional failure intensity 1s the probability that the system or component fails per unit time given that it was working correctly at time zero W is equal to the number of expected system failures CFI Conditional Failure Intensity This is the probability of failure per unit time given that the component was working as designed at time zero and is working at time t How to Transfer Markov to Microsoft Word A powerful export facility is provided with the Markov module that will allow you to transfer data directly to Microsoft Word To access the Microsoft Word transfer facility select the Microsoft Word icon from the Markov toolbar Lose EU Transfer to Microsoft Word 2 Th
303. tings and select the Auto Paginate and Auto Fit to Page Options Settings Analysis Chart Window Help Precision Customize Extended Styles Workspace Setup Set WorkSpace En Default Diagram Measurements and Size Auto Backup Mame Generator Grid Templates verify Mames AutoPaginate OnJOff AutoFit Eo Page On Off AutoFit k 4utoPaginate k AutoArrange Show Source Symbol Far Repeat Gates Page Numbers an Transfer Gate with NO HeaderJFoater k Chapter 3 ToolKit Basics 95 Analysis Menu The analysis menu is not used with the Failure Rate Prediction modules and does not appear when these modules are active It is only used with the FMECA RBD Markov Event Tree and Fault Tree Modules The menu selection will be different depending on the analysis module in use The FMECA RBD Markov Event Tree and Fault Tree Modules do not automatically update their calculation when data is entered or changes are made as do the prediction modules The reason for this is that the calculation on these modules can take some time on highly complex projects The Perform green GO icon menu selection is one place in the system to initiate the analysis calculation and update the results This menu also includes selections for verifying that all data has been entered correctly which is a major help on complex projects to insure that all required data is entered and it is entered correctly Analysis Chart Window Help Options Verify
304. tions of a system Once the blocks are configured properly and data is provided the failure rate MTBF reliability and availability of the system can be calculated As the configuration of the diagram changes the calculation results also change The rational course of a RBD stems from an input node located at the left side of the diagram The input node flows to arrangements of series or parallel blocks that conclude to the output node at the right side of the diagram The RBD system is connected by a series or parallel configuration A series connection is joined by one continuous link from the Start Node to the End Node A parallel connection is used to show redundancy and is joined by multiple links or paths from the Start Node to the End Node 158 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Successful operational systems require at least one maintained path between the system input and the system output Boolean Algebra expressions are used to describe the minimum combination of failures required to cause a system failure Minimal cut sets represent the minimal number of failures that can cause the system to fail 2 ITEM ToolKit amp Reliability Block Diagram The RBD analysis is a module of the ITEM ToolKit application The ToolKit allows for multiple analyses to be performed within a single or between multiple projects As a result all analysis modules of the ToolKit can function as a standalone or combined solution set The ToolKit us
305. tivation License ID Password Cancel OK e Enter the required information and click OK e Selecting Unlock by Phone opens the Program Activation Dialog Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit 31 Program Activation Dialog ITEM ToolKit Module Mame of Licensed Lan Users Activation Type Mil 17 NT Demo Telcordia rovc Demo Demo Demo Dema NSW FMECA RBD Faulk Tree Markov RDF 2000 2996 Sparecost Maintain MIL Event Tree Selecting Unlock opens the following dialog Program Activation Dialog ITEM ToolKit User Code 1 281796922 ITEM Software in LISA 714 235 2900 User Code 2 5102663 in Europe 44 0 1499 885085 Company Mame ITEM Software USA Inc License ID D Reg Key 1 Password Reg Key 2 Ges Your system will generate User Code 1 and User Code 2 numbers The User Codes are required for activation of your program These numbers must be presented to an Item Software representative by telephone or email Item Software will then supply the License ID Password and Registration Keys Enter these details in the boxes and then click Unlock Once all the required modules have been activated the About Item ToolKit dialog box appears Verify that the correct modules are activated 32 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide About ITEM ToolKit Eu E E d j _ i F k d i i n ITEM Toolkit Version
306. to Arrange icon to get a better view of the RBD e Select multiple components by holding the Ctrl or Shift key down while you click the desired components or by holding the left mouse button down while you drag a box around the desired components e Select a component by clicking on it in the system window or in the RBD tab Use the mouse to move and resize components Zoom in or zoom out by right clicking any empty area in the diagram selecting Zoom from the pop up menu then selecting the desired zoom factor e Set the background color by right clicking any empty area in the diagram selecting Canvas Color from the pop up menu selecting a color then clicking OK e Addatext box by selecting Label from the Add Menu then clicking the diagram in the area you want to place the text box Verifying Data You must verify system data before performing project analysis Chapter 7 RBD 167 When verifying RBD projects ToolKit checks for Circular logic Invalid failure mode parameters A node termination for each logical path at the system level A single logical input and output for each sub system page Failure models inputs to non sub system blocks To verify RBD data 1 Inthe System Window click the system header A 2 From the Analysis Menu select Verify Data B RBD 1 IT Item ToolKit Project RBD a File Add Edit Layout Settings Analysis Chart Window Help D Eb X Rag x oo Se A ASM GO RC Be GD Perform
307. to Block s reliability calculation Adding and Editing Components A MIL 217 component represents electronic device components e g resistors capacitors diodes ITEM ToolKit provides data entry fields for part number description circuit reference and a number of other identification fields which may be entered when adding the component or at a later time To add components using the toolbar 1 Activate your system by clicking on the System cross tab or anywhere in the System window A i Chapter 5 Predictions 115 IT Item ToolKit Project File Add Edit Layout Settings Cee X amp x amp FP amp D B capacitor v alx o m oY ETE nd Isl PROJECT IT Project Prediction Totals FR 0 02 A MIL 217 Systems FR 0 020653194 O 4 95 M MIL 0 FR 0 0206531 94 0 4 9567666e H General E Physical E Application Block b intion Part Number gg Description Block 2 xl Name ITP2 Circuit Ref 3AM MIL 217 System MIL 0 FR 0 0206531 94 MTBF Analyst Notes i Block 1 Block FR 0 010326597 MTBF 96 Category Block Y m Capacitor 1 1 gpacitor FR20 0101885 6 CES ees Update Children IV LEN F2 my Capackor 2 1 Capacitor FA Z0 m EE Temperature Increment C Absolute Replacement Parameters Checked Non Op Parameters 4 m Dialog gh Diagram Result For Help press F1 Blocks 2 Comps 2 From the component drop down list in
308. to close the dialog box PS e E ds 146 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Adding Failure Modes Causes and Effects A Failure Mode is the way in which a component is expected to fail Causes are the factors that are proven or deduced to directly or indirectly produce the failure of an item component equipment or system A Failure Effect is the effect a component Failure Mode has on its parent block There are three types of Failure Modes e At the system level which are End Effects e At the intermediate or subsystem level which are Effects e At the component or lowest level which are Failure Modes A lower level failure mode is the cause of the upper level failure mode which is the effect of the lower level failure mode Since FMECA analyses from the lowest level up the first step is to define the failure modes of Power Supply 1 To add a failure mode 1 Inthe System Window click the Power Supply component A The component information appears in the Dialog tab IT Item ToolKit C Documents and Settings Gemina Pake My Documents DemoShield Demoshield Version 6 CD ROM 800 Toolkit Defaults Examp BER O File Add Edit Layout Settings Analysis Chart Window Help B x Came X xo amp 9 NM ls i i Category Not Selected G xi C Documents and SettingssGemina A NSWC Systems fg RDF Systems pg 299B Systems HA FMECA Systems Ue gt gt e EEJ g E Block Info
309. to the Program Folder listed below You may type a new folder name or select one from the existing folders list Click Next to continue Administrative Tools Adobe Acrobat 4 0 StomP ark Audio Related Programs CorelDRAW 3 DemoShield 6 0 DVD Shrink EPSOW Printers Back Cancel e Select the optional Components to be installed and then click Next Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit 65 ITEM ToolKit Version 8 0 0 Optional Components Example Files SEE gt Description These components install a range of templates settings and samples Itis highly recommended that you include these in your installation Space Required on C 212068 K Space Available on C 133320412 K The option to add icons to the desktop is the next window to appear ITEM ToolKit Version 8 0 0 Select Shortcuts Select from the shortcut options below Ii Add Shortcut to Start Menu i Back Cancel The Setup Status dialog box appears and displays the progress of the installation 66 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide ITEM ToolKit Version 8 0 0 Setup Status Item Toolkit Setup is performing the requested operations Installing Setup Complete Setup has now finished installing ITEM Toolkit After clicking Finish please wait a few moments until the blue screen disappears before continuing Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit 67 Activating the Software A Network Client cannot be activated and once th
310. tup Help Help Topics heer le Client Setup Item Software on the web about Item Toolkit e The License setup window opens Verify that Network Client is selected A Select TCP IP B Enter the Server Port Number C Enter the Server IP Address D TCP IP License setup Item Toolkit license setup Z Standalone waa a B License communication method f Network Clien C Network Server C Network File share a License path Pork Number Server IP Address Click OK when finished Chapter 2 Installing ITEM ToolKit 71 Verifying the Software To Check Which Modules Are Activated Select Help From the Standard Toolbar e Select About ITEM ToolKit Help Help Topics Edit License Kev TCPIIP Client Setup Item Software an the web About Item Toolkit e The About ITEM ToolKit Dialog Box appears and you can check the Version of the software and which modules are in full version or Demo Version About ITEM ToolKit a ET UE P E d 2 Fh t F F n d j i ITEM Toolkit Version 8 0 0 FoR ODE Kp UE ee Hee Tai TEN SORTA RE LEAP Network Info ITEM Software Reliability analysis tools include MIL HDBK 217F Notice 2 Electronics Full version Bellcore Telcordia SR 332 Issue 2 SR 3392 Issue 1 TR 332 Issue 6 Electronics Demo Version MIMA MEWC D6 LE10 NSwcC 88 LE1 Mechanical Demo Version FR
311. ty from or to Jet Database Excel or Text The Markov workspace area features a Multiple Document Interface MDI which allows you to e Choose which windows to display and move and resize all open windows e Open and create multiple Markov projects at the same time in order to compare analysis results e Drag and drop State and Group components between projects This feature allows you to quickly create a new project by reusing components from other projects 206 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide 3 Creating a Markov Project In this example we will use the ITEM ToolKit Markov module to model and analyze a simple two component standby system The system is thought to consist of two identical components that are operated in a warm standby mode It is assumed that failures of the standby component are not detected until a demand is made Click on the New Project icon A on the default toolbar or select New Project from the File menu Activate your project by clicking on the Project tab B or in the Project window Select the Dialog tab from the bottom of the Viewing Option window The Project Dialog Box will be displayed BR WN Re IT Item ToolKit Project Dialog i File Add Edit Layout Settings Chart Window Help DSA sexo Ste DNIXIXXX 900948 5 ITP c v eN Project Title New Project 0 Mame IT Project 0 Part Mumber hn LON Circuit Ref Analyst PO Compiled By
312. uality Capacitors lNonestablished Reliab Capacitance Micraf mam Rated voltage Ia Ma of Pins eo 8 Click on the Application Tab I to edit the Application information of the selected component Capacitor Quantity EE Environment Ground benign Ambient Temperature degC I3 Connection Type Reflow Solder Applied voltage TERNI voltage Stress og Circuit Resistance ob Adjustment Factor EE NOTE New Components added to a Block take on the Ambient Temperature T4 and parameter settings of that Block if the Update Children box is checked on the Block s General tab view If the Block Update Children box is not checked the new Component added to the Block uses default values for Ambient Temperature T4 and parameter settings Chapter 5 Predictions 117 Viewing Results To view the project results Click on the system header A in the System Window 2 Click on the Result tab B at the bottom of the ITEM ToolKit screen to display the system results IT Item ToolKit Project Result File Add Edit Layout Settings Chart Window Help zm kel exo amp NM amp O C B Category Not Selected BF E PROJECT IT Project Prediction Totals FR E Parameter HA MIL 217 Systems FR 0 45240694 Q 1 i 0 45240694 gm MIL 0 FR 0 45240694 Q 1 08577 2210399 3 Unavailability 1 0857766e 5 4 Contribution 100 2 Failure Rate Name Category Part Number Descript
313. uantification Method Life Time Ro Esary Proschan C Rare MTBF Options No of Intermediate pp r Modularize Time Points Modularize independant sub blocks 9 Enter your system information by placing the cursor or clicking in the appropriate fields The table below describes what could be entered and what each field and block of fields pertains to LCN Logistic Control Number Circuit Reference Number 162 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide Total time the system will spend unavailable during the system lifetime Average time to repair system Probability of system failing one or more times during system lifetime Probability of system being unavailable at any specific time Click on the selected Quantification method and select the MTBF Options Modularize Independent Sub block Group independent sections of the RBD speeding up the analysis Use Max Risk Dormant Model Uses maximum risk values for dormant events Adding Blocks Nodes and Connections What is a Block Blocks A represent events such as sub system and component failures The unique IDs distinguish blocks from other blocks in a diagram Repeating a block throughout the diagram can represent common cause failures Chapter 7 RBD 163 Black 1 What is a Node Nodes B connect parallel blocks Nodes specify voting arrangements where applicable Nodes also represent the system outputs of a block diagram for which results are required
314. uit Ref j the data Monlp Pi Paral 83 1 Quantity MIL 217 Failure E Failure Rate Font MIL 217 Parts MxFailure Rate Heading Fields MIL 217 Pi Fac Percent Contributio Font Arg EDT Bellcore Reports MTEF sta Duc Reds gt RDF Reports WE Tkalic Regular 7 z99B Reports Size 10 fi 1n MSWC Reports Underline Underline FMECA Reports Background Color Choose the data range that Heading Fields the report will include Preview Preview Markow Reports Sparecost Reports v Data Range v Blocks and Components Blocks only ues f Components only Removeried 9900900099 Chapter 13 Reports 289 The Field Width setting controls whether the column width follows the Heading of the column the width of the data or a specific width set in TWIPs 1 TWIP is 1 1440 of an inch Name Furicational Device IxFR 13 476 IxCR 0 000562 EM Ground benign Part fits ber Category Descintion Description reg Funcatian Capacitor A Elect al Device 1 Note how the data wraps in the column This Integrated Circuit column is set to follow the width of the Heading Funcation Diode Laser al Device 2 Funcation hicro Digital al Ie ice 3 Furicatian Extarrial Diode Laser al Device 4 557 EN Ground benign TWP 45 Analyst Citit Rer Guantty ME FANUNE erment ha Faie DII Al Blect D 0191 D 0181 z
315. up Add new group Delete selected group Add selected state to group SS Remove selected state From group The left part of the tab lists all the groups that have been created so far New groups can be added by clicking the Add New Group button Unnecessary groups can be deleted by selecting them and clicking the Delete Selected Group button Note that this will only delete the group definition but not the states contained in the group When a group is selected its name and description are made visible in the corresponding fields The fields can be used to change names and descriptions 214 38 39 40 4 42 43 44 45 46 4T ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide To add the state to the group click the Add Selected State to Group button The list of groups will now show that the state has been attached The Remove Selected State from Group button can be used to remove states from the group Close the dialog by clicking the OK button The updated group information is shown in the Markov hierarchy in the lower left corner of the ToolKit window We continue the example by analyzing the model and evaluating its results First we specify the mission time interval Click on the Dialog tab Set the mission time to 1000 and the number of intermediate points to 100 in the dialog window Miscellaneous Mission Time i ong Ma af Intermediate Time Points f Dn Then we start the actual analysis
316. will result in this effect For example if you want to see System level information and Component level information all in the same row of the report some combinations of this cannot track with each other The columns are cut off on the right side Depending on your data and columns selected you may reach the physical limits of the paper In this case you will have to either remove columns use larger paper or adjust the column widths Often times it is better to remove columns that to try to fit everything on to one page One column seems to take up all the room on the page This is common with Description fields The only real solution is to force the column into a specific width and let the data wrap as needed I don t understand where some of the values in the columns came from Some column values are ones you have entered while others are calculated by ToolKit for you Find these values in the Results window within ToolKit 292 Item ToolKit Tutorial Chapter 14 Import Export 293 CHAPTER 14 Import Export One of the powerful features of ToolKit is the ability to import and export data to from a variety of formats Microsoft Excel and Access are just two of the choices This chapter covers 1 Creating a bill of materials in Excel 2 Importing the bill of materials into ToolKit 3 Exporting a system from ToolKit to Excel 1 Creating a Bill of Materials in Excel Importing a Bill of Materials into a Project or Library
317. without failure during the specified period of time No Of Cut Sets No of Cut Sets represents a group of events that will cause system failure if and when they occur together 170 ITEM ToolKit Getting Started Guide 4 RBD Editor Screen Toolbar and Shortcut Keys Quick Reference The RBD Editor Screen RBD 1 IT m File Add Edit Layo Settings Analysis Chart Window Help E x DG BAX A h me 7 5 5AL m d REGE Be xi E PROJECT IT Project Prediction Totals A RBD Systems i RBD 0 Dialog amp H Grid i RBD la Chart Result For Help press F1 Blocks 7 Modes 4 NUM The RBD editor can be made visible by selecting the Dialog Tab 1 or the RBD Tab 2 Its main elements are the following Main Menu 3 Quick access to the main functions RBD Toolbars 4 Quick access to editing functions Project Window 5 A hierarchical view of the project and systems System Window 6 A hierarchical view of the system blocks connections and nodes RBD Window or canvas 7 The area in which the RBD can be graphically edited The Default Toolbar Chapter 7 RBD 171 Immediately below the pull down options resides a group of buttons that form a Default Toolbar allowing the user to access directly some of the more frequently used menu options Defaulk D ce d 5 Em E L4 a B x ER amp hi The RBD Dialoge Windows Controls Name New Open Save Cut Copy Paste
318. y analyses This chapter 1 Introduces reliability predictions 2 Explains the ToolKit prediction modules 3 Outlines the creation of a Prediction Project 4 Describes the Predictions Editor Screen Toolbars and Shortcut Keys 1 Introduction Reliability predictions are one of the most common forms of reliability analysis Reliability predictions predict the failure rate of components and overall system reliability These predictions are used to evaluate design feasibility compare design alternatives identify potential failure areas trade off system design factors and track reliability improvement Failure Rates Reliability predictions are based on failure rates A failure rate can be defined as the anticipated number of times an item will fail in a specified time period It is a calculated value that provides a measure of reliability for a product This value is normally expressed as failures per million hours FPMH but can also be expressed as failures per billion hours FITS For example a component with a failure rate of 2 failures per million hours would be expected to fail 2 times in a million hour time period Failure rate calculations are based on component data such as temperature environment and stress In the prediction model assembly components are structured serially Thus calculated failure rates for assemblies are a sum of the failure rates for components within the assembly Mean Time Between Failures MTBF MTB

Installing ITEM ToolKit

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents